tender domestic water piping & washroom upgrades ... in the amount of _____ (written in words)...

Our mission is to educate learners to their fullest potential in preparation for life-long learning.

TENDER Domestic Water Piping & Washroom Upgrades

West Ferris S. S. – North Bay, ON The Near North District School Board invites qualified vendors to submit tenders for the above project.

Documents may be downloaded from this site with the vendor having the sole responsibility to register their intention to bid as stated. Any difficulty downloading tender documents, or questions as to how to obtain tender documents, contact the Purchasing Department, Near North District School Board, 963 Airport Road, North Bay, Ontario. Phone: 705-472-8170 or 1-800-278-4922. Complete proposal signed under seal, executed, and dated together submitted in sealed, opaque envelopes, clearly marked, “Tender – Domestic Water Piping & Washroom Upgrades – West Ferris S.S. “, will be received until 2:00:00 p.m., local time, Friday, April 6/18 at the address below.

PLEASE DELIVER DIRECTLY TO “PURCHASING DEPARTMENT”

Near North District School Board

963 Airport Road North Bay, ON P1C 1A5

Phone: 705-472-8170 / 1-800-278-4922

NOTE: The Board Office will be closed between 12:00 p.m. and 1:00 p.m. Do not deliver Tenders during that time. Tender forms submitted on or after 2:00:01 p.m. on the date noted above will be returned to the Bidder unopened. Please Note: All tender submissions will be opened publicly, shortly after the time of closing, on the day of closing and at the offices of the Near North District School Board, North Bay. The lowest or any proposal not necessarily accepted. The Near North District School Board is committed to supporting an inclusive and accessible environment. Please ask us how we may help you by contacting us at [email protected] David Thompson, Jackie Young, Chairperson Director of Education

mailto:[email protected]


Near North District School Board

TENDER

Domestic Water Piping & Washroom Upgrades West Ferris S. S. – North Bay, ON

A copy of this document may be downloaded. This document may be viewed only at the

Purchasing Department at the Near North District School Board, 963 Airport Road, North

Bay, ON or by contacting Charlotte Land, Supervisor of Purchasing at 705-472-8170 or 1-800-

278-4922, extension 5025. It is the sole responsibility of the interested vendor to forward by fax

705-472-9927 their intention to bid including their contact information on the following

Registration Form to the Purchasing Department, Near North District School Board Office,

North Bay.

No addenda or additional information will be forwarded to vendors/sub-trades

who are not registered.

NOTE: You will find the Education Act and the Map with our schools on our website just

above the Tenders.

NOTE: The Board Office will be closed between 12:00 p.m. and 1:00 p.m. Do not deliver Tenders during that time.

“VENDORS BIDDING ON PROJECTS WITH THE NEAR NORTH SCHOOL BOARD AGREE TO BE PAID BY ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER (EFT/DIRECT DEPOSIT) SHOULD THEY BE THE SUCCESSFUL BIDDER.”


REGISTRATION FORM

TENDER

Domestic Water Piping & Washroom Upgrades

West Ferris S. S. – North Bay, ON

If you intend to submit a proposal, it is in your best interest to submit this registration form by fax. No addenda or further information will be available to bidders who have not registered. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to register their intent in a timely fashion prior to last date for questions to be able to receive addenda. It is also the responsibility of the bidder to confirm receipt of this registration form by the Purchasing Department. NOTE: The Board Office

will be closed between 12:00 p.m. and 1:00 p.m. Do not deliver Tenders during that time.

Phone: 705-472-8170, Ext. 5025 or Ext. 5037 Fax back to: Purchasing Department – 705-472-9927

Name of Vendor

Street Address City Postal Code

Representative or Contact Person

Telephone fax e-mail address

I am a: General Contractor Sub-Contractor

West Ferris Secondary School

North Bay, ON

Domestic Water Piping and Washroom Upgrades

Project No. 6134

March 2018 Piotrowski Consultants Ltd. 1820 Bond Street North Bay, ON P1B 4V6

I N D E X SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGES 00100 Instructions to Bidders 3 00101 Agreement Between Contractor and Owner 1 Tender Form 2 00131 Asbestos Survey 1 NNDSB Asbestos Survey 191 00800 Supplementary General Conditions 24 01005 General Instructions 3 01300 Submittals 3 01400 Quality Control 2 01545 Safety Requirements 1 01600 Material and Equipment 3 01700 Contract Closeout 3 01 30 10 Alteration Procedures 4 Hot Work Permit 4

02069 Asbestos Abatement Requirements 1 02070 Asbestos Scope of Work 1 02080 Asbestos Assessment Report 1 02082 Type 2 Asbestos Abatement 11 02084 Glove Bag Asbestos Abatement 8 06 10 13 Wood Blocking and Curbing 2 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry 4 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 4 08 11 13 Standard Metal Doors And Frames 7 08 71 00 Door Hardware 3 Hardware Schedule 1 09 03 95 Terrazzo Restoration 3 09 30 00 Tiling 5 09 51 13 Acoustic Panel Ceilings 5 09 66 13 Portland Cement Terrazzo Flooring 3 09 91 10 Painting 10 10 21 14 Metal Toilet Compartments 3 10 28 14 Toilet And Bath Accessories 4 15010 Mechanical General Requirements 8 15130 Thermometers and Pressure Gauges 3 15140 Pipe Hangers and Supports 4 15190 Identification 5 15260 Thermal Insulation for Piping 3 15412 Domestic Water Supply Piping: Copper 3 15413 Drainage Waste and Vent Piping: Cast Iron and Copper 2 15414 Drainage Waste and Vent Piping: Plastic 1 15430 Plumbing Specialties and Accessories 3 15440 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 3 15516 Flexible Connections, Expansion Joints, Anchors and Guides 2 15860 Commercial Fans 3 15891 Ductwork, Metallic, Low Pressure - to 500 PA 4 15893 Flexible Ductwork 2 15911 Duct Accessories 4 15912 Dampers - Balancing 2 15914 Dampers - Fire and Smoke 3 15942 Grilles, Registers and Diffusers 3 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) 5

I N D E X

SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGES 16010 Electrical General Requirements 9 16111 Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings 3 16122 Wires and Cables - 0 - 1000 V 3 16131 Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets 2 16132 Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings 2 16141 Wiring Devices 3 16151 Wire and Box Connections - 0 to 1000V 2 16191 Fastenings and Supports 2 16450 Grounding - Secondary 2 16505 Lighting Equipment 4

West Ferris Secondary School INSTRUCTIONS TO Section 00100

Domestic Water Piping and BIDDERS Page 1 Washroom Upgrades Project No. 6134

Piotrowski Consultants Ltd.

North Bay, ON March 2018

1 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 LOCATION .1 West Ferris Secondary School is located at 60 Marshall Park Drive, North Bay, ON

1.2 TENDERS .1 Sealed stipulated sum tender submitted on the Tender form provided by the Consultant.

The lowest or any tender shall not necessarily be accepted. Include all Addenda numbers on the tender form. More than one tender from a bidder under the same or different names shall not be considered. Collusion between bidders shall be sufficient cause for rejection of all bids so affected. Tenders which are incomplete, conditional, illegible or obscure or which contain additional information not called for, reservations, erasures, alternatives or irregularities of any kind may be rejected as informal. No tender form shall be accepted after closing time. Tenders shall be enclosed in a plain envelope, marked on the outside as to:

.1 Project name – West Ferris Secondary School - Domestic Water Piping and

Washroom Upgrades .2 Closing time and date: Friday, April 6, 2018 at 2:00:00 p.m. local time .3 Bidder's name and address. and shall be delivered to: Near North District School Board 936 Airport Rd, North Bay, Ontario P1C 1A5

Tenders to receive consideration must be in the hands of the above named party at specified date and time.

Tenders are to be valid for sixty (60) days, from closing date. Closing day, Sundays and Holidays and 60th day included.

1.3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE .1 Project construction schedule is from July 3, 2018 to August 27, 2018.

1.4 BID BONDS .1 The Contractor shall furnish with their tender, a Bid Bond in the amount of ten percent

(10%) of the contract amount.

.2 All Bid Bonds shall be from a recognized surety company payable to the Owner and guaranteeing that if awarded the contract:





.1 The bidders shall enter into and execute a formal contract within the time limit specified.

.2 and shall furnish the security required for the performance of the contract.

1.5 SEPARATE AND ALTERNATE PRICES .1 All bidders shall submit all separate and/or alternate prices on the Tender Form in the

spaces provided, or as called for in the specifications or on the drawings. All bidders shall examine Tender Form of these specifications carefully.

1.6 QUALIFICATION .1 Person or persons submitting tenders are to be in the line of work as required by the

contract documents, and are to be able to refer to work of the same nature done previously by them if requested by the Board.

1.7 EXAMINE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE .1 Before submitting a proposal, bidders shall carefully examine the drawings and

specifications, visit the site, fully inform themselves as to the existing conditions and limitations and include in the proposal a sum to cover the cost of all items included in the contract. No allowance shall be made for difficulties arising from the contractor's negligence to visit the site and failure to examine the contract documents.

Each bidder shall satisfy himself by his own study of the drawings and specifications and other contract documents, by calculations and by inspection of the site, as to the conditions existing or likely to exist in connection with the execution of the work, and as to a practicable time within which the work might be successfully completed. He is not to claim at any time after submission of his tender, that there was any misunderstanding with respect to the conditions improved by the contract documents.

1.8 DISCREPANCIES AND/OR OMISSIONS .1 Bidders finding discrepancies in, or omissions from the drawings, specifications or other

documents, or having doubt as to the meaning or intent of any part thereof, should at once notify the Board who shall send written instructions and explanations to all bidders.

All discrepancies and/or omissions found by bidders in any or all of the tender documents shall be reported to the Board a minimum of five (5) days prior to the closing date of Tenders. Bidders are not to take verbal instructions during the tendering period.

1.9 EQUALS .1 It is intended that all materials specified in the specifications shall be used with no equals

unless otherwise noted. Should a contractor desire to use "equals" they must be approved by the Consultant in writing, five (5) full working days prior to the closing date of tenders. No "equals" shall be allowed after closing date of tenders.

1.10 BONDING

.1 Performance Bond and Labour and Material Payment Bond to be provided – 100%





(Specification Section 00800 – 43 Contract Security).

1.11 INSURANCE

.1 Submit proof with the Tender Form, that the Contractor has in place the insurance coverage required by CCDC 2 contract.

1.12 WORKER’S SAFETY INSURANCE BOARD

.1 Submit a copy of the most current certificate of good standing from the Worker’s Safety Insurance Board (WSIB) with the Tender Form.

1.13 ADDENDA .1 Tenderers, may be advised during the tendering period, by Addenda, of required additions

to, deletions from or alterations in the requirements of the tender documents. All such changes shall become an integral part of the tender documents, and shall be allowed for in arriving at the fixed tender sum.

Tenderers shall insert, in the space provided on the Tender form, the addenda numbers of

all Addenda received by them during the tendering period, including any bound into the contract documents. If no Addenda have been received, the word, "NONE" shall be inserted in the space provided on the Tender Form.

1.14 ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER PAYMENT

.1 Vendors bidding on projects with the Near North District School Board Agree to be paid by Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT/Direct Deposit) should they be the successful bidder.

1.15 BIDDER REGISTRATION

.1 Bidders have to fill in registration form and submit to the Near North District School Board

to ensure receipt of addendums issued. Form is available in the tender documents on the Near North District School Board website.

1.16 SALES TAX .1 All sales taxes shall be included. The Contractors will be requested to submit the copies of

material invoices to Owners.

1.17 LIST OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .1 The contract documents Canadian Standard Construction Documents C.C.D.C #2 2008

Stipulated Price Contract.

.2 Specifications for West Ferris Secondary School - Domestic Water Piping and Washroom Upgrades.

.3 Drawings: .1 A1 - A5 - Architectural Drawings .2 M101 - M105 - Mechanical Drawings





.3 E101 - E102 - Electrical Drawings

END OF SECTION 00100

West Ferris Secondary School 00101 Domestic Water Piping and AGREEMENT BETWEEN CONTRACTOR Washroom Upgrades AND OWNER Project Number: 6134 Page 1



1.1. GENERAL

1. The successful tenders, when awarded the Contract, shall be required to sign the Canadian Standard Construction Document C.C.D.C. #2 2008 Edition of the Stipulated Price Contract and the General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract, G.C. #1 to G.C. #12 inclusive and CCDC 41 as amended by the contract.

2. The foregoing document shall be considered as though bound herein and as an integral part of these specifications.

3. Where the term "Contract" is referred to in these specifications, it shall be understood to be this agreement for as described herein.

4. Where the term "Contract Documents" is referred to in these specifications, it shall be understood to be all of the documents including all drawings in the list of contract documents.

5. Failure of any bidder to inspect the contract documents shall signify he has read and acquainted himself fully with the terms of the documents from his own sources.

6. It is solely the responsibility of the tenderers to inspect and acquaint themselves with the conditions of the contract documents.

- 1 -

WEST FERRIS SECONDARY SCHOOL NORTH BAY, ONTARIO DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND WASHROOM UPGRADES

PROJECT NO. 6134 TENDER FORM Date: ______________________________ We: ____________________________________________________________________________________

(Name of Contractual Firm) Hereby submit our proposal for work described by the Following Contract Documents:

West Ferris Secondary School, North Bay, Ontario Domestic Water Piping and Washroom Upgrades

Project No. 6134 Dated: March 2018

We have examined these documents, and also Addendum(s) numbered and dated (if applicable) and are familiar with all conditions affecting work. The Undersigned proposes to furnish Labour, Materials, Equipment and Appliances required by the said documents for the school, for the Stipulated Sum of (excluding HST): Base Bid Tender Price: ___________________________________________________________________________________________ (written in words) _________________________________________________________________ ($ ) (written in numerals) HST in the amount of ________________________________________________________________________ (written in words) _________________________________________________________________ ($ ) (written in numerals) Cash Allowances to be included in the Base Tender Price 1. $30,000.00 cash allowance for miscellaneous work. Separate Prices (to be included in the Base Bid Price with option to delete) 1. Girls/Boys WR #3 Renovation (complete work, Mechanical / Electrical and Architectural) ___________________________________________________________________________________________ (written in words) _________________________________________________________________ ($ ) (written in numerals) 2. Staff Washrooms Renovation - Men’s and Women’s (complete work, Mechanical / Electrical and Architectural) ___________________________________________________________________________________________ (written in words) _________________________________________________________________ ($ ) (written in numerals)

WEST FERRIS SECONDARY SCHOOL NORTH BAY, ONTARIO DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND WASHROOM UPGRADES PROJECT NO. 6134 TENDER FORM Page 2

- 2 -

Separate Prices (to be included in the Base Bid Price) 3. Asbestos remedial work and DSS Consultant costs to be included. Asbestos work to be coordinated and directed by asbestos consultant Grant Johnson – Thomas Contracting, (705) 499-8006 and paid by Division 15. ___________________________________________________________________________________________ (written in words) _________________________________________________________________ ($ ) (written in numerals) Complete Tender Form, signed under seal, executed and dated submitted in sealed envelope, clearly marked WEST FERRIS SECONDARY SCHOOL, NORTH BAY, ON – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND WASHROOM UPGRADES will be received by Near North District School Board, 963 Airport Road, North Bay, Ontario, until Friday, April 6, 2018 at 2:00:00 p.m. local time. Tender Forms submitted after 2:00:00 p.m. on the date noted above, will be returned to the Bidder unopened. This Tender shall be valid for 60 days from the Tender Closing Date. The Board reserves the right to reject any or all Tenders or to accept any that are beneficial to the Board. We are in a position to commence work immediately upon receipt of a Purchase Order, and guarantee to meet deadlines indicated herein. Construction Schedule for Project is from July 3, 2018 to August 27, 2018. The Undersigned to provide a Certificate of Good Standing from the WSIB, Bid Bond, Agreement to Bond and Proof of Insurance to be submitted with Tender Bid Form. The Undersigned agrees to provide under Regulation 322/03 (Collection of Personal Information) to the Education Act (Ontario) with respect to Police Record Checks and Offence Declarations (Collection of Personal Information) to assist the Board in complying with same by providing the Board or such other entity as the Board may designate with a criminal background check covering offences under the Criminal Code, the Controlled Drugs and Substances Act and any other offences which would be revealed by a search of the automated Criminal Records Retrieval System maintained by the RCMP (“Police Record Check”), together with an Offence Declaration in a Board-approved form for every individual or employee of the successful Bidder who may come into direct contact with pupils on a regular basis at a school site of the Board, prior to the occurrence of such possible direct contact and on or before September 1

st each year thereafter with

respect to the Offence Declarations. For the purpose of this Request for Proposal/Tender/Quotation, the Board shall determine in its sole and unfettered discretion whether an individual or employee of the successful Bidder may come into direct contact with pupils on a regular basis. The successful Bidder further acknowledges and agrees that the contract between the Board and the successful Bidder to be entered into pursuant to the terms hereof shall contain provisions of indemnification and provisions allowing the Board to terminate same in the event the successful Bidder fails to provide the Board with a Police Record Check and an Offence

WEST FERRIS SECONDARY SCHOOL NORTH BAY, ONTARIO DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND WASHROOM UPGRADES PROJECT NO. 6134 TENDER FORM Page 3

- 3 -

Declaration for every individual or employee who may come into direct contact with pupils on a regular basis at a school site of the Board, prior to the occurrence of such possible direct contact and on or before September 1

st each year

thereafter with respect to the Offence Declaration. In addition, the contract will contain provisions that will allow the Board, or such other entity as the Board may designate, upon review of the Police Record Check provided to determine that an individual or employee will not be permitted on a school site in circumstances where direct contact with students is probable. The Bidder agrees to Criminal Records Check in accordance with Regulation 322/03 of the Education Act (Ontario). COMPANY NAME SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED PRINCIPAL TYPED NAME OF AUTHORIZED PRINCIPAL DATE ADDRESS TELEPHONE SEAL __________________________________ (Witness – in case of no seal)

West Ferris Secondary School 00131 Domestic Water Piping and ASBESTOS SURVEY Washroom Upgrades Project Number: 6134 Page 1



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. ASBESTOS SURVEY

1. The following is the Owner’s asbestos survey report.

2. This Survey Report was prepared by its author for the Owner and is hereby offered to the bidder in good faith for general information and guidance. The Consultant assumes no responsibility or liability for the completeness and accuracy of the information contained in this report.

3. The Asbestos Survey is provided for the Contractor’s information. The Contractor shall review the report and advise the Consultant in advance of any areas where they expect existing asbestos containing building materials to be disturbed as part of the Work, where abatement is not currently specified to be included in the Work.

4. Should there be a discrepancy between recommendations contained in the report and the requirements of the Contract Documents, the latter shall govern. Advise the Consultant in writing prior to proceeding with the Work.

ACM ReportWest Ferris Secondary

Near North District School Board (NNDSB) ensures that asbestos surveys of its schools are conducted to identify the extent, type and condition of asbestos containing material (ACM). The surveys include:

• inspection of the interior of the facility to identify the extent, type and condition of potential Asbestos Containing Material (ACM);• collection of representative samples of potential ACM; and• submission of samples for laboratory analysis.

This work continues on an ongoing basis and these reports are updated as the inventory of ACM changes as a result of new information or construction work.

Asbestos is a general name for highly fibrous silicate minerals which are valued for their heat and chemical resistant properties. Although there are many types of asbestos, commercially significant types include chrysotile, amosite and crocidolite.

The construction industry has historically been the biggest user of asbestos: in pipe and boiler insulation, as sprayed insulation or fireproofing in buildings, and as a component of building materials in vinyl flooring, ceiling tiles, roofing felts, shingles, etc. Asbestos was also used in commercial products, such as gaskets, sealants, paper and plastic. Although the use of asbestos has recently decreased dramatically, its past widespread use means that it will continue to pose a potential hazard to the renovation and demolition sectors of the construction industry.

Introduction

Background

Friday, February 03, 2017

Friday, February 03, 2017 Page 1 of 188

Area by area observations of accessible locations of the building were made to identify the presence of materials suspected to contain asbestos. The survey included but was not limited to: sprayed on fireproofing, plaster, thermal insulation, ceiling tiles, wall material, vinyl and linoleum flooring material, drywall jointing compound, caulking and materials. The extent, type and condition of potential ACM were documented. The asbestos survey was non-intrusive and did not include inspection of non-accessible mechanical risers, materials which might be enclosed in wall cavities, or roofing and other exterior materials.

Motors, kilns, boilers or piping and valves were not disassembled to determine composition or the possible presence of ACM. However, asbestos may be present in gaskets, caulking, sealants, etc. associated with piping, valves or other equipment.

Following the collection of observations, samples of the potential ACM identified were collected and submitted for laboratory analysis.

Samples for laboratory analysis were submitted to International Asbestos Testing Laboratories which is accredited by the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. Polarized light microscopy (PLM) analysis was performed using the procedures detailed in the US Environmental Protection Agency “Methods for the Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Building Materials, US EPA Report No. 600/R-93/116”. The detection limit for asbestos analysis was 0.25% by weight. Asbestos, if present, was identified as one (1) or more fibrous asbestos minerals, including chrysotile, amosite and crocidolite.

Inspection

Laboratory Analysis

The friability of an ACM is a measure of the ease with which the material can be ground or pulverized, and provides a theoretical measure of the ease with which asbestos fibres can be released into the air. Friable ACM is generally identified as material which can be crumbled, pulverized and/or reduced to powder by hand pressure, such as ceiling tiles, thermal insulation and fire proofing. Non-friable ACM is hard product with bound asbestos, such as floor tiles, pipes, siding, etc. These products pose no danger of releasing airborne fibres unless cut, sawn, ground or sanded.

Under Ontario Regulation 278/05 “Designated Substance — asbestos on construction projects and in buildings and repair operations”, material containing 0.5 percent (%) or more asbestos by weight is considered to be ACM requiring specialised handling, removal and disposal practices. Sections of the regulation dealing specifically with asbestos identify the general duties of employers, requirements for health assessments, training and project notification. The regulation also provides requirements for personal protective equipment and stipulates exposure limits.

Special Note

Black chalkboards in the schools may be porcelain enameled steel. However, any chalkboard of fibrous material should be suspected until proven otherwise with testing regardless of their colour. Currently, all fibrous light green and dark green chalkboards have been Confirmed ACM.


40 West Ferris Secondary

North Bay 1970circaLocated in Contact:497-0730

-

West Ferris Secondary

The data which follows is categorised by broad group according to condition. These are then further divided according to Accessibility.


0-0 Office across from room D234ST21No suspect material was noted above the ceiling.

Material: CB1 : Chalkboard; Black; May be fibreboard. Aprox 32 ft2 Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: CT2 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, loose patern, 2 X 4 feet and cut to size Aprox 182 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: CT6 : Ceiling Tile, smooth white, large circular hole pattern Aprox 182 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 364 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


A207 - Resource Room

Material: CB2 : Chalkboard; Dark Green; May be fibreboard. Aprox 20 ft2 Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: DW1 : Drywall, Contemporary 4 X 8 feet sheets cut to fit. Aprox 96 ft2This material was noted above the ceiling. Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: PL1 : Plaster (on metal or wood lathe or other surface). Aprox 450 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Art Office beside D33BNo suspect material was noted above the ceiling.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


AttendanceThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.

Material: AC1 : 1 by 1 foot white fibrous tile Aprox 220 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


AuditoriumThe fibreglass insulation on pipes in the area and above the ceiling are not considered to be a suspect material. This area includes the mezzanine.

Material: DW1 : Drywall, Contemporary 4 X 8 feet sheets cut to fit. Aprox 9968 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: JC1 : Jointing compound used for seems and corners of drywall. Aprox 997 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: MS1 : Mastic Aprox 4 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Material: PP2 : Insulated elbow, t-joint, valve or other. (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 3 ft2This material was noted above the ceiling. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable

Material: PP2 : Insulated elbow, t-joint, valve or other. (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 24 ft2This material tested positive for asbestos. Refer to sample 40-4A. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


B212 - Art RoomThe area above the ceiling was mostly inaccessible; no suspect materials were noted where it was possible to look.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: PL1 : Plaster (on metal or wood lathe or other surface). Aprox 900 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Basement - Costume Room

Material: CT11 : White ceiling tile with medium tight pattern 2x4 or cut to size Aprox 144 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: DW1 : Drywall, Contemporary 4 X 8 feet sheets cut to fit. Aprox 550 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Moderate (accessible by service and/or custodial staff). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: JC1 : Jointing compound used for seems and corners of drywall. Aprox 6 ft2This material was noted above the ceiling. Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: JC1 : Jointing compound used for seems and corners of drywall. Aprox 55 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Moderate (accessible by service and/or custodial staff). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Basement - HallwayNo area above the ceiling was noted in this area.

Material: PL1 : Plaster (on metal or wood lathe or other surface). Aprox 350 ft2This material was noted on the ceiling. Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: PP2 : Insulated elbow, t-joint, valve or other. (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 1 ft2This material was noted near the bottom of the hall. This material tested positive for asbestos. Refer to sample 40-4A. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Basement - Large Storage AreaThis area has outdoor equipment stored in it. No area above the ceiling was noted in this area.

Material: CT2 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, loose patern, 2 X 4 feet and cut to size Aprox 400 ft2This ceiling tile was used for target practice. Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Poor.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Basement - Room to the left of Costume RoomNo area above the ceiling was noted in this area.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Basement - small room across from large storage rmThe fibreglass insulation on the pipe in the area is not considered to be a suspect material. No area above the ceiling was noted in this area.

Material: PP2 : Insulated elbow, t-joint, valve or other. (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 4 ft2This material tested positive for asbestos. Refer to sample 40-4A. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Moderate (accessible by service and/or custodial staff). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Biology Prep RoomNo suspect material was noted above the ceiling.

Material: CL1 : Counter Top, Black, Laboratory Type Aprox 70 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Boiler RoomThe fibreglass insulation on pipes in the area is not considered to be a suspect material.

Material: CV1 : White or Grey canvas (as may be seen in flex ducts of HVAC systems. Aprox 4 ft2 Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: PP2 : Insulated elbow, t-joint, valve or other. (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 13 ft2Asbestos removed as part of boiler replacement summer 2007 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Boy's bathroom in hallway from room C20 to C24The area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Business Education DepartmentThe fibreglass insulation on the pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable

Material: DW1 : Drywall, Contemporary 4 X 8 feet sheets cut to fit. Aprox 128 ft2The fiberglass insulation on pipes above the ceiling was not considered to be a suspect material. Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Counselling Office near room B213No suspect material was noted above the ceiling.


Visible

Friable


Custodial room across from room A108No suspect material was noted above the ceiling.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 204 ft2This material was noted under the carpet Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Moderate (accessible by service and/or custodial staff). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Custodial room next to ladies washroomThe fibreglass insulation on pipes in the area and above the ceiling are not considered to be a suspect material. This area includes two (2) large pipe chases.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Custodial Room next to Room A206No suspect material was noted above the ceiling.

Material: CT11 : White ceiling tile with medium tight pattern 2x4 or cut to size Aprox 24 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Moderate (accessible by service and/or custodial staff). The condition was last rated as Poor.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: WB2 : Brown fibrous Fibreboard with white or grey covering. Aprox 32 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Moderate (accessible by service and/or custodial staff). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Custodial Staff Room near boiler room.The fibreglass insulation on pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material. This area includes the washrooms.


Visible

Friable

Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 484 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Moderate (accessible by service and/or custodial staff). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: PL1 : Plaster (on metal or wood lathe or other surface). Aprox 148 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Moderate (accessible by service and/or custodial staff). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Custodial Storage Room in Hallway from C20 to C23The fibreglass insulation on the pipe in the area is not considered to be a suspect material. This area includes the pipe chase. No suspect materials noted above the ceiling.


Visible

Friable


D130 - Manufacturing Technology includes classroom


Visible

Friable

Material: CT1 : Ceiling Tile, Stippled White, 2 X 4 feet and ct to size Aprox 400 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: DW1 : Drywall, Contemporary 4 X 8 feet sheets cut to fit. Aprox 130 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: JC1 : Jointing compound used for seems and corners of drywall. Aprox 13 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Equipment Room next to A200The fibreglass insulation on pipes in the area and above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.

Material: CT2 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, loose patern, 2 X 4 feet and cut to size Aprox 6 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


FoyerThis area runs from the administrative office to the student services office. The area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable

Material: PL2 : Texture coat (white); as may be seen on drywall or plaster. Aprox 1514 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


French LabThe fibreglass insulation on pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material. This area includes three (3) rooms partitioned off at the back.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Geography office across from room B213


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Geography Room C225


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Geography Room C226


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Girls Bathroom in hallway from C-20 to C-23The area above the ceiling is inaccessible.

Material: PL1 : Plaster (on metal or wood lathe or other surface). Aprox 350 ft2This material was noted on the ceiling. Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


GymThis area includes two (2) storage rooms and two (2) physical education offices. The fibreglass insulation on pipes in the area and above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable

Material: CB2 : Chalkboard; Dark Green; May be fibreboard. Aprox 32 ft2 Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: CV1 : White or Grey canvas (as may be seen in flex ducts of HVAC systems. Aprox 8 ft2 Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: PP1 : Insulated pipe (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 15 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: PP4 : Transite Pipe Aprox 12 ft2 Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


HallwayThe fibreglass insulation on pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material. This area runs from Room A108 to Room A100 and includes a large upper space.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: CT2 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, loose patern, 2 X 4 feet and cut to size Aprox 2538 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: CT3 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, tight patern, 2 X 4 feet and cut to size Aprox 56 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable

Material: CT5 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, small circular pattern, 2 x 4 feet and cut to size. Aprox 24 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: PL1 : Plaster (on metal or wood lathe or other surface). Aprox 430 ft2This material was noted above the ceiling. Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: PL2 : Texture coat (white); as may be seen on drywall or plaster. Aprox 3360 ft2This material was noted on the ceiling. Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Hallway between A102 and A103The fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.

Material: CT11 : White ceiling tile with medium tight pattern 2x4 or cut to size Aprox 24 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Poor.

Visible

Friable

Material: CT2 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, loose patern, 2 X 4 feet and cut to size Aprox 112 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Poor.

Visible

Friable

Material: CT6 : Ceiling Tile, smooth white, large circular hole pattern Aprox 24 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Hallway from A206 to Physical Education OfficeThe fibreglass insulation on the pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.

Material: CT11 : White ceiling tile with medium tight pattern 2x4 or cut to size Aprox 136 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: CT3 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, tight patern, 2 X 4 feet and cut to size Aprox 8 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable

Material: CT5 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, small circular pattern, 2 x 4 feet and cut to size. Aprox 24 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Hallway from C115 to B127The fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Hallway from Drama Office to Room D234The fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.

Material: AC1 : 1 by 1 foot white fibrous tile Aprox 600 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Hallway from main admin area to student servicesThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Hallway from room B114 to room C120The fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Material: PP4 : Transite Pipe Aprox 4 ft2This material was noted above the ceiling. Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Hallway from room B212 to Room C220The fibreglass insulation on pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material. This area includes the main floor vestibule.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Hallway from room B214 to room B227


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Hallway from room C220 to room C223


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Hallway from room C222 to room D234ST21


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Hallway from Room D129 to Room D133The fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Hallway from room D231 to room D238


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


History office across from room B212


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


History storage room besides the art room


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: DW1 : Drywall, Contemporary 4 X 8 feet sheets cut to fit. Aprox 80 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: JC1 : Jointing compound used for seems and corners of drywall. Aprox 8 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Ladies washroom near A108The fibreglass insulation on the pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Ladies Washroom near room A206The area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable

Material: PL1 : Plaster (on metal or wood lathe or other surface). Aprox 2 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Poor.

Visible

Friable


Ladies washroom near room C120The area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Large storage room on the south side of auditoriumThe fibreglass insulation on pipes in the area is not considered to be a suspect material. No area above the ceiling was noted in this area.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Library - AV Office


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Library - Office near main doorThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.

Material: DW1 : Drywall, Contemporary 4 X 8 feet sheets cut to fit. Aprox 24 ft2This material was covered with vinyl and was on the ceiling. Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Main administrative officeThe fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: FT4 : Vinyl floor - large sheets cut to size. (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 340 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Math OfficeThe fibreglass insulation on the pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Mechanical Room Accessible through Equipment RoomThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.

Material: CV1 : White or Grey canvas (as may be seen in flex ducts of HVAC systems. Aprox 12 ft2 Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Moderate (accessible by service and/or custodial staff). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable

Material: PL2 : Texture coat (white); as may be seen on drywall or plaster. Aprox 672 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: PP2 : Insulated elbow, t-joint, valve or other. (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 47 ft2This material tested positive for asbestos. Refer to sample 40-4A. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Moderate (accessible by service and/or custodial staff). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Men's Washroom near A108The area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Men's Washroom near room A206The area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Men's washroom near room C132The area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Nurses OfficeThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Office - Mr. SchultzThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Office - Mrs. BrunetteThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Office and Storage area behind glass sliding doorThe fibreglass insulation on the pipes above the ceiling are not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: DW1 : Drywall, Contemporary 4 X 8 feet sheets cut to fit. Aprox 384 ft2This material was covered with vinyl Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Office beside AV room in library


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: PL1 : Plaster (on metal or wood lathe or other surface). Aprox 290 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Office near Attendance OfficeNo suspect material was noted above the ceiling.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Office next to hallway in A208 in LibraryThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Office of B. Desjardaines Off of Attendance OfficeThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Photocopy Room across hall from VP officeNo suspect material was noted above the ceiling.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Physical Education Office near room A200This includes a storage area. No suspect materials were noted above the ceiling.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Principal's office and bathroomThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room 117 - Computer LabThe fibreglass insulation on the pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.

Material: CB1 : Chalkboard; Black; May be fibreboard. Aprox 120 ft2 Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room 122 - BusinessThe fibreglass insulation on the pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room 217

Material: BK1 : White or grey fireproof blanket. Aprox 1 ft2 Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: CB1 : Chalkboard; Black; May be fibreboard. Aprox 180 ft2 Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Poor.

Visible

Friable

Material: CL1 : Counter Top, Black, Laboratory Type Aprox 220 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Poor.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Room 220 - Physics Lab


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Room 233 - ElectronicsThe fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room A100/A102 - Men's change roomThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room A101The fibreglass insulation on pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material. The area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: PP2 : Insulated elbow, t-joint, valve or other. (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 25 ft2This material tested positive for asbestos. Refer to sample 40-4A. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Moderate (accessible by service and/or custodial staff). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Room A104 - Dining AreaThe fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room A107 - Family StudiesThe fibreglass insulation on the pipes above the ceiling are not considered to be a suspect material. This area includes washrooms, however the storage room is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Material: DW1 : Drywall, Contemporary 4 X 8 feet sheets cut to fit. Aprox 112 ft2This material was noted covered with vinyl Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room A108 - CafeteriaNo area above the ceiling was noted in this area.


Visible

Friable


Room A108 - ServeryThe fibreglass insulation on pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material. This area includes a kitchen.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: DW1 : Drywall, Contemporary 4 X 8 feet sheets cut to fit. Aprox 160 ft2This material was noted covered with vinyl. Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room A200 - Men's Change RoomThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room A202 - Men's Change RoomThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room A203The fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room A204 - MusicThis area includes the sheet music storage closet. The area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Room A205 - Family Studies and Sewing


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Room A206 - Family Studies & Foods


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room A208 - LibraryThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.

Material: DW1 : Drywall, Contemporary 4 X 8 feet sheets cut to fit. Aprox 85 ft2This material was covered with vinyl Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room A-209 and A-210The fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Room A211 - Student Council OfficeThe fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room B213


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room B230 - History


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room C115 and two (2) back officesThe fibreglass insulation on the pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Room C116The fibreglass insulation on the pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room C118The fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable




Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room C120 - Computer LabThe fibreglass insulation on the pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable




Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room C124 - Computer StudiesThe fibreglass insulation on the pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable




Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room C215 - English


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room C216 - English


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room C218 - English


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room C219 - English


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Room C221 - English


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room C223 - Biology Lab


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Room C224 - Chemistry


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Material: ME1 : Fire retardant mesh typically used with bunsen burners in the lab. Aprox 30 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Room C228 - Geography Room


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room D129 - Construction TechnologyThe fibreglass insulation on pipes in the area is not considered to be a suspect material. This area includes the lower and upper storage rooms. No area above the ceiling was noted in this area.


Visible

Friable

Material: CT2 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, loose patern, 2 X 4 feet and cut to size Aprox 392 ft2This material was noted mostly on the ground. Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Poor.

Visible

Friable

Material: DW1 : Drywall, Contemporary 4 X 8 feet sheets cut to fit. Aprox 320 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Poor.

Visible

Friable

Material: JC1 : Jointing compound used for seems and corners of drywall. Aprox 32 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Poor.

Visible

Friable

Material: PP2 : Insulated elbow, t-joint, valve or other. (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 29 ft2This material tested positive for asbestos. Refer to sample 40-4B. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Room D130 - Manufacturing Technology shopThe fibreglass insulation on pipes in the area is not considered to be a suspect material. No area above the ceiling was noted in this area.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room D131 - AutobodyThe fibreglass insulation on pipes in the area is not considered to be a suspect material. This area includes classroom, storage and spray booth.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room D132 - Power MechanicsThe fibreglass insulation on pipes in the area is not considered to be a suspect material. No area above the ceiling was noted in this area.


Visible

Friable


Room D133 - WoodworkThe fibreglass insulation on pipes in the area is not considered to be a suspect material. No area above the ceiling was noted in this area. This area includes a storage and sawdust room.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: SFP2 : Sprayed on fireproofing material; grey/tan in colour. Aprox 4800 ft2Some of this material was noted partially scraped off and in pieces. Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Poor.

Visible

Friable


Room D-229 - Design and Technology RoomThe fibreglass insulation on the pipe in the area is not considered to be a suspect material. No area above the ceiling was noted in the area.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: PP2 : Insulated elbow, t-joint, valve or other. (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 4 ft2This material tested positive for asbestos. Refer to sample 40-4A. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Room D-231 - Health


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room D234-ST21The fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material. This area includes a small room.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Material: PP2 : Insulated elbow, t-joint, valve or other. (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 2 ft2This material was noted above the ceiling. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Room D235 - Design CentreNo area above the ceiling was noted in this area.


Visible

Friable

Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 1152 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Room D236 - Design CentreThe fibreglass insulation on the pipe in the area is not considered to be a suspect material. No area above the ceiling was noted in this area.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room D237The fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: CT12 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, 1 X 1 Aprox 54 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: CT16 : Ceiling tile, 2x2, grey, rough pattern. Aprox 2400 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 2400 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: PP1 : Insulated pipe (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 1 ft2This material was noted above the ceiling. Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Room D238 - ArtThe fibreglass insulation on pipes in the area is not considered to be a suspect material. No area above the ceiling was noted in this area.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Material: SFP2 : Sprayed on fireproofing material; grey/tan in colour. Aprox 4860 ft2Broken off pieces of this material were noted on horizontal surfaces. Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Poor.

Visible

Friable


Room D33B


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: DW1 : Drywall, Contemporary 4 X 8 feet sheets cut to fit. Aprox 16 ft2This material was noted above ceiling. Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Rooms A103 and A105 - Women's Change RoomThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Rooms B227 to B214


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Science Prep Room


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Material: ME1 : Fire retardant mesh typically used with bunsen burners in the lab. Aprox 2 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: WB1 : Wall board (transite) Aprox 40 ft2This material was located in the fume hoods. Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Second Floor - Book storage across from libraryNo suspect material was noted above the ceiling.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Second Floor - English Office


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Material: PL1 : Plaster (on metal or wood lathe or other surface). Aprox 32 ft2This material was noted above the ceiling Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Second Floor - Lighting Booth


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Second Floor Office - beside lighting boothNo suspect material was noted above the ceiling.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Small office at end of hallway from room C20-C29


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Staffroom areaThis area includes the coat rooms, hallways, and bathrooms. The area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Stairwell from A100 to Physical Education OfficeThe fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: PL1 : Plaster (on metal or wood lathe or other surface). Aprox 3 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Poor.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Stairwell from basement to upper floor.No suspect material was noted above the ceiling.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Stairwell from custodial staff room to room D234ST


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Stairwell from room B114 to Counselling OfficeThe fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Material: PP2 : Insulated elbow, t-joint, valve or other. (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 6 ft2This material was noted above the ceiling. This material tested positive for asbestos. Refer to sample 40-4A. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Stairwell from room C120 to room C220The fibreglass insulation on pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material. This area includes the main floor vestibule.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Stairwell from room C122 to room C223The fibreglass insulation on pipes above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material. This area includes the main floor vestibule.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Stairwell from room C128 to room D229


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Stairwell from room D133 to roof access.The fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Storage Room and Bathroom off of attendance officeThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Storage room beside auditorium - North SideThe fibreglass insulation on the pipe in the area is not considered to be a suspect material. No area above the ceiling was noted in this area.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Student Services OfficeThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Teacher's office in music room.The area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Teacher's office in science prep roomNo suspect material was noted above the ceiling.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Technical Office Beside Room D233BThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable

Material: CB3 : Chalkboard; Light Green; May be fibreboard. Aprox 20 ft2 Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Trojan Alumni ComplexThe fibreglass insulation on pipes in the area is not considered to be a suspect material. The area above the ceiling is inaccessible. This area includes the entire building and room. This complex was built in 2000.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Vice Principal's office - GribbonThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Vice-principal's office - FairfaxThe area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


West Ferris Secondary School 00800 Domestic Water Piping and SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



1. GENERAL 1.1 The General Conditions of the Canadian Construction Document Committee – CCDC 2-2008 –

Stipulated Price Contract, Articles GC-1 through GC-12 inclusive shall form part of this Contract. 1.2 The following Supplementary Conditions modify, change, delete from and/or add to the Articles of

Agreement, the Definitions, and the General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract CCDC 2 – 2008.

1.3 When any Article, Definition, General Condition, Paragraph, or Sub-paragraph in the Agreement and/or General Conditions is supplemented by one of the following paragraphs, the provision of such Article, Paragraph or Sub-Paragraph shall remain in effect and the supplemental provisions shall be considered as added thereto.

1.4 Where any Article, Definition, General Condition, Paragraph or Sub-Paragraph in the Agreement

and/or General Conditions is amended, voided or superseded by any of the following paragraphs, the provision of such Article, Definition, General Condition, Paragraph or Sub-Paragraph not so amended, voided, or superseded shall remain in effect.

1.5 The term “provide” as used in the Contract Documents, shall mean the furnishing of all labour,

materials, equipment, transportation and all other services required, including all costs in connection therewith, to complete the Work.

1.6 Where the word “submit”, “satisfactory”, “approved”, “designated”, “directed”, “inspected”,

“instructed”, “permitted”, “required”, “ordered” or other similar term is used throughout the Contract Documents, it shall be followed by the words, “by the Consultant” unless the contract provides otherwise.

1.7 Where the words “by other” are used in the Specifications or on the drawings, they will not mean by

someone other than the Contractor. The only means by which something shown or specified will be indicated as not being in the Contract is by the use of initials “NIC” or the words “Not In Contract” or “By Owner”.

1.8 Throughout the Contract Documents, wherein the term “Day” is used, amend to read: “Working

Day”, as defined in Definitions. 1.9 The following Articles, Definitions, General Conditions, Paragraphs, Sub-paragraphs or clauses

thereof have been modified in these Supplementary Conditions.

2. MODIFICATIONS TO AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR

2.1 ARTICLE A-5 – PAYMENT 2.1.1 Insert the following values in the blanks of Paragraphs 5.1 “ten” and “10”.

2.1.2 Insert the following in the blanks of Paragraph 5.3.1 “The Bank of Canada”. 2.1.3 Add the following new Paragraph. “5.4 The Consultant may withhold or nullify, in whole or in part, any application for

payment to such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss because of the following:

.1 defective work not remedied, .2 claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims, .3 failure of Contractor to make payment properly to Subcontractors or

suppliers for material and/or labour, .4 damage to the work of another Contractor, .5 unauthorized deviations by Contractor from Contract Documents, .6 unsatisfactory progress of project work by Contractor,




.7 record drawings not current and up-to-date with changes. When the above noted grounds are resolved, payments will be made for amounts

withheld. No interest will be paid on amounts withheld.

2.2 ARTICLE A-6 – RECEIPT OF AND ADDRESSES FOR NOTICES IN WRITING

2.2.1 Amend Paragraph 6.1 to read:

“6.1 Notices in Writing between the parties, or between them and the Consultant, shall

be considered to have been received by the addressee on the date of receipt if delivered by hand or by commercial courier or if sent during normal business hours by fax and addressed as set out below. Such Notices in Writing will be deemed to be received by the addressee on next business day if sent by fax after normal business hours or if sent by overnight commercial courier. Such Notices in Writing will be deemed by be received by the addressee on the fifth Working Day following the date of mailing if sent by pre-paid registered post, where addressed as set out below. An address for a party may be changed y Notice in Writing to the other party setting out the new address in accordance with this article.”

3. DEFINITIONS

3.1 Amend Definition 4 by adding the following to the end of that Definition:

“For purposes of the Contract, the terms “Consultant”, “Architect” and “Engineer” shall be considered synonymous.”

3.2 Amend Definition 12 by adding the following to the end of that Definition:

"For purposes of the Contract, the terms "Owner", "Near North District School Board” shall be considered synonymous.

3.3 Amend Definition 16, Provide, as follows:

"'Provide' means to supply and install. Provide has this meaning whether or not the first letter is capitalized."

3.4 Add a new Definition 27, Act, as follows:

" 'Act' means the Construction Lien Act (Ontario)."

3.5 Add a new Definition 28, Construction Schedule, as follows:

"'Construction Schedule' means the schedule for the performance of the Work provided by the Contractor pursuant to GC3.5, including any amendments to the Construction Schedule made pursuant to the Contract Documents."

3.6 Add a new Definition 29, Environmental Programs, as follows:

"'Environmental Programs” means the environmental plans, programs, procedures and requirements of the Owner found in the manual prepared and maintained by the Owner and referred to in the Instructions to Bidders. The Environmental Programs include Owner's Asbestos Control Program, its mould program and a program for controlling and handling designated substances."

3.7 Add a new Definition 30, Exposed, as follows:




"'Exposed' means visible by the Owner at the completion of the Work, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. Exposed items include all items on roof areas, mechanical and service rooms, inside of cupboards, cabinets and similar items."

3.8 Add a new Definition 31, Force Majeure, as follows:

"'Force Majeure' means any cause, beyond the Contractor's control, other than bankruptcy or insolvency, which prevents the performance by the Contractor of any of its obligations under the Contract and the event of Force Majeure was not caused by the Contractor's default or active commission or omission and could not be avoided or mitigated by the exercise of reasonable effort or foresight by the Contractor. Force Majeure includes Labour Disputes, fire, unusual delay by common carriers or unavoidable casualties, civil disturbance, acts, orders, legislation, regulations or directives of any government or other public authority, acts of a public enemy, war, riot, sabotage, blockage embargo, shortage of materials and supplies, lightning, earthquake, abnormally adverse weather conditions or acts of God."

3.9 Add a new Definition 32, Install, as follows:

"'Install' means install and connect. Install has this meaning whether or not the first letter is capitalized."

3.10 Add a new Definition 33, Labour Dispute, as follows:

"'Labour Dispute' means any lawful or unlawful labour problems, work stoppage, labour disruption, strike (including lockouts decreed or recommended for its members by a recognized contractor's association of which the Contractor is a member or to which the Contractor is otherwise bound), job action, slow down, picketing, refusal to work or continue to work, refusal to supply materials, cessation or work or other labour controversy which does, or might, affect the Work."

3.11 Add a new Definition 34, OHSA, as follows:

"'OHSA' means the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario)"

3.12 Add a new Definition 35, Request for Information, as follows:

"'Request for Information' or 'RFI' means written documentation sent by the Contractor to the Owner or to the Owner's representative or to the Consultant requesting written clarification(s) and/or interpretation(s) of the Drawings and/or Specifications, Contract requirements and/or other pertinent information required to complete the Work of the Contract without applying for a change or changes to the Work."

3.13 Add a new Definition 36, Submittals, as follows:

“’Submittals’ means documents or items required by the Contract Documents to be provided by the Contractor such as:

• Shop Drawings, samples, models, mock-ups to indicate details or characteristics,

before the portion of the Work that they represent can be incorporated into the Work; and,

• Record drawings and manuals to provide instructions to the operation and maintenance of the Work”

3.14 Add a new Definition 37, reviewed, instructed, required, directed, permitted, inspected, ordered, as

follows:




"Wherever the words 'reviewed', 'instructed', 'required', 'directed', 'permitted', 'inspected', 'ordered' or similar words are used they shall mean, unless the context provides otherwise, 'reviewed by the Consultant', 'instructed by the Consultant', 'required by the Consultant', 'directed by the Consultant', 'permitted by the Consultant' and 'ordered by the Consultant'."

3.15 Add a new Definition 38, satisfactory, as follows:

"Wherever the word 'satisfactory' or similar words or phrases are used in the Contract Documents, it means, unless the context provides otherwise, 'satisfactory to the Owner and the Consultant'."

4. AMENDMENTS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT GC 1.1

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

4.1 Amend paragraph 1.1.1 by adding the following between the first and second sentences:

“In many cases, the language of the Contract Documents is written in the imperative for the sake of brevity. Clauses containing instructions or directions are intended for the Contractor and such sentences are deemed to include the words, …“the Contractor shall”.”

4.2 Amend paragraph 1.1.6 by adding the following to the end of that paragraph:

“The Specifications are divided into divisions and sections for convenience but shall be read as a whole and neither such division nor anything else contained in the Contract Documents will be construed to place responsibility on the Consultant to settle disputes among the Subcontractors and Suppliers in respect to such divisions. The Drawings are, in part, diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope of the Work and indicate general and appropriate locations, arrangement and sizes of fixtures, equipment and outlets. The Contractor shall obtain more accurate information about the locations, arrangement and sizes from study and coordination of the Drawings, including Shop Drawings and shall become familiar with conditions and spaces affecting these matters before proceeding with the Work. Where site conditions require reasonable minor changes in indicated locations and arrangements, the Contractor shall make such changes at no additional cost to the Owner. Similarly, where known conditions or existing conditions interfere with new installation and require relocation, the Contractor shall include such relocation in the Work. The Contractor shall arrange and install fixtures and equipment in such a way as to conserve as much headroom and space as possible. The schedules are that portion of the Contract Documents wherever located and whenever issued, compiling information of similar content and may consist of drawings, tables and/or lists.”

4.3 Amend paragraph 1.1.7 by adding subparagraphs 1.1.7.5, 1.1.7.6, 1.1.7.7, 1.1.7.8, and 1.1.7.9 as

follows:

“.5 Annotations on the Drawings shall govern over the graphic representation of the Drawings. .6 Finishes in the room finish schedules shall govern over those shown on the Drawings. .7 Schedules of Division 01 – General Requirements of the Specifications shall form

part of and be read in conjunction with the technical specification section as listed in the table of contents of the Specifications.

4.4 Amend paragraph 1.1.8 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 1.1.8:

“1.1.8 The Owner will provide the Contractor with PDF form of Contract Documents (drawings and

specifications). Contract Documents hard copies can be obtained from Consultant at cost. 4.5 Add a new paragraph 1.1.11 as follows:

“1.1.11 One set of signed and sealed Contract Documents shall be retained by each of the Owner and

the Contractor.”




5. GC 2.2 ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT

5.1 Delete Paragraph 2.2.4 in its entirety. 5.2 Revise Paragraph 2.2.6 to read:

The Consultant will not be responsible for and will not have control, charge or supervision of construction means, methods, schedules, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs required in connection with the Work in accordance with the applicable construction safety legislation, other regulations or general construction practice. The Consultant will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or adhere to the construction schedule. The Consultant will not have control over, charge of or be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or their agents, employees, or any other persons performing portions of the Work.

5.3 Amend paragraph 2.2.7 in the second and third lines by deleting the words: “…except with respect to GC5.1 —FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER”.

5.4 Reference paragraph 2.2.9, add the words:

“The Contractor shall waive any claims against the Consultant arising out of the making of such interpretations and findings in accordance with Paragraphs 2.2.7, 2.2.8 and 2.2.9 at the end of the Paragraph.”

5.5 Add the following to the end of paragraph 2.2.11:

“The Consultant’s obligation to make findings on a large claim or large number of claims is subject to the terms and conditions of the Owner/Consultant Agreement.”


“If, in the opinion of the Contractor, the Supplemental Instruction involves an adjustment in the Contract Price or in the Contract Time, it shall, within ten (10) Working days of receipt of a Supplemental Instruction provide the Consultant with a written notice to that effect. In the event that the Contractor needs additional information to determine whether a Supplemental Instruction involves an adjustment of the Contract Price or in the Contract Time, it may issue a written request to the Consultant seeking such additional information. Following receipt of such information, the Contractor shall, within ten (10) Working days of receipt of such additional information provide the Consultant with the written notice described in the first sentence of this paragraph 2.2.13. Failure to provide written notification within the time stipulated in this paragraph 2.2.13 shall be deemed an acceptance of the Supplemental Instruction by the Contractor without adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time.”

5.7 Amend paragraph 2.2.14 to read:

“The Consultant will review and take appropriate action upon Shop Drawings, Samples and other Contractor’s Submittals, which are provided, in accordance with Contract Documents.

5.8 Add new paragraphs 2.2.19 and 2.2.20 as follows:

“2.2.19 The Consultant’s services will be performed solely for the benefit of the Owner and no

Contractor, Subcontractor, Supplier or other third party shall have any claim against the Consultant as a result of the performance or non-performance of the Consultant’s services. The Contractor shall include this provision in any contracts it makes with its Subcontractors, Suppliers and others and shall require such Subcontractors, Suppliers and others to include the same term in their contracts with sub-Subcontractors, sub-Suppliers and others.




2.2.20 The Specifications are divided into divisions and sections for convenience but shall be

read as a whole and neither such division nor anything else contained in the Contract Documents will be construed to place responsibility on the Consultant to settle disputes among Subcontractors and Suppliers in respect to such divisions.”

6. GC 2.4 DEFECTIVE WORK

6.1 Add a new paragraph 2.4.1.1 as follows:

“2.4.1.1 The Contractor shall prioritize the correction of any defective Work which, in the sole

discretion of the Owner, adversely affects the day to day operation of the Owner.”

7. GC 3.1 CONTROL OF THE WORK

7.1 Add a new paragraph 3.1.3 as follows:

3.1.3 Prior to commencing individual procurement, fabrication and construction activities, the

Contractor shall verify, at the Place of the Work, all relevant measurements and levels necessary for proper and complete fabrication, assembly and installation of the Work and shall further carefully compare such field measurements and conditions with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Where dimensions are not included or exact locations are not apparent, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Consultant in writing and obtain written instructions from the Consultant before proceeding with any part of the affected Work.

8. GC 3.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS

8.1 Delete subparagraphs 3.2.2.1 and 3.2.2.2 in their entirety and substitute “intentionally left blank”.

8.2 Delete paragraph 3.2.3.2 and replace it with the following:

“3.2.3.2 Co-ordinate and schedule the activities and work of other contractors and Owner’s own forces

with the Work of the Contractor and connect as specified or shown in the Contract Documents;”


“3.2.3.4 Subject to GC9.4 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY, for the Owner’s own forces and for other

contractors, assume overall responsibility for compliance with all aspects of the applicable Health and Safety legislation of the Place of the Work, including all the responsibilities of the “constructor” under OHSA.”

9. GC 3.4 DOCUMENT REVIEW

9.1 Delete the second sentence of paragraph 3.4.1 and replace it with the following two sentences:

“Such review by the Contractor shall meet the standard of care described in paragraph 3.15.1 of this Contract. Except for the obligation to make such review and report the result, the Contractor does not assume any responsibility to the Owner or to the Consultant for the accuracy of the Contract Documents.”

9.2 Amend paragraph 3.4.1 in the fourth line, at the beginning of the third sentence, by adding the

words, “Provided it has exercised the degree of care and skill described in this paragraph 3.4.1, the Contractor...”.




9.3 Add new paragraphs 3.4.2 and 3.4.3 as follows:

“3.4.2 Errors, inconsistencies and/or omissions in the Drawings and/or Specifications which do not allow completion of the Work of the Contract shall be brought to the Consultant’s attention prior to the execution of the Contract by means of an RFI.

3.4.3. Notwithstanding the foregoing, errors, inconsistencies, discrepancies and/or omissions shall

not include lack of reference on the Drawings or in the Specifications to labour and/or Products that are required or normally recognized within respective trade practices as being necessary for the complete execution of the Work. The Contractor shall not use subsequent RFIs, issued during execution of the Work, to establish a change and/or changes in the Work pursuant to Part 6 – CHANGES IN THE WORK.”

10. GC 3.5 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

10.1 Further amend paragraph 3.5.1 by adding a new subparagraph 3.5.1.2 as follows:

“3.5.1.2 provide the expertise and resources, such resources including manpower and equipment, as

are necessary to maintain progress under the construction schedule referred to in paragraph 3.5.1.1 or any successor or revised schedule approved by the Owner pursuant to this GC3.5.”

10.2 Delete existing paragraph 3.5.1.2 and replace it with a new paragraph which is numbered 3.5.1.3 and

reads as follows:

“3.5.1.3 continuously monitor the progress of the Work and provide a monthly progress schedule

covering all of the baseline activities and including the actual start, actual finish and percentage completion of those activities. Each month, the Contractor shall submit, for the Owner’s approval, any changes made to the baseline logic and activity durations.”

10.3 Delete existing paragraph 3.5.1.3 and replace it with a new paragraph which is numbered 3.5.1.4 and

reads as follows:

“3.5.1.4 if after applying the expertise and resources required under paragraph 3.5.1.2, the Contractor

forms the opinion that the slippage in schedule reported in paragraph 3.5.1.3 cannot be recovered by the Contractor, it shall, in the same notice provided under paragraph 3.5.1.3, indicate to the Consultant if the Contractor intends to apply for an extension of Contract Time as provided in PART 6 —CHANGES IN THE WORK.”


“3.5.2 Without limiting the other obligations of the Contractor under GC3.5, the Contractor shall not

amend the baseline schedule described in paragraph 3.5.1.1 without the prior written consent of the Owner. In addition, at each site construction meeting, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner and the Consultant a two (2) week look-ahead schedule indicating the major activities to be undertaken or constructed in such two (2) week period.”

11. GC 3.6 SUPERVISION

11.1 Delete paragraph 3.6.2 in its entirety and replace it with the following:

“3.6.2 The supervisor, and any project manager appointed by the Contractor, shall represent the

Contractor at the Place of Work and shall have full authority to act on written instructions given by the Consultant and/or the Owner and the Owner’s representative. Instructions given to the supervisor or the project manager shall be deemed to have been given to the Contractor and both the supervisor and any project manager shall have full authority to act on behalf of the Contractor and bind the Contractor in matters related to this Contract.”





“3.6.3 The Owner, acting reasonably, shall have the right to order the Contractor to remove from the

Project any representative or employee of the Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers who, in the opinion of the Owner, are a detriment to the Project.”

12. GC 3.7 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS


“3.7.7 Where provided in the Contract, the Owner may assign to the Contractor, and the Contractor

agrees to accept, any contract procured by the Owner for Work or services required on the Project that has been pre-tendered or pre-negotiated by the Owner.”

13. GC 3.8 LABOUR AND PRODUCTS

13.1 Amend paragraph 3.8.1 by adding the following sentence at the end of that paragraph:

“The Contractor represents and warrants that the Products provided for in accordance with the Contract are not subject to any conditional sales contract and are not subject to any security rights obtained by any third party which may subject any of the Products to seizure and/or removal from the Place of the Work.”

13.2 Delete paragraph 3.8.2 and replace it with the following:

“3.8.2 Products provided shall be new and shall conform to all current applicable specifications of the

Canadian Standards Association, Canadian Standards Board or General Standards Board, ASTM, National Building Code, Ontario Building Code, National Fire Prevention Association, the Technical Standards and Safety Authority (also known as TSSA) and all governmental authorities having jurisdiction at the Place of the Work, unless otherwise specified. Products which are not specified shall be of a quality consistent with those specified and their use acceptable to the Consultant. Products brought on to the Place of the Work by the Contractor shall be deemed to be the property of the Owner, but the Owner shall be under no liability for loss thereof or damage thereto arising from any cause whatsoever. The said Product shall be at the sole risk of the Contractor.”

13.3 Amend paragraph 3.8.3 by adding the words, “..., agents, Subcontractors and Suppliers. . .“ after

the “employees” toward the end of line one.

13.4 Also with respect to paragraph 3.8.3, add three new sentences to the end of this paragraph which read as follows:

“Without in any way limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Contractor shall prepare and implement the job site rules more particularly described in the tender documents. If no job site rules are described in the tender documents, the Contractor shall draft job site rules for the review and approval of the Owner. Any such job site rules prepared by the Contractor shall be consistent with the Contractors duties and obligations under the OHSA and shall also include provisions making smoking and the consumption of alcohol or non-prescription drugs on the Project site the subject of discipline proceedings and/or termination of employment.”

13.5 Add new paragraphs 3.8.4, 3.8.5 and 3.8.6 as follows:

“3.8.4 Upon receipt of a written notice from the Consultant, the Contractor shall dismiss from the

Place of the Work tradesmen and labourers whose Work is unsatisfactory to the Consultant or who are considered by the Consultant to be unskilled or otherwise objectionable.




3.8.5 The Contractor shall not employ any persons on the Work whose labour affiliation, or lack thereof, is incompatible with other labour employed in connection with the Work. Any costs arising from Labour Disputes, as a result of the employ of any such person by the Contractor, it’s Subcontractor or Suppliers shall be the sole expense of the Contractor.

3.8.6 The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner and its representatives and shall take all

reasonable and necessary actions to maintain stable and harmonious labour relations with respect to the Work at the Place of the Work, including cooperation to attempt to avoid Work stoppages, trade union jurisdictional disputes and other Labour Disputes.”

14. GC 3.9 DOCUMENTS AT THE SITE


3.9.1 The Contractor shall keep one copy of the current Contract Documents, Supplemental

Instructions, Contemplated Change Orders, Change Orders, Change Directives, Cash Allowance Disbursement Authorizations, reviewed Shop Drawings, Submittals, reports and records of meetings at the Place of the Work, in good order and available to the Owner and Consultant.

15. GC 3.10 SHOP DRAWINGS

15.1 Add new paragraphs 3.10.13, 3.10.14, 3.10.15, 3.10.16, 3.10.17 and 3.10.18 as follows:

“3.10.13 Reviewed Shop Drawings shall not authorize a change in the Contract Price and/or the

Contract Time.

3.10.14 The Contractor shall prepare a Shop Drawings schedule acceptable to the Owner and the

Consultant prior to the first application for payment. A draft of the proposed Shop Drawings schedule shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Consultant and the Owner for approval. The draft Shop Drawings schedule shall clearly indicate the phasing of Shop Drawings submissions.

3.10.15 Except where the parties have agreed to a different Shop Drawings schedule pursuant to

paragraph 3.10.3, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements for Shop Drawings submissions stated in the Specifications, Section 01300, Submittals.

3.10.16 The Contractor shall not use the term “by others” on Shop Drawings or other Submittals.

The related trade, Subcontractor or Supplier shall be stated. 3.10.17 Certain Specifications sections require the Shop Drawings to bear the seal and signature

of a professional engineer. Such professional engineer must be registered in the jurisdiction of the Place of the Work and shall have expertise in the area of practice reflected in the Shop Drawings.

3.10.18 The Consultant will review and return Shop Drawings and Submittals in accordance with the

Schedule agreed upon in 3.10.3, or, in the absence of such a schedule, with reasonable promptness. If, for any reason, the Consultant cannot process the Shop Drawings and/or Submittals within the agreed-upon schedule or with reasonable promptness, the Consultant shall notify the Contractor and they shall meet to review and arrive at an acceptable revised schedule for processing. The Contractor shall update the Shop Drawings and Submittals schedule to correspondence to changes in the construction schedule. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time may be made only as provided in the Contract.

16. GC 3.13 CLEANUP

16.1 Add new paragraph 3.13.4 as follows:




3.13.4 In the event that the Contractor fails to remove waste and debris as provided in this GC 3.13,

then the Owner or the Consultant, may give the Contractor twenty-four (24) hours’ written notice to meet its obligations respecting clean up. Should the Contractor fail to meet its obligations pursuant to this GC 3.13 within the twenty-four (24) hour period next following delivery of the notice, the Owner may remove such waste and debris and deduct from payments otherwise due to the Contractor, the Owner’s costs for such clean up, including a reasonable markup for administration.”

17. GC 3.15 CONTRACTOR STANDARD OF CARE

17.1 Add a new General Condition 3.15 as follows:

“3.15 CONTRACTOR STANDARD OF CARE

3.15.1 In performing this Contract, the Contractor shall exercise the degree of care, skill and

diligence that would normally be exercised by an experienced, skilled and prudent contractor supplying similar services for similar projects in a first class and expeditious manner. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that, throughout this Contract, the Contractor’s obligations, duties and responsibilities shall be judged, evaluated and interpreted in accordance with this standard. The Contractor shall exercise the same standard of care in respect of any Products, personnel or procedures which it may recommend to the Owner or employ on the Project.”

18. GC 3.16 CONTRACTOR USE OF PERMANENT EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEMS 18.1 Add a new General Condition 3.16 as follows:

“3.16 CONTRACTOR USE OF PERMANENT EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEMS

3.16.1 With the prior written approval of the Owner, the Contractor may make use of elements of the

mechanical and electrical systems or equipment comprising a permanent part of the Work for the purpose of providing heat or power to the Project during the final stages of construction. In such event, and before the issuance of the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, the Contractor shall clean and make good, to the satisfaction of the Consultant, such systems and equipment as it had been permitted to use. The Contractor shall pay any and all costs associated with such use, cleaning and making good.”

19. GC 5.1 FINANCING INFORMATION REQUIRED OF THE OWNER

19.1 Delete GC5.1 in its entirety and replace it with “Intentionally left blank.”

20. GC 5.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 20.1 Amend paragraph 5.2.3 by adding the following to the end of that paragraph:

“No amount claimed shall include Products delivered to the Place of the Work unless the Products are free and clear of all security interest, liens, and other claims of third parties.”


“Such statement of values shall subdivide the Contractor’s allocation for “general conditions” to identify a separate line item labeled “allocation for baseline schedule required by GC3.5.” The allocation to such line item shall be calculated as follows:

.1 where the Contract Price is $2,000,000 or less, the greater of $5,000 and 5% of the

total amount allocated by the Contractor to “general conditions;




In addition, the statement of values shall identify a separate line item labeled “allocation for warranty obligations described in GC12.3”. The allocation to such line item shall be $_0.30% of Stipulated Sum Price”

20.3 Amend paragraph 5.2.7 by adding the following new sentence at the end of that paragraph:

“Any Products delivered to the Place of the Work but not yet incorporated into the Work shall remain at the risk of the Contractor notwithstanding the title has passed to the Owner pursuant to GC13.1 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIALS.”


“5.2.8 The Contractor shall submit, with each application for progress payment after the first, a

Statutory Declaration, on an original form of CCDC Document 9A-2001, stating that all accounts for labour, subcontracts, Products, Construction Equipment and other indebtedness which may have been incurred by the Contractor and for which the Owner might in any way be held responsible have been paid in full up to the previous invoice, except for amounts properly retained as a holdback or as an identified amount in dispute

. 5.2.9 The Contractor shall submit Workplace Safety & Insurance Board Clearance Certificate,

with each application for progress payment.

5.2.10 The Contractor shall prepare and maintain current as-built Drawings which shall consist of

the Drawings and Specifications revised by the Contractor during the Work, showing changes to the Drawings and Specifications, which current as-built Drawings shall be maintained by the Contractor and made available to the Consultant for review with each application for progress payment. The Consultant reserves the right to retain a reasonable amount for the value of the as-built Drawings not presented for review.”

21. GC 5.3 PROGRESS PAYMENTS


“5.3.2 If the Contractor fails to provide a statutory declaration as required by paragraph

5.2.8 or the clearance certificate required by paragraph 5.2.1, the Owner shall be entitled to deduct from amounts otherwise payable to the Contractor an amount sufficient to cover any liability which it might incur as a result of the Contractor’s failure.”

22. GC 5.4 SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK 22.1 Amend paragraph 5.4.3 by adding the following sentence at the end of the paragraph:

“Immediately following the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, the Contractor shall publish the Certificate in the manner provided in the Act failing which publication, the Owner shall be at liberty to publish and back charge the Contractor for its reasonable costs for doing so.”


“5.4.4 The Contractor acknowledges that the Submittals described in this paragraph 5.4.4are

critical to the Owner’s use, occupancy and maintenance of the Project and agrees to make such Submittals to the Owner, before or after applying for the payment described in paragraph 5.4.1, as follows:

.1 submit to the Consultant, with its application for payment, all written guarantees,

warranties, certificates, testing and balancing reports, distribution system




diagrams, Shop Drawings, maintenance and operating instructions, spare parts, maintenance manuals and materials and any other materials or documentation required by the Contractor, except for record drawings;

.2 with respect to record or as built drawings, the Contractor shall submit full and

complete record or as-built drawings to the Consultant within forty-five (45) days of the issuance of the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work and the Owner shall be at liberty to withhold from amounts otherwise payable to the Contractor the sum of $5,000.00 as security for the obligation of the Contractor to deliver such record or as built drawings within the time described in this paragraph 5.4.4.”

23. GC 5.5 PAYMENT OF HOLD BACK UPON SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK

23.1 Delete paragraph 5.5.3 in its entirety and substitute “Intentionally left blank”.

24. GC 5.6 PROGRESSIVE RELEASE OF HOLDBACK 24.1 Add a new paragraph 5.6.4 as follows:

“5.6.4 For release of holdback on subcontract Work which is 100% complete, prior to final

payment, the Contractor shall make application by written request for a review to determine the date of completion of the subcontract and shall submit such supporting material as the Consultant may in his discretion require, and may include statutory declarations from such persons and dealing with such matters as the Consultant requires. Such material shall in any event include:

.1 Description of the scope of Work included in the subcontract.

.2 Declaration of Last Supply by the Subcontractor as prescribed in subsection 31(5)

of the Act (Form 5).

.3 Certificate of Completion of Subcontract as prescribed in subsection 33(1) of the

Act (Form 7).

.4 Workplace Safety & Insurance Board clearance certificate for the Contractor, the

Subcontractor concerned, and any other Subcontractors and Suppliers who have provided any services to the Subcontractor.

.5 Statutory declaration by an officer of the Subcontractor in the form CCDC

Document 9B - 2001.

.6 Contractor's written acknowledgement to the Owner that the requirements of the

Contract Documents will not be altered by early release of the holdback of the completed subcontracts.

.7 Confirmation by the bonding company that it has been notified of the intent to

claim early release of holdback and does not object.”

25. GC 5.7 FINAL PAYMENT

25.1 Amend paragraph 5.7.4, in line 2, by removing “5” by replacing it with “15 Working Days”.

26. GC 6.1 CHANGES





“This requirement is of the essence and it is the express intention of the parties that any claims by the Contractor for a change in the Contract Price and/or Contract Time shall be barred unless there has been strict compliance with PART VI CHANGES IN THE WORK. No course of conduct or dealing between the parties, no express or implied acceptance of alterations or additions to the Work and no claims that the Owner has been unjustly enriched by any alteration or addition to the Work, whether in fact there is any such unjust enrichment or not, shall be the basis of a claim for additional payment under this Contract or a claim for any extension of the Contract Time.”


“The Contractor agrees that changes resulting from construction coordination including but not limited to site surface conditions, site coordination, Subcontractor and Supplier coordination are included in the Contract Price and shall not entitle the Contractor to claim in addition to the Contract Price in relation to coordination.”

27. GC 6.2 CHANGE ORDER


“6.2.3 The value of a change shall be determined in one or more of the following methods as directed by the Owner:

.1 by estimate and acceptance of a lump sum.

.2 by unit prices established in the Contract or subsequently agreed upon. Unit Prices shall

include overhead, profit, and other reasonable charges of the Contractor and shall be the total cost to the Owner. Adjustment to the Contract Price shall be based on a net quantity difference from the original quantity.”

27.2 Add new paragraph 6.2.4 as follows: “6.2.4 For work done and products supplied by unit prices set out in the Contract or subsequently

agreed upon, the Contractor shall calculate the new quantity of the work and/or product supplied and then only shall the tender unit price, or the previously agreed upon unit price be applied, the result either an extra or a credit to the contract sum.”


“6.2.5 For work done and products supplied by cost and a fixed or percentage fee, the contractor shall submit a completed itemized breakdown, substantiated with invoices for the products and time sheets for the work, showing the cost of the work and the products plus percentages as herein noted.

.1 Subcontractor's mark up shall be five (5%) percent overhead and five

(5%) percent profit, on which the Contract shall be allowed five (5) percent as administration and supervision fee.

.2 Contractor's mark up, where no Subcontractor is involved shall be five (5%) percent overhead and five (5%) percent profit which shall include administration and supervision fee.

.3 Cost of work shall be actual rates paid, plus the cost of actual statutory benefits.”

28. GC 6.3 CHANGE DIRECTIVE




28.1 Delete paragraph 6.3.7.1 the introductory language and replace it with the following:

.1 salaries, wages and benefits paid to personnel in the direct employ of the Contractor, applying the labour rates set out in the wage schedule in the Contract Documents or as otherwise agreed between the Owner and Contractor for personnel…"

28.2 Delete paragraphs 6.3.7.1(1), (2), (3) and (4) and replace them with the following:

“(1) carrying out the Work, including necessary supervisory services;

(2) intentionally left blank; (3) engaged in the preparation of Shop Drawings, fabrication drawings, coordination drawings

and project record drawings: or… (4) including clerical staff engaged in processing changes in the Work.”


“6.3.14 Without limitation, the cost of performing the Work attributable to the Change Directive

does not include:

.1 head office salaries and benefits and all other overhead or general expenses,

except only for the salaries, wages and benefits of personnel described in paragraph 6.3.4.2 and the contributions, assessments or taxes referred to in paragraphs 6.3.4.3;

.2 capital expenses and interest on capital;

.3 general clean-up, except where the performance of the Work in the Change

Directive causes specific additional clean-up requirements;

.4 wages paid for field supervision of Subcontractors;

.5 wages, salaries, rentals, or other expenses that exceed the rates that are

standard in the locality of the Place of the Work that are otherwise deemed unreasonable by the Consultant;

.6 any costs or expenses attributable to the negligence, improper Work,

deficiencies, or breaches of contract by the Contractor or Subcontractor; and

.7 any cost of quality assurance, such as inspection and testing services, charges

levied by authorities, and any legal fees unless any such costs or fees are pre-approved in writing by the Owner.”

29. GC 6.4 CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS


“6.4.1.1 The Contractor confirms that, prior to tendering the Project, it carefully investigated the

Place of the Work and applied to that investigation the degree of care and skill described in paragraph 3.15.1, given the amount of time provided between the issue of tender documents and the actual closing of tenders.

6.4.1.2 If the Contractor has not conducted such careful investigation, it is deemed to assume all




risk of conditions or circumstances now existing or arising in the course of the Work which could make the Work more expensive or more difficult to perform than was contemplated at the time the Contract was executed. No claim by the Contractor will be entertained in connection with conditions which could reasonably have been ascertained by such investigation or other due diligence undertaken prior to the execution of the Contract.”

29.2 Amend paragraph 6.4.2 by adding a new first sentence which reads as follows:

“6.4.2 Having regard to paragraph 6.4.1, if the Contractor believes that the conditions of the

Place of the Work differ materially from those reasonably anticipated, differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or were concealed from discovery notwithstanding the conduct of the investigation described in paragraph 6.4.1, it shall notify the Owner and Consultant in writing no later than five (5) Working Days after the first observation of such conditions.”

29.3 Amend the existing second sentence of paragraph 6.4.2, in the second line, following the word

“materially” by adding the words “or were concealed from discovery notwithstanding the conduct of the investigation described in paragraph 6.4.1.”

29.4 Delete paragraph 6.4.3 and substitute the following:

“6.4.3 If the Consultant makes a finding pursuant to paragraph 6.4.2 that no change in the

Contract Price or the Contract Time is justified, the Consultant shall report in writing the reasons for this finding to the Owner and the Contractor.”

30. GC 6.5 DELAYS

30.1 Amend paragraphs 6.5.1 by deleting all of the words in the fifth line following the word “for” and

substituting the following:

"…..reasonable direct costs directly flowing from the delay but excluding any consequential, indirect or special damages.”


“6.5.3 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by Force Majeure, then the

Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may recommend in consultation with the Contractor. The extension of time shall not be less than the time lost as a result of the event causing the delay, unless the Contractor agrees to a shorter extension. The Contractor shall not be entitled to payment for costs incurred by such delays unless such delays result from the actions of the Owner.”


“6.5.6 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by an act or omission of the

Contractor or anyone employed or engaged by the Contractor directly or indirectly, or by any cause within the Contractor’s control, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may decide in consultation with the Contractor. The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for all reasonable costs incurred by the Owner as the result of such delay, including all services required by the Owner from the Consultant as a result of such delay by the Contractor and, in particular, the cost of the Consultant’s services during the period between the date of Substantial Performance of the Work stated in Article A-1 herein as the same may be extended through the provisions of these General Conditions and any later, actual date of Substantial Performance of the Work achieved by the Contractor.

6.5.7 The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, maintenance and protection of the Work




in the event of any suspension of construction as a result of the delay described in paragraph 6.5.1, 6.5.2 or 6.5.3. In the event of such suspension, the Contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner for the reasonable costs incurred by the Contractor for such protection, but excluding the costs of the Contractor’s head office personnel, for such care, maintenance and protection. The Contractor’s entitlement to costs pursuant to this paragraph 6.5.6, if any, shall be in addition to amounts, if any, to which the Contractor is entitled pursuant to paragraph 6.5.1, 6.5.2 or 6.5.3.

6.5.8 Without limiting the obligations of the Contractor described in GC3.2 or GC9.4, the Owner

may, by notice in writing, direct the Contractor to stop the Work where the Owner determines that there is an imminent risk to the safety of persons or property at the Place of Work. In the event that the Contractor receives such notice, it shall immediately stop the Work and secure the site. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of the Contract Time or to an increase in the Contract Price unless the resulting delay, if any, would entitle the Contractor to an extension of the Contract Time or the reimbursement of the Contractor’s costs as provided in paragraph 6.5.1, 6.5.2 or 6.5.3.”

31. GC 7.1 OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM THE WORK, STOP THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE

CONTRACT

31.1 Amend paragraph 7.1.2 by adding the words “……..fails or neglects to maintain the latest schedule

provided pursuant to GC3.5...”. Immediately following the word “properly” in line one.

32. GC 7.2 CONTRACTOR’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT

32.1 Amend paragraph 7.2.2, in line 1, by deleting “20 Working Days” and replacing it with “45 days”.

32.2 Delete paragraph 7.2.3.1 and replace it with “Intentionally left blank”.

32.3 Delete paragraph 7.2.3.3 and replace it with the following:

“7.2.3.3 The Owner fails to pay the Contractor when due the amounts certified by the Consultant or

awarded by arbitration or a Court, except where the Owner has a bona fide claim for setoff, or…”

32.4 Amend paragraph 7.2.3.4 by deleting the comma toward the end of the first line. Further amend

paragraph

7.2.3.4 by deleting the phrase beginning with the word “except” and ending with the word “Owner”. 32.5 Renumber paragraph 7.2.5 as 7.2.6. Add a new paragraph 7.2.5 as follows:

“7.2.5 If the default cannot be corrected within the five Working Days specified in paragraph 7.2.4,

the Owner shall be deemed to have cured the default if it: .1 commences correction of the default within the specified time; .2 provides the Contractor with an acceptable schedule for such correction; and .3 completes the correction in accordance with such schedule.

32.6 Delete renumbered paragraph 7.2.6 in its entirety and replace it with the following:

“7.2.6 If the Contractor terminates the Contract under the conditions described in this GC7.2, the

Contractor shall be entitled to be paid for all Work performed to the date of termination. The Contractor shall also be entitled to recover the direct costs associated with termination, including the costs of demobilization, losses sustained on Products and construction machinery and equipment. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any recovery for any special, indirect or consequential losses.”




33. GC 8.2 NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION AND ARBITRATION

33.1 Delete GC8.2 in its entirety

34. GC 8.3 RETENTION OF RIGHTS

34.1 Delete GC 8.3 in its entirety

35. GC 9.1 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY 35.1 Amend paragraph 9.1.1.1 by adding the following words at the end of that subparagraph: ”…which

the Contractor could not reasonably have discovered applying the standard of care described in paragraph 3.14.1;”


“9.1.5 Without in any way limiting the Contractor’s obligations under this GC9.1, should the

Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier cause loss or damage to trees or other plantings, whether owned by the Owner or third parties, the Contractor shall be liable for the replacement cost of the trees or other plantings damaged, including the cost of any arborist or other Consultant, and such costs may be deducted by the Owner from amounts otherwise owing to the Contractor.”

36. GC 9.2 TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES


“.5 In addition to the steps described in subparagraph 9.2.5.3, take any further steps it deems

necessary to mitigate or stabilize any conditions resulting from encountering toxic or hazardous substances or materials.”

36.2 Add the following to paragraph 9.2.6 after the word “responsible” in line two:

“…or whether any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage to the property of the Owner or others,

36.3 Amend paragraph 9.2.8 by adding the following after the word “responsible” in line two:

“…or that any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage to the property of the Owner or others,..”


“9.2.10 Without limiting its other obligations under this GC9.2, the Contractor acknowledges that

its obligations under the Contract include compliance with the Environmental Programs, including, but not limited to, the Asbestos Abatement Program. The Contractor acknowledges that the Owner may suffer loss and damage should the Contractor fail to comply with the Environmental Programs and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the




Owner with respect to any loss or damage to which the Owner is exposed by the Contractor’s failure to comply. The Contractor expressly agrees that such loss and damage shall be included within the scope of the Contractor’s indemnity described in paragraph 12.1.1 of the General Conditions. The Contractor acknowledges that should it fail to comply with the Environmental Program, such failure will constitute a failure to comply with the Contract to a substantial degree within the meaning of paragraph 7.1.2.”

37. GC 9.4 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY


“9.4.1 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for construction safety at the Place of the Work

and for compliance with the rules, regulations and practices required by the applicable construction health and safety legislation and shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Work.”


“9.4.2 Prior to the commencement of the Work, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner:

.1 a current WSIB clearance certificate;

.2 copies of the Contractor’s insurance policies having application to the Project or certificates of insurance, at the option of the Owner;

.3 documentation of the Contractor’s in-house safety-related programs;

.4 a copy of the Notice of Project filed with the Ministry of Labour naming itself as “constructor” under OHSA.

9.4.3 The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, its agents, officers,

directors, employees, Consultants, successors and assigns from and against the consequences of any and all safety infractions committed by the Contractor under OHSA, including the payment of legal fees and disbursements on a solicitor and client basis. Such indemnity shall apply to the extent to which the Owner is not covered by insurance, provided that the indemnity contained in this paragraph shall be limited to costs and damages resulting directly from such infractions and shall not extend to any consequential, indirect or special damages.

9.4.4 The Owner undertakes to include in its contracts with other contractors and/or in its

instructions to its own forces the requirement that the other contractor or own forces, as the case may be, will comply with directions and instructions from the Contractor with respect to occupational health and safety and related matters. The text of such instruction is attached to these Supplementary Conditions as Appendix 1.”

38. GC 9.5 MOULD

38.1 Delete paragraph 9.5.3.3 in its entirety and replace it with the following:

“9.5.3.3 Extend the Contract Time for such reasonable time as the Consultant may recommend on consultation with the Contractor and the Owner. If, in the opinion of the Consultant, the Contractor has been delayed in performing the Work and/or has incurred additional costs under paragraph 9.5.1.2, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for the reasonable costs incurred as a result of the delay and as a result of taking those steps, and…”.

39. GC 10.1 TAXES AND DUTIES

39.1 Amend paragraph 10.1.2 by adding the following sentence at the end of the existing paragraph:

“For greater certainty, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any mark up for overhead or profit on




any increase in such taxes and duties and the Owner shall not be entitled to any credit relating to mark up for overhead or profit on any decrease in such taxes.”

39.2 Add new paragraphs 10.1.3, 10.1.4, 10.1.5 and 10.1.6 as follows:

“10.1.3 Where an exemption or a recovery of sales taxes, customs duties, excise taxes or Value

Added Taxes is applicable to the Contract, the Contractor shall, at the request of the Owner or the Owner’s representative, assist, join in, or make application for any exemption, recovery or refund of all such taxes and duties and all amounts recovered or exemptions obtained shall be for the sole benefit of the Owner. The Contractor agrees to endorse over the Owner any cheques received from the federal or provincial governments, or any other taxing authority, as may be required to give effect to this paragraph 10.1.3.

10.1.4 The Contractor shall maintain accurate records tabulating equipment, material and

component costs reflecting the taxes, customs duties, excise taxes and Value Added Taxes paid.

10.1.5 Any refund of taxes, including without limitation, any government sales tax, customs duty,

excise tax or Value Added Tax, whether or not paid, which is found to be inapplicable or for which exemption may be obtained, is the sole and exclusive property of the Owner. The Contractor agrees to cooperate with the Owner and to obtain from all Subcontractors and Suppliers cooperation with the Owner in the application for any refund of any taxes, which cooperation shall include, but not be limited to, making or concurring in the making of an application for any such refund or exemption and providing to the Owner copies, or where required, originals of records, invoices, purchase orders and other documentation necessary to support such applications or exemptions or refunds. All such refunds shall either be paid to the Owner, or shall be a credit to the Owner against the Contract Price, in the Owner’s discretion.

10.1.6 Customs duties penalties, or any other penalty, fine or assessment levied against the

Contractor shall not be treated as a tax or customs duty for purposes of this GC 10.1”.

40. GC 10.2 LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS AND FEES

40.1 Amend paragraph 10.2.5 by adding the words, “Subject to paragraph 3.15.1” to the beginning of the

paragraph.

40.2 Further amend paragraph 10.2.5 by adding the following to the end of the second sentence:

“…and no further Work on the affected components of the Contract shall proceed until these changes to the Contract Documents have been obtained by the Contractor from the Consultant.”

40.3 Further amend paragraph 10.2.5 by adding the following sentence to the end of the paragraph, as

amended:

“The Contractor shall notify the Chief Building Official or the registered code agency where applicable, of the readiness, substantial completion, and completion of the stages of construction set out in the Ontario Building Code. The Contractor shall be present at each site inspection by an inspector or registered code agency as applicable under the Ontario Building Code.”


“In the event the Owner suffers loss or damage as a result of the Contractor’s failure to comply with paragraph 10.2.5, and notwithstanding any limitations described in paragraph 12.1.1, the Contractor agrees to indemnify and to hold harmless the Owner and the Consultant from and against any claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits or proceedings resulting from such failure by the Contractor.”




41. GC 10.4 WORKERS’ COMPENSATION

41.1 Amend paragraph 10.4.1 so that, as amended, it reads as follows:

“Prior to commencing the Work, and with each application for payment thereafter, the Contractor shall provide a Clearance Certificate from WSIB.”

42. GC 11.1 INSURANCE

42.1 Add the following to 11.1.1.1: “General liability insurance shall be with limits of not less than $5,000,000 per occurrence, an

aggregate limit of not less than $5,000,000 within any policy year with respect to completed operations, and a deductible not exceeding $5,000. The insurance coverage shall not be less than the insurance provided by IBC Form 2100 (including an extension for a standard provincial and territorial form of non-owned automobile liability policy) and IBC Form 2320. To achieve the desired limit, umbrella or excess liability insurance may be used. Subject to satisfactory proof of financial capability by the Contractor, the Owner may agree to increase the deductible amounts.

42.2 Add the following to 11.1.1.2: Automobile liability insurance in respect of vehicles that are required by law to be insured under a

contract by a Motor Vehicle Liability Policy, shall have limits of not less than $5,000,000 inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury, death and damage to property, covering all vehicles owned or leased by the Contractor. Where the policy has been issued pursuant to a government-operated automobile insurance system, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with confirmation of automobile insurance coverage for all automobiles registered in the name of the Contractor.

42.3 Add the following to 11.1.1.4: "Broad form" property insurance shall have limits of not less than the sum of 1.1 times Contract

Price and the full value, as stated in the Contract, of Products and design services that are specified to be provided by the Owner for incorporation into the Work, with a deductible not exceeding $5,000. The insurance coverage shall not be less than the insurance provided by IBC Forms 4042 and 4047 (excluding flood and earthquake) or their equivalent replacement. Subject to satisfactory proof of financial capability by the Contractor, the Owner may agree to increase the deductible amounts.

42.4 Add the following to 11.1.1.5:

Boiler and machinery insurance shall have limits of not less than the replacement value of the permanent or temporary boilers and pressure vessels, and other insurable objects forming part of the Work. The insurance coverage shall not be less than the insurance provided by a comprehensive boiler and machinery policy.

42.5 Add the following to 11.1.1.6:

"Broad form" contractors' equipment insurance coverage covering Construction Equipment used by the Contractor for the performance of the Work, shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner and shall not allow subrogation claims by the insurer against the Owner. Subject to satisfactory proof of financial capability by the Contractor for self-insurance, the Owner may agree to waive the equipment insurance requirement.

43. GC 11.2 CONTRACT SECURITY 43.1 Delete paragraphs 11.2.1 and 11.2.2 in their entirety and replace them with the following:




“11.2.1 Subject to paragraph 11.2.4, the Contractor shall furnish a performance bond in favour of the Owner, covering the faithful performance of the Contract, including the payment obligations arising there under, made upon the contract bond form of the Owner and issued by such surety company(ies) as the Owner may approve. The bond shall be for one hundred per cent (100%) of the Contract Price or such other amount as may be specified in the Contract Documents.

11.2.2 The Contractor shall furnish a labour and material payment bond in favour of the Owner in

a form satisfactory to the Owner and issued by such surety company(ies) the Owner may approve. The bond shall be for one hundred per cent (100%) of the Contract Price.

11.2.3 It is the intention of the Contract that the performance bond shall be applicable to all of the

Contractor’s obligations under this Contract and, wherever a performance bond is provided with language which conflicts with this intention, it shall be deemed to be amended to comply. The Contractor represents and warrants that it has provided its surety with a copy of the Contract prior to the issuance of such bonds.

11.2.4 Where the Contract Price, arising from the Owner's award of the Contract, includes

Subcontractor default insurance in lieu of a performance bond, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a certified copy of the policy of Subcontractor default insurance. Such policy shall have an aggregate loss limit of not less than 100% of the Contract Price and a claim limit of not less than 100% of such Contract Price. Such policy of insurance shall be subject to the approval of the Owner, acting reasonably, as to the terms and conditions of the Subcontractor default insurance, including those described in this paragraph 11.2.4."

44. GC 12.1 INDEMNIFICATION

44.1 Delete paragraphs 12.1.1 through 12.1.6 in their entirety and replace them with the following:

“12.1.1 The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Consultant, their

agents, employees and assigns from and against all claims, demands, damages, losses, expenses, costs, including legal fees, actions, suits or proceedings by whomsoever made, brought or prosecuted in any manner, arising out of, resulting from or attributable to the Contractor’s or any Subcontractor’s performance or non-performance of the Contract, regardless of whether or not caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. It is expressly understood that the Contractor will save harmless the Owner from all claims made by any party other than the Contractor itself, financial or otherwise, relating to labour and materials furnished by the Contractor or by others for the Work.

12.1.2 It is the intention of the parties that the Consultant, its officers, agents, partners,

employees, directors and insurers, as well as any Subconsultants, or other Consultants retained with respect to the Project, and their officers, agents, partners, employees, directors and insurers, is to benefit from the indemnification and hold harmless provisions of paragraph 12.1.1.

12.1.3 The Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, his agents and employees

from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits or proceedings arising out of the Contractor’s performance of the Contract which are attributable to a lack of or defect in title or an alleged lack of or defect in title to the Place of the Work.

12.1.4 Notwithstanding the provisions of GC1.1 -CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, paragraph 1.1.7,

GC12.1 - INDEMNIFICATION shall govern over the provisions of paragraph 1.3.1 of GC1.3 – RIGHTS AND REMEDIES.”

45. GC 12.2 WAIVER OF CLAIMS

45.1 Delete paragraphs 12.2.1 through 12.2.10 and replace them with the following:




“12.2.1 As of the date of the final certificate for payment, the Owner expressly waives and releases the Contractor from all claims against the Contractor including without limitation those that might arise from negligence or breach of contract by the Contractor except for one or more of the following:

.1 those made in writing prior to the date of the final certificate for payment and still

unsettled; .2 those arising from the provisions of GC12.1 – INDEMNIFICATION or GC12.3 –

WARRANTY; .3 those arising from GC9.2 – TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND

MATERIALS and arising from the Contractor bringing or introducing any toxic or hazardous substances and materials to the Place of the Work after the Contractor commences the Work;

.4 those made by Notice in Writing within a period of six years from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work as set out in the certificate of substantial performance, or within such shorter period as may be prescribed in any limitation statute of the province or territory of the Place of the Work and arising from any liability of the Contractor for damages resulting from the Contractor’s performance of the Contract with respect to substantial defects or deficiencies in the Work for which the Contractor is proven responsible. As used herein, “substantial defects or deficiencies” means those defects or deficiencies in the Work where the reasonable cost of repair of such defects or deficiencies exceeds: .1 for a Contract Price of $2,000,000 or less, the sum of $50,000, before

HST;

12.2.2 As of the date of certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, the Contractor

expressly waives and releases the Owner from all claims which it has or reasonably ought to have knowledge of that could be advanced against the Owner including without limitation those that might arise from the negligence or breach of contract by the Owner except:

.1 those made in writing prior to the Contractor’s application for final payment and

still unsettled; and .2 those arising from the provisions of GC9.2 – TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS

SUBSTANCES AND MATERIALS or GC10.3 – PATENT FEES.”

46. GC 12.3 WARRANTY


“Where the Contractor has been permitted to make use of permanent equipment or systems, as provided in GC3.16, prior to the issuance of the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, such permanent equipment or system shall be subject to the same warranty as described in this GC12.3 and shall be judged, for purposes of assessing compliance with the warranty, as though the equipment or system was new, clean and unused by the Contractor, except for normal commissioning and startup activities, prior to the date of Substantial Performance of the Work.”

46.2 Amend paragraph 12.3.2 by adding the words, “Subject to paragraph 3.14.1….” at the beginning of

that paragraph.


“12.3.7 Where required by the Contract Documents, provide a maintenance bond as security for the performance of the Contractor’s obligations as set out in GC 12.3- Warranty.”





“12.3.8 The Contractor shall assign to the Owner all warranties, guarantees or other obligations for

Work, services or Products performed or supplied by any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person in connection with the Work and such assignment shall be with the consent of the assigning party where required by law or by the terms of that party’s contract. Such assignment shall be in addition to, and shall in no way limit, the warranty rights of the Owner under the Contract Documents. Until the expiry of the relevant warranty periods enforceable against the Contractor, the Owner shall have in its custody all warranties, guarantees and other obligations to third parties respecting the Work.”

47. PART 13 – OTHER PROVISIONS

47.1 Add GC 13.1 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIALS as follows:

“13.1 Unless otherwise specified, all materials existing at the Place of the Work at the time of

execution of the Contract shall remain the property of the Owner. All Work, Products and materials delivered by the Contractor which form part of the Work shall be considered the property of the Owner but the Contractor shall remove all surplus or rejected materials as its property when notified in writing to do so by the Consultant.”

47.2 Add GC13.2 CONTRACTOR DISCHARGE OF LIABILITIES as follows:

“13.2.1 In addition to the obligations assumed by the Contractor pursuant to GC3.7, the Contractor

agrees to discharge all liabilities incurred by it for labour, materials, services, Subcontractors and Products, used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the Work, on the date upon which each such liability becomes due.

13.2.2 The Contractor shall cause every Subcontractor and Supplier engaged in the performance

of the Work to discharge all liabilities incurred by them for labour, materials, services and Products used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the Work. Workmen employed by a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be paid in full at intervals not less frequently than required by the governing law and all liabilities of the Subcontractors and Suppliers shall be discharged on the date upon which each becomes due. At the request of the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish the Owner with satisfactory evidence that its liabilities and those of its Subcontractors and Suppliers have been discharged.”

47.3 Add GC 13.3 AS-BUILT OR RECORD DRAWINGS as follows:

“13.3 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall prepare as-

built or record drawings and provide them to the Consultant for review.”

47.4 Add GC 13.4 DAILY REPORTS/DAILY LOGS as follows:

“13.4.1 The Contractor shall cause its supervisor, or such competent person as he or she may

delegate, to prepare a daily log or diary reporting on weather conditions, work force of the Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers and any other forces on site and also record the general nature of Project activities. Such log or diary shall also include any extraordinary or emergency events which may occur and also the identities of any persons who visit the site who are not part of the day-to-day work force.

13.4.2 The Contractor shall also maintain records, either at its head office or at the job site,

recording manpower and material resourcing on the Project, including records which document the activities of the Contractor in connection with GC3.5, and comparing that resourcing to the resourcing anticipated when the most recent version of the schedule was prepared pursuant to GC3.5.




13.4.3 Upon request by the Owner or the Consultant, the Contractor shall make available for inspection and copying all of the records generated pursuant to this GC13.4 along with any other routine Project records ordinarily maintained by the Contractor.”

47.5 Add GC 13.5 CONSTRUCTION LIENS as follows:

“13.5 In the event that any construction lien is registered against the Project by or through a

Subcontractor or Supplier, and provided the Owner has paid all amounts properly due under the Contract, and has otherwise complied with its material obligations under the Contract, the Contractor shall, at its own expense, post the security necessary to vacate or discharge such lien, as the case may be. In the event that a lien action is commenced and a Statement of Claim is issued and served, the Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to remove the Owner from the main action and to indemnify it and hold it harmless in such action, except where the Statement of Claim makes substantial claims against the Owner beyond the recovery of holdback under the Act.“

47.6 Add GC13.6 NEUTRAL APPOINTING AUTHORITY

“13.6.1 For purposes of the Rules for Mediation and Arbitration of Construction Disputes CCDC

40, the term “neutral appointing authority”, as used in both the Rules for Mediation of CCDC2 Construction Disputes and the Rules for Arbitration of CCDC2 Construction Disputes shall mean the “Appointing Committee” at ADR Chambers presiding at the time notice of the dispute is given pursuant to the Contract.”

47.7 Add GC13.7 FREEDOM OF INFORMATION AND PROTECTION OF PRIVACY ACT:

"13.7.1 Throughout the term of this Contract, and for a period of seven years thereafter, the Owner

and the Contractor will protect the confidentiality of all proprietary and confidential information of the other that is disclosed to it and will protect such information with the same standard of care as such party would use to protect the confidentiality of its own proprietary and confidential information which shall be, at a minimum, a reasonable standard, and, in any event, each party shall protect the confidentiality of all such proprietary and confidential information as may be required by law, including, without limitation, as may be required under the Freedom of Information and Protection of Privacy Act.

13.7.2 Notwithstanding the obligations of the Owner described in paragraph 13.7.1, the

Contractor acknowledges that the Owner is subject to the Freedom of Information and Protection of Privacy Act, as amended, and may be required to release, in whole or in part, this Contract and any other documents or information in the Owner's possession or control that relate to this Contract."


West Ferris Secondary School 01005 Domestic Water Piping and GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



1.1. DOCUMENTS REQUIRED

1. Maintain at job site, one copy each of the following:

1. Contract drawings.

2. Specification.

3. Addenda.

4. Reviewed shop drawings.

5. Change orders.

6. Other modifications to Contract.

7. Field test reports.

8. Copy of approved work schedule.

9. Manufacturers installation and application instructions.

10. Standards listed in Part 1 of Specification Sections under Reference Standards.

1.2. PRODUCTS SUPPLIED BY CONSULTANT

1. Promptly inspect delivered products, and provide written report to Consultant on condition of all items received.

2. Install, connect and finish products specified.

1.3. WORK SCHEDULE

1. In accordance with schedule and in form acceptable to Consultant, provide within five working days after Contract award, schedule showing dates for:

1. Submission of shop drawings, material lists and samples.

2. Delivery of all equipment and materials.

1.4. APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

1. Payments on this Contract to be made by the Owner in accordance with Supplementary General GC-5.2 - Application for Progress Payment.

2. The breakdown shall include a separate line item with a value of $1,000.00 as a deposit for borrowed keys. This line item will not be paid until Total Completion of the project has been achieved and the Owner’s Designee has confirmed that all borrowed keys have been returned. If keys are not returned within 30 days after Total Completion, the Contractor forfeits the




deposit to the Owner who will utilize these funds for re-keying of the building.

3. Holdback procedure shall be in accordance with Construction Lien Act R.S.O. 1990.

4. Payment will be made by the Owner to the Contractor by electronic fund transfer (EFT/direct deposit) method only.

1.5. CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE

1. Contractor shall use access to building as indicated by the Owners.

2. Storage areas are to be identified by the School during construction period.

3. Do not unreasonably encumber site with materials or equipment.

4. Move stored products or equipment which interfere with operations of Consultant or other contractors.

5. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations.

1.6. CODES AND STANDARDS

1. Perform work in accordance with the latest additions of the Ontario Building Code 2012 and any other code of provincial of local application provided that in any case of conflict or discrepancy, the more stringent requirements shall apply.

2. Meet or exceed requirements of contract documents, codes and referenced documents.

1.7. PROJECT MEETINGS

1. Consultants will arrange project meetings and assume responsibility for setting times and recording and distributing minutes.

1.8. LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES

1. Location of equipment indicated or specified is to be considered as approximate.

2. Locate equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for safety, access and maintenance.

3. Inform consultant of impending installation and obtain his approval for actual location.

4. Submit field drawings to indicate relative position of various services and equipment when required by Consultant.

1.9. CONCEALMENT

1. Conceal conduit, and wiring in floor, wall and ceiling construction of finished areas except where indicated otherwise.




1.10. CUTTING, FITTING, AND PATCHING

1. Execute cutting, fitting and patching required to make work fit properly.

2. Where new work connects with existing and where existing work is altered, cut, patch and make good to match existing work.

3. Obtain Consultant's approval before cutting, boring and sleeving load bearing members.

4. Make cuts with clean, true, smooth edges. Make patches inconspicuous in final assembly.

1.11. EXISTING SERVICES

1. Where work involves breaking into or connecting to existing services, carry out work at times directed by Owners with minimum of disturbance to occupants.

2. Before commencing work, establish location and extent of service lines in area of work and notify Consultant of findings.

3. Submit schedule to and obtain approval from Consultant for any shut down or closure of active service or facility. Adhere to approved schedule and provide notice to affected parties.

4. Where unknown services are encountered, immediately advise Consultant and confirm findings in writing.

1.12. ALTERATIONS, ADDITIONS OR REPAIRS TO EXISTING BUILDING

1. Execute Work with least possible interference or disturbance to occupants, public and normal use of premises. Arrange with Consultant to facilitate execution of work.

1.13. ADDITIONAL DRAWINGS

1. Consultant may furnish additional drawings to assist proper execution of work. These drawings will be listed issued for clarification only. Such drawings shall have same meaning and intent as if they were included with plans referred to in contract documents.

1.14. BUILDING PERMIT

1. Apply for building permit at local Building Department. Include all costs in tender price. Consultant will provide two sets of contract documents at cost.

1.15. BUILDING SMOKING ENVIRONMENT

1. Comply with smoking restrictions.


West Ferris Secondary School 01300 Domestic Water Piping and SUBMITTALS Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



1.1. REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

1. Shop drawings and product data.

2. Samples.

3. Operating and maintenance manuals.

4. Record drawings.

5. Certificates of transcripts.

1.2. ADMINISTRATIVE

1. Submit to Consultant submittals listed for review. Submit with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as to not cause delay in Work. Failure to submit in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.

2. Work affected by the submittal shall not proceed until review is complete.

3. Review submittals prior to submission to the Consultant. This review represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has been checked and coordinated with requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and identified as the specified project will be returned without being examined and shall be considered rejected.

4. Verify field measurements and affected adjacent Work are coordinated.

5. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submission is not relieved by Consultant review of submittals.

6. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submission from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Consultant review.

7. Keep one reviewed copy of each submission on site.

1.3. SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

1. Refer to GC 3.10.

2. The term "Shop Drawings" means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures and other data which are to be provided by the Contractor to illustrate details of a portion of the Work.

3. Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection diagrams, connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion of Work. Where articles or equipment attach or connect to other articles or equipment, indicate that such items have been coordinated, regardless of the Section under which the adjacent items




will be supplied and installed. Indicate cross references to design drawings and specifications.

4. Adjustments made on shop drawings by the Consultant are not intended to change the Contract Price. If adjustments affect the value or Work, state such in writing to the Consultant prior to proceeding with the Work.

5. Make changes in shop drawings as the Consultant may require, consistent with Contract Documents. When resubmitting, notify the Consultant in writing of any revisions other than those requested.

6. Submit photocopies of shop drawings for each requirement requested in Specification Sections and as the Consultant may reasonably request.

7. Submit 1 photocopy and one 'PDF' format of product data sheets or brochures for requirements requested in specification Sections and as the Consultant may reasonably request where shop drawings will not be prepared due to standardized manufacture of product.

8. If upon review by the Consultant, no errors or omissions are discovered or if only minor corrections are made, 'PDF' copies will be returned and fabrication and installation of Work may proceed. If shop drawings are rejected, noted copy will be returned and resubmission of corrected shop drawings, through the same procedure indicated above, shall be performed before fabrication and installation of Work may proceed.

1.4. OPERATING MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1. Two weeks prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, submit to the Consultant one (1) copies of operating and maintenance manuals and As-Built Drawings and 'PDF' copy on USB stick.

2. Manual to contain operational information on equipment, cleaning schedules, and similar maintenance information. Instructions in this manual shall be in simple language so as to guide the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of building components.

3. Bind contents in a three-ring, hard covered, plastic jacketed binder as well as in PDF format on USB stick. Organize contents into applicable categories of work, parallel to specification Sections.

4. In addition to information specified, include the following:

1. Title sheet, labelled "Operating and Maintenance Instructions", containing project name and date.

2. List of names, addresses and phone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers who can affect repair or maintenance on equipment.

3. List of contents.

4. Final shop drawings and product data of equipment.

5. Record drawings of electrical installation.




6. Full description of building systems and operation.

1.5. RECORD DRAWINGS

1. After award of Contract the Consultant will provide one (1) set of white prints for the purpose of maintaining record drawings (at cost). Accurately, neatly record deviations from Contract Documents caused by site conditions and changes ordered by the Consultants. Make changes in red ink.

2. Record locations of concealed components of mechanical and electrical services.

3. Identify drawings as "Project Record Copy". Maintain in new condition and make available for inspection on site by Consultant.

4. On completion of Work and prior to final inspection, submit two copies of record documents to Consultant.

1.6. CERTIFICATE AND TRANSCRIPTS

1. After award of Contract, submit WSIB status transcription of insurance.


West Ferris Secondary School 01400 Domestic Water Piping and QUALITY CONTROL Washroom Upgrades Project Number: 6134 Page 1




1. Inspection and testing, administrative and enforcement requirements.

2. Tests.

3. Testing of the Domestic Water Piping.

1.2. RELATED REQUIREMENTS

1. Section 01300: Submission of shop drawings to confirm product quality.

1.3. INSPECTION

1. Refer to GC 2.3.

2. The Owner and the Consultant shall have access to the Work.

3. Give timely notice requesting inspection if work is designated for special tests, inspections or approvals by Consultant instructions, or the law of the Place of the Work.

4. If the Contractor covers or permits to be covered work that has been designated for special tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, uncover such work, have the inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such work.

5. The Consultant may offer any part of the work to be examined if such work is suspected to be not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correct such work and pay the cost of examination and correction. If such work is found in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner will pay the cost of examination and replacement.

1.4. PROCEDURES

1. Notify the appropriate agency and Consultant in advance of the requirements for tests, in order that attendance arrangements can be made.

1.5. REJECTED WORK

1. Remove defective work, whether the result of poor workmanship, use of defective products or damage and whether incorporated in the work or not, which has been rejected by the consultant as failing to conform to the Contract documents. Replace or re-execute in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. Make good other Contractors work damaged by such removals or replacements promptly.

3. If in the opinion of the Consultant it is not expedient to correct defective work or work not performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may deduct from the

West Ferris Secondary School 01400 Domestic Water Piping and QUALITY CONTROL Washroom Upgrades Project Number: 6134 Page 2



Contract Price the difference in value between the Work performed and that called for by the Contract Documents, the amount of which shall be determined by the Consultant.

1.6. REPORTS

1. Submit final test report confirming operation and system function.


West Ferris Secondary School 01545 Domestic Water Piping and SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



1.1. CONSTRUCTION SAFETY MEASURES

1. Observe and enforce construction on safety measures required by Ontario Building Code 2012, Provincial Government, WSIB, and Municipal Statutes and authorities.

2. In event of conflict between any provisions of above authorities the most stringent provision governs.

1.2. FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

1. Comply with requirements of Ontario Fire Marshal's Office.

2. All Contractor superintendents shall be briefed by the Owner on Facilities fire safety program.


West Ferris Secondary School 01600 Domestic Water Piping and MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134




1. Reference standards.

2. Product quality, availability, storage, handling, protection, transportation.

3. Manufacturer's instructions.

4. Workmanship, co-ordination, cutting, fastenings.

5. Existing facilities.

1.2. REFERENCE STANDARDS

1. Within the text of the specifications reference may be made to the following standards:

1. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

2. ASTM - Americana Society of Testing and Materials

3. OESC - Ontario Electrical Safety Code

4. CEMA - Canadian Electrical Manufacturers Association

5. CGSB - Canadian General Standards Board

6. CPCA - Canadian painting Contractors Association

7. CSA - Canadian Standards Association

8. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

9. IPCEA - Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association

10. OBC - Ontario Building Code 2012

11. ULC - Underwriters Laboratories of Canada.

2. Conform to these standards, in whole or in part, as specifically requested in the specifications.

3. If there is questions as to whether any product or system is in conformance with applicable standards, the Consultants reserves the right to have such products or systems tested to prove or disprove conformance.

4. Conform to latest date of issue of reference standards effect on date of submission of bids except where a specific date or issue is specifically noted.




1.3. PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

1. Quality:

1. Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as Products throughout the specifications) incorporated in the Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and of the best quality (compatible with specifications) for the purpose intended. If required, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of Products provided.

2. Defective products, whenever identified prior to the completion of Work, will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does not relieve responsibility, but it is a precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective products at own expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.

3. Should any dispute arise as to the quality of fitness of products, the decision rests strictly with the Consultant based upon the requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Unless otherwise indicated in the specifications, maintain uniformity of manufacture for any particular or like item throughout the building.

5. Permanent labels, trademarks, and nameplates on Products are not acceptable in prominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located in mechanical or electrical rooms.

2. Transportation

1. Pay costs of transportation of Products required in the performance of Work.

1.4. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

1. Unless otherwise indicated in the specifications, install or erect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with products. Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers.

2. Notify the consultant in writing of conflicts between the specifications and manufacturers instructions, so that the Consultant may establish the course of action.

3. Improper installation or erection of Products, due to failure in complying with these requirements, authorizes the Consultant to require removal and re-installation at no increase in Contract Price.

1.5. WORKMANSHIP

1. General

1. Workmanship shall be the best quality, executed by workers experienced and skilled in the respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify the Consultant if required work is such as to make it impractical to produce required results.




2. Do not employ any unfit person or anyone unskilled in their required duties. The Consultant reserves the right to require the dismissal from the site, workers deemed incompetent, careless, insubordinate or otherwise objectionable.

3. Decisions as to the quality of fitness of workmanship in cases of dispute rest solely with the Consultant whose decision is final.

2. Location of Devices

1. Consider the location of devices indicated as approximate.

2. Inform the Consultant of a conflicting installation. Install as directed.

3. Fastenings

1. Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same textures, colour and finish as adjacent materials, unless indicated otherwise.

2. Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals and materials.

3. Use noncorrosive hot dip galvanized steel fasteners and anchors for securing exterior work, unless stainless steel or other material is specifically requested in the affected specification Section.

4. Protection of Work in Progress.

1. Adequately protect Work completed or in progress. Work damaged or defaced due to failure in providing such protection is to be removed and replaced, or repaired, as directed by the Consultant Price.

5. Existing Utilities

1. When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, execute work at times directed by owner with a minimum of disturbance of work, and/or building occupants.

2. Protect, relocate and maintain existing active services. When inactive services are encountered, cap off in a manner approved by authority having jurisdiction and stake or otherwise record location of capped service.


West Ferris Secondary School 01700 Domestic Water Piping and CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Washroom Upgrades Project Number: 6134 Page 1




1. Final cleaning.

2. Systems demonstration.

3. Document submission.

4. Project commissioning.

5. Inspection and takeover procedures.

1.2. RELATED REQUIREMENTS

1. Section 01300: Submission of record drawings.

2. Section 01300: Operating/maintenance manuals.

3. General Conditions of the Contract: Fiscal provisions, legal submittal and other administrative requirements.

1.3. FINAL CLEANING

1. Refer to GC 3.13.

2. When the Work is Substantially Performed, remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment not required for the performance of the remaining Work.

3. Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by the Owner, other contractors or their employees, and leave the Work clean and suitable for occupancy by Owner.

4. When the Work is Totally Performed, remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment. Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by the Owner or other Contractors.

5. Remove waste materials and debris from the site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by the Consultant. Do not burn waste materials on site.

6. Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris.

7. Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from mechanical equipment and electrical panels.

8. Inspect finishes, fitments and equipment and ensure specified workmanship and operation.

9. Clean equipment to a sanitary condition.

1.4. SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION




1. Prior to final inspection, demonstrate operation of each system to Owner and Consultant.

2. Instruct personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and systems, using provided operation and maintenance data as the basis for instruction.

1.5. DOCUMENTS

1. Collect reviewed submittals (Section 01300) and assemble documents executed by Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.

2. Submit material prior to final Application for Payment. For equipment put into use with Owner's permission during construction, submit within 10 days after start-up. For items of Work delayed materially beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

3. Provide warranties fully executed and notarized – min. 1 year.

4. Execute transition of Performance and Labour and Materials Payment Bond to warranty period requirements.

5. Submit final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and monies remaining due.

6. Consultant will issue a final change order reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum not previously made.

1.6. PROJECT COMMISSIONING

1. Expedite and complete deficiencies and defects identified by the Consultant.

2. Review maintenance manual contents, operating, maintenance instructions, record "as-built" drawings, spare parts, materials for completeness.

3. Submit required documentation such as statutory declarations, Worker's Compensation Certificates, warranties, certificates of approval or acceptance from regulating bodies.

4. Review inspection and testing reports to verify conformance to the intent of the documents and that changes, repairs or replacements have been completed.

5. Co-ordinate Owner's mocking-in of staff, furnishings, equipment with building accessibility, and contractor's and Subcontractor's cleaning-up and completion activities all to suit Owner's work schedule and not disrupt Owner's productivity.

6. Provide on-going review, inspection and attendance to building call-back, maintenance and repair problems during Warranty periods.

1.7. INSPECTION/TAKEOVER PROCEDURES

1. Prior to application for certificate of Substantial Performance, carefully inspect the Work and




ensure it is complete, that major and minor construction deficiencies are complete and/or corrected and the building is clean and in condition for occupancy. Notify the Consultant in writing, of satisfactory completion of the Work and request an inspection.

2. During the Consultant inspection, a list of deficiencies and defects will be tabulated. Correct same.

3. When the Consultant considers deficiencies and defects have been corrected and it appears requirements of the Contract have been performed, make application for certificate of Substantial Performance. Refer to General Conditions Article GC 5.4 for specifics to application.


01 30 10 ALTERATION PROCEDURES

Page 1

Domestic Water Piping and Washroom Upgrades West Ferris Secondary School Near North District School Board

218001

March 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Conform to Ontario Building Code, Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act and all other Standards

and Regulations noted. .2 All work performed and materials used shall be of the same standard of quality as that of the existing

finished building as a minimum. .3 Any welding shall be performed by Welders certified in accordance with CSA W47, and shall conform to

CSA W59.

1.2 SECURITY .1 Make provision to maintain building security in a manner acceptable to the Owner during construction

and after normal working hours.

1.3 ACCESS .1 Contractor's access to the work and storage space shall be as agreed between the Owner and

Contractor.

1.4 SCHEDULING .1 The Contractor shall schedule his work and the sequence of operations in cooperation with the Owner

and Consultant and phasing specified in Section 01 00 01 General Requirements, 1.20 Commencement and Completion Schedule. Work shall proceed in strict accordance with the agreed upon and approved schedule.

.2 Hours of Work: .1 While classes are in session

.1 Work is not permitted. .2 Summer break (July 3rd to August 27th, 2018)

.1 The facilities will be staffed by custodians performing summer maintenance on a periodic basis throughout the summer but will be otherwise vacant. Hours of work are generally unlimited during the summer break. The Owner will provide the Contractor with keys and security access code as required.

.3 Overtime work, weekend work, etc. is included in the contract and shall be provided as required to meet the completion schedule specified in Section 01 00 01 General Requirements.

.4 The building and site shall remain open throughout the course of construction and allow the Owner's custodial staff to perform routine summer maintenance throughout the duration of the Work. Co-ordinate scheduling of work and sequencing of areas to be used for construction with the Owner before work begins.

.3 Utility and service outages shall be kept to a minimum and will be permitted only with written permission of the Owner. Make outage requests at least 48 hours before date of proposed outage. State in request hours of outage.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Suppress all dust and dirt. Prevent the occurrence of unsanitary conditions, flooding or leaking. .2 Do not allow dirt, debris or discarded materials to accumulate on site. Remove promptly each day.


Page 2


218001

March 2018

.3 Obtain written confirmation from the Owner that services to be abandoned, removed or cut have been properly and safely shut off, capped or sealed.

.4 If asbestos or silica type insulation or fireproofing are encountered during alteration work cease work in the specific area at once and notify the Consultant immediately. Await Consultant's written instructions before proceeding.

.5 Take extreme care when removing asbestos or silica board fireproofings. Comply strictly with health and safety regulations. Bag material and dispose of in accordance with regulations. Enforce use of breathing masks during cleaning operations.

1.6 DEMOLITION .1 Cutting, removing and demolition shall be performed so as not to cut or remove more than is

necessary or to damage adjacent work. .2 Do not let piled material endanger structure or persons at any time or create unsanitary conditions. .3 Where demolition work involves cutting into any part of the building structure, materials or finishes

which are to be extended, added to or joined to new work, the cutting shall be performed by trades whose work is encountered.

.4 Construction, furnishings and articles of a private or historic nature which are encountered during demolition shall be turned over to the Owner, or they shall be disposed of as the Owner directs for the specific item.

.5 Cut out and remove all those assemblies, materials or items indicated as being removed, abandoned or discarded on the drawings and promptly removed from the site if not wanted by Owner.

1.7 ALTERATIONS, CUTTING AND PROTECTION .1 Extent

.1 Cutting and removal work shall be performed so as not to cut or remove more than is necessary and so as not to damage adjacent work.

.2 Responsibility and Assignment to Trades .1 Contractor shall assign the work of moving, removal, cutting, patching and repair to trades

under his supervision so as to cause the least damage to each type of work encountered, and so as to return the building as much as possible to the appearance of new work.

.2 Patching of finish materials shall be assigned to mechanics skilled in the work of the finish trade involved.

.3 Protection .1 Protect remaining finishes, equipment and adjacent work from damage caused by cutting,

moving, removal and patching operations. Protect surfaces which will remain a part of the finished work.

.4 Debris .1 Remove debris promptly from the site each day. Removed material, except that listed or

marked by the Consultant for retention, becomes the property of the Contractor. Load removed material directly on trucks for removal from site. Dispose of removed material legally. Do not burn on site. Do not allow debris to enter sewers.

.2 Do not let piled material endanger structure.

.3 Suppress dust. Prevent the occurrence of unsanitary conditions, dirt or debris on the site and neighbouring property.

.4 Any salvaged items left over after completion of the Work shall be delivered to a place of storage designated by the Owner, or they shall be disposed of by the Contractor as directed by Owner.


Page 3


218001

March 2018

1.8 PATCHING, EXTENDING AND MATCHING .1 Skill

.1 Patch and extend existing work using skilled mechanics who are capable of matching the existing quality or workmanship. The quality of patched or extended work shall not be less than that specified in the Sections of the product and execution Specifications which follow these General Requirements.

.2 Patching .1 In areas where any portion of an existing finished surface is damaged, lifted, stained or

otherwise made or found to be imperfect, patch or replace the imperfect portion of the surface with matching material.

.2 Do not incorporate salvaged or used material in new construction, except where small quantities of finish material which are difficult to match or duplicate are approved for patching or extending purposes by the Consultant.

.3 Provide adequate support or substrate for patching of finishes.

.4 If the imperfect surface was painted or coated, repaint or recoat the patched portion in such a way that uniform colour and texture over the entire surface results.

.5 If the surrounding surface cannot be matched, repaint or recoat the entire surface. .3 Quality

.1 In the Sections of the Specifications which follow these General Requirements, no concerted attempt has been made to describe each of the various existing products that must be used to patch, match, extend or replace existing work. Obtain all such products in time to complete the Work on Schedule. Such products shall be provided in quality which is in no way inferior to the existing products.

.2 The quality of the products that exist in the building, as apparent during prebid site visits, shall serve as the minimum Specification requirement for strength, appearance and other characteristics.

.4 Transitions .1 Where new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make the transition as smooth and

workmanlike as possible. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance so as to make the patch or transition invisible to the eye at a distance of one metre.

.2 In cases of extreme change of level (50 mm or more), obtain instructions from the Consultant as to method of making transition. Either stepping, bulkheading, encasement, ramping, sloping or change of transition line shall be employed, or a combination of these, as directed in each case by the Consultant.

.5 Matching .1 Restore existing work that is damaged during construction to a condition equal to its condition

at the time of the start of the Work. .6 Overall Requirement That the Work be Complete

.1 Where a product or type of construction occurs in the existing building, and is not specified as a part of the new work, provide such products or types of construction as needed to patch, extend or match the existing work.

.2 These specifications will generally not describe existing products or standards of execution, nor will they enumerate products which are not a part of the new construction. The existing product is its own specification.


Page 4


218001

March 2018

.3 The presence of any product or type of construction in the old work shall cause its patching, extending or matching to be performed, as necessary to make the work complete and consistent, to identical standards of quality.

1.9 REPAIR .1 Replace work damaged in the course of alterations, except at areas approved by the Consultant for

repair. .2 Where full removal of extensive amounts of almost-suitable work would be needed to replace

damaged portions, then filling, spackling, straightening and similar repair techniques, followed by full painting or other finishing, will be permitted.

.3 If the repaired work is not brought up to the standard for new work, the Consultant will direct that it be cut out and replaced with new work at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.10 CLEANING .1 Each Successive Trade

.1 As the trade finishes its work on each part of the alterations work and related new work, it shall clean up its work area and make work surfaces ready for the work of the succeeding trades.

.2 Spillage, overspray, collections of dust or debris, damage to Owner-occupied spaces shall be cleaned or remedied immediately by the responsible trade.

.2 Each Area as It is Completed .1 As soon as work in each area of the alterations is complete, clean up all surfaces, remove

equipment, salvage and debris and return in condition suitable for use by the Owner as quickly as possible.

.3 Prior to final acceptance, review final cleaning with Owner's representative and the Consultant.

END OF SECTION

Hot Work Permit Page 1

A Health and Safety Guideline for Your Workplace

INTRODUCTION: The Near North District School Board must protect against fire created by construction or open flame work. The use of welding, grinding, and abrasive cutting equipment is a cause of many fires and explosions in workplaces across Ontario. Where such work is not the part of day to day operations of the Board, a HOT WORK PERMIT system must be used. OBJECTIVES: The objective of the HOT WORK PERMIT is to ensure that:

• Work is authorized by a competent person • Potential hazards are identified, isolated, removed, protected or disconnected as

appropriate • The operator is trained to perform the work safely • Appropriate protective clothing and equipment is used • Appropriate warning and fire fighting equipment is on hand

DEFINITIONS: Hot work Any activity that could produce flames, sparks, slag or other hot fragments that

might act as an ignition source to flammable materials in the area. HOT WORK also includes any activity that could generate sufficient smoke or heat to activate a fire alarm detection system. It includes, but is not limited to: brazing, cutting, grinding, torch soldering, pipe thawing, torch applied roofing and welding.

Fire Watch A visual inspection of the surrounding work area for smoldering or flaming

ignitions during and after HOT WORK. ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES: Facility and Maintenance Supervisors 1. To ensure that all HOT WORK performed by Contractors, maintenance or custodial staff

within their area of responsibility is conducted in a safe manner.

Hot Work Permit


2. To ensure that contractors, custodial or maintenance staff who are conducting HOT WORK are competent in doing so and use a permit system.

3. To ensure that the above-mentioned Board employees are trained in HOT WORK procedures

and have adequate quantities of permits. 4. Pre-screen contractors prior to work. Ensure they have a HOT WORK permit system and

carry suitable and sufficient liability insurance coverage. 5. To ensure that all HOT WORK performed by contractors within their area of responsibility is

conducted in a safe manner. 6. To ensure that a HOT WORK permit system is being utilized by the contractor. 7. To ensure that contractors who are conducting the HOT WORK is competent in doing so. 8. To maintain a copy of the completed permit on site within the custodian’s office. Used

permits shall be filed and maintained for at least one year after the completion of the work. 9. Persons not involved in the hot work should be removed from the area or otherwise protected

from the activities. Plant Manager 1. Pre-screen contractors prior to work. Ensure they have a HOT WORK permit system and

carry suitable and sufficient liability insurance coverage. Custodial and Maintenance Staff 1. To follow all safety and HOT WORK procedures. 2. When performing HOT WORK, complete the HOT WORK permit. 3. To maintain and file HOT WORK permits in the custodian office at the site where the work

was performed and a copy with the lead custodian at the secondary schools. Contractor: 1. The contractor will verify that all hot work equipment is in proper working order and in a fire

safe condition. 2. Any contractor equipment or material that is to be stored in the facility overnight must be

properly secured in an area designated by the Facility or Maintenance Supervisor. 3. Contractors must provide a copy of and follow all necessary precautions in their hot work

program.


Health and Safety Officer: 1. Will maintain additional hot work permits and provide additional copies upon request. PROCEDURE: 1. Before conducting any HOT WORK, the operator shall determine if there is a safer way of

doing the work without the use of any heat or flame-producing device. 2. Prior to conducting HOT WORK, the operator must contact their direct supervisor indicating

the scope of work and the location where the work is to be performed. 3. The operator must check to see that all aspects of the proposed work meets all safety

measures as indicated on the HOT WORK PERMIT. 4. The operator must complete, sign and post the HOT WORK PERMIT in plain view. These

permits should be posted in designated Hot Work Permit pockets. 5. The operator or designate must conduct a fire watch during the work (lunch and breaks) and

for thirty (30) minutes after the work is completed. The individual who is conducting the fire watch shall have a fire extinguisher readily available and trained in its use.

Fire watch is required when:

a) combustible material in construction or contents is closer than 35 feet to the point of operation

b) combustibles are more than 35 feet away but are easily ignited by sparks c) wall or floor openings within 35 feet expose combustible materials in adjacent areas

including concealed spaces in walls or floors d) combustible materials are adjacent to the opposite side of metal partitions, walls,

ceilings, or roofs and are likely to be ignited by heat conduction or radiation. 6. The operator must file the HOT WORK PERMIT(S) within the custodian’s office at the

location where the work was performed and a copy with the lead custodian at the secondary school.

7. CONTRACTOR MUST PROVIDE A COPY OF AND FOLLOW ALL NECESSARY

PRECAUTIONS IN THEIR HOT WORK PROGRAM.

HOT WORK PERMIT

THOMAS CONTRACTING 02069 North Bay, Ontario ASBESTOS ABATEMENT REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 1

Washroom Upgrades & Domestic Water Piping Distribution Project No. TC - 201406 West Ferris Secondary School Near North District School Board March 2018

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 AIR MONITORING

From commencement of work until completion of cleaning operations air samples may be taken periodically by the asbestos consultant both inside and outside of the work area enclosures. Clearance levels for this project have been set at or less than 0.01 f/cc.

1.2 FAILED ABATEMENT INSPECTIONS

All return visits conducted by the asbestos consultant to perform follow-up air / inspections due to abatement contractor failing to meet project requirements in the original scheduled inspection will represent grounds by the Owner for application of a penalty (deduction) of up to $ 700.00 plus taxes (for each occurrence) to the original contract price.

1.3 LIABILITY INSURANCE

The asbestos abatement contractor is required to maintain no less than five million dollars ($5 million) of General Liability Insurance and no less than five million dollars ($5 million) of Asbestos Liability Insurance for this project. The Near North District School Board will be required to be named as “Additional Insured” on both policies. This is mandatory in order to bid for this work.

1.4 ABATEMENT ENCLOSURES / WORK AREAS

The asbestos abatement contractor is at all times responsible for the security and safety of their abatement enclosures and work areas. The asbestos abatement contractor is required to post contact names and phone numbers (in plain view) of company personal (approved to enter a Type 3 enclosure) on the entrance to the decontamination facility for the purpose of "after-hours" emergency entrance in to the enclosures / work areas. All walls on the decontamination and load-out facilities that are in direct contact to non-abatement workers requires a ½” plywood protective barrier be securely installed including lockable entrance / exit wood doors.

1.5 ASBESTOS WASTE BINS / VEHICLE

The asbestos abatement contractor is at all times responsible for the security and safety of their asbestos waste bins / vehicle(s). Only fully enclosed asbestos waste bins or vehicle(s) are approved for this project and must be locked at all times when not directly supervised by personal from the abatement company. The asbestos consultant must approve all waste bins / vehicle(s) prior to use.


THOMAS CONTRACTING 02070 North Bay, Ontario ASBESTOS SCOPE OF WORK Page 1 of 1


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Comply with the requirements of this section when performing the following required asbestos abatement work under this contract.

.1 The removal of all asbestos-containing elbow / fitting insulation located on the

existing cold water supply line within the lower floor level of the school as shown on Drawing # 1 (below).

All work is to be performed under a Type 2 operation (Glovebag optional) as stated

in Sections 02082 & 02084 of the project specifications and in accordance with Ontario Regulations 278/05.

Drawing 1 WEST FERRIS SECONDARY SCHOOL

LOWER FLOOR PLAN


THOMAS CONTRACTING 02080 North Bay, Ontario ASBESTOS ASSESSMENT REPORT Page 1 of 1


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 ASBESTOS IDENTIFICATION, REMOVAL & DISPOSAL

.1 Investigations relating to the asbestos-containing materials covered under this project have been carried out by EHS Group, under their Survey & Assessment Report titled NNDSB Asbestos Data Base dated May/June 2007 with supplemental project specific lab testing conducted by Thomas Contracting pertaining to the asbestos abatement work area(s). Full asbestos survey report will be located at the school for viewing.

.2 The Survey & Assessment Report is hereby offered to the bidder in good faith for general information and guidance. The Consultant assumes no responsibility or liability for the completeness and accuracy of this report.

.3 The Contractor shall make their own interpretation of the factual results and carry out any asbestos removal, disposal and related work as identified in the Survey & Assessment Report, and further work as deemed necessary to perform the Scope of Work.

.4 Contractor shall not be entitled to extra payment and / or performance time conditions, which are reasonably inferable from this report.

.5 Should there be a discrepancy between recommendations contained in the report and the requirements of the Contract Documents, the latter shall govern. Advise the Consultant in writing prior to proceeding with the Work.


THOMAS CONTRACTING 02082 North Bay, Ontario TYPE 2 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 1 of 11


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 OUTLINE OF WORK .1 Comply with the requirements of this Section when performing all Type 2 asbestos

abatement operations as noted in the project specifications under Section 02070 – “Asbestos Scope of Work”.

1.2 WORK REQUIREMENTS

.1 In addition to the noted project specifications and Ontario Regulations 278/05 the

following requirements will also be enforced under Type 2 operations on this project:

.1 Negative Air Handling Units (NAHU’s) or HEPA equipped vacuums for small areas must be incorporated and used in all Type 2 enclosure.

.2 Proof of acceptable DOP testing results (within the last month) of Negative Air

Handling Units (NAHU’s) are mandatory and must include clearly visible / readable and signed labels from the testing company affixed to each unit if exhausting within the building or to highly accessible area(s) outside the school.

.3 At least one additional NAHU must be on-site and ready to be used as a back-up

while abatement work is being conducted. .4 All movement of asbestos waste from the work area must not be conducted

between the hours of 6:00 am to 6:00 pm if accessing through public areas of the school (not including weekends / holidays / summer break).

.5 Critical barriers used to seal all openings leading out of the work area(s) must

consist of blue polyethylene woven (rip-proof) material.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

.1 ACM: Asbestos-containing materials

.2 HEPA Vacuum: High Efficiency Particulate Air filtered vacuum equipment with a filter system capable of collecting and retaining fibres greater than 0.3 microns in diameter at 99.97% efficiency.

.3 Amended Water: Water with a non-ionic surfactant wetting agent added to reduce water

tension to allow wetting of fibres.

.4 Authorized Visitor: the Consultant or his representative, and persons representing regulatory agencies.

.5 Work Areas: Areas where removal of ACM takes place.

.6 Critical Barriers: 6 mil polyethylene used to cover openings such as registers and

diffusers, heating units, radiators, windows, doors etc.

.7 Polyethylene sheeting sealed with tape: 6 mil polyethylene sheeting of type and thickness specified sealed with tape along all edges, around penetrating objects, over cuts and tears and elsewhere as required to provide a continuous polyethylene membrane to protect underlying surfaces from water damage or damage by sealants, and to prevent escape of asbestos fibres through the sheeting into a clean area.



.8 Negative Pressure: a system which extracts air directly from work area, filters such extracted air through a High Efficiency Particulate Aerosol filtering system, and discharges this air directly from the work area to exterior of building. This system shall maintain a minimum Pressure differential of 5 Pa. (0.02 in. of water) relative to adjacent areas outside of work area, be equipped with an alarm to warn of system breakdown.

.9 Airlock: a system for permitting ingress or egress without permitting air movement

between a contaminated area and an uncontaminated area. Doorways shall be at least 2 m apart.

.10 Curtained Doorway: an arrangement of closures to allow ingress and egress from one

room to another while permitting minimal air movement between rooms, typically constructed by placing two overlapping sheets of polyethylene over an existing or temporarily framed doorway, securing each long the top of the doorway, securing the vertical edge of one sheet along one vertical edge of the doorway and the other sheet along the opposite vertical side of the doorway. All free edges of polyethylene shall be reinforced with duct tape and the bottom edge shall be weighted to ensure proper closing. Each polyethylene sheet shall overlap openings not less than 1.5 m on each side.

.11 Sign In/Out Forms: an inventory of the names of the workers and the times that they

have entered/exited the enclosure.

1.4 REGULATORY AGENCIES

.1 Comply with Federal, Provincial, and local requirements pertaining to asbestos provided that in any case of conflict among these requirements or with these specifications the more stringent requirement shall apply.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

Before commencing asbestos work, submit to the Consultant the following:

.1 Copies of all necessary permits for transporting and disposal of asbestos waste. Ensure that dump operator is fully aware of nature of material being dumped, and proper methods of disposal. Submit proof satisfactory to Consultant that suitable arrangements have been made to receive and properly dispose of asbestos waste.

.2 Proof satisfactory to Consultant that all employees have had instruction on the hazards of

asbestos exposure, respirator use, dress, entry and exit from work areas, and all aspects of work procedures and protective measures. The Contractor's Supervisor shall have attended an asbestos abatement course, of not less than two days duration, approved by the Consultant. Submit proof of attendance in the form of a certificate (to be submitted with Tender).

.3 Documentation, including test results and MSDS sheets, for sealer and other materials

proposed for use. .4 Copy of the written respirator procedures (use, cleaning and maintenance). .5 Layout of proposed enclosures, decontamination facilities (Clean Room and Equipment

and Access Room) and locations of negative air units, for review.



1.6 EXISTING CONDITIONS

.1 Lab testing results of ACM taken from surfaces within the scope of work and work area(s) of this project are attached in Section 02080. These are for general information only and are not necessarily representative of all ACM contained within the scope of this project or the work area(s).

.2 Notify the Consultant of friable ACM discovered during the work and not apparent from

the drawings, specifications or report, pertaining to the work. Do not disturb such material pending instructions from the Consultant.

1.7 INSTRUCTION & TRAINING

.1 Before commencing the work provide to the Consultant satisfactory proof that every worker has had instruction and training in the hazards of asbestos exposure, in personal hygiene and work practices, and in the use, cleaning and disposal of respirators and protective clothing. A qualified supervisor, who has completed an approved asbestos abatement course of at least two (2) day duration, must be on site and inside the enclosure during all work periods. The name(s) of the supervisor(s) assigned to the job and proof of training must be submitted to the Consultant.

.2 Instruction and training related to respirators shall include instruction and training related

to: .1 The limitations of the equipment. .2 The inspection and maintenance of the equipment. .3 The fitting of the equipment. .4 The disinfecting of the equipment.

1.8 WORKER PROTECTION

.1 Respirators: provide workers with personally-issued and marked respiratory equipment acceptable to Ontario Ministry of Labour as suitable for the asbestos exposure in the work area. If disposable-type filters are used, provide sufficient filters so that workers can install new filters following disposal of used filters and before re-entering contaminated areas.

.2 Protective Clothing: Provide workers with full body disposable-type coveralls that do not

readily retain or permit penetration of asbestos fibres, and consists of full-body covering including head covering with snug-fitting cuffs at wrists, ankles and neck. Every worker who enters the work area shall wear protective clothing.

.3 Eating, drinking, chewing and smoking are not permitted in the work area. .4 Each worker shall:

.1 Sign in on the Sign In/Out Forms, which are to be, located either inside the Clean Room or outside of the enclosure. Remove street clothes in clean change room and put on respirator with new filters or reusable filters that have been tested as satisfactory, clean coveralls and head covers before entering Equipment and Access Room or work area. If reusable protective clothing is used, each worker shall don respirator only before entering Equipment and Access Rooms where clothing is stored. All street clothes, uncontaminated footwear, towels and similar uncontaminated articles shall be stored in clean change room.



.2 Remove gross contamination from clothing before leaving work area by HEPA vacuuming, then proceed to Equipment and Access Room and remove all clothing except respirators. Place contaminated work suits in receptacles for disposal with other asbestos-contaminated materials. Leave reusable items, except respirator, in Equipment and Access Room. Clean outside of respirator with soap and water supplied within the Equipment and Access Room; When not in use in the work area, store work footwear in Equipment and Access Room. Upon completion of asbestos abatement, dispose of footwear as contaminated waste or clean thoroughly inside and out using soap and water before removing from work area or from Equipment and Access Room.

.3 Following cleaning of respirator, tape over filter openings prior to entering clean

room, proceed to clean change room, remove and wash and rinse the inside of the respirator and dress in street clothes at the end of each day's work, or in clean coveralls before eating, smoking or drinking. Sign out after each shift. If re-entering work area, follow procedures outlined in 1.7.4.1 above.

.4 Enter the unloading room from outside dressed in clean coveralls to remove waste

containers and equipment from the Holding Room of the Container and Equipment Decontamination Enclosure system. No worker shall use this system as a means to leave or enter the work area.

.5 Workers shall be full protected with respirators and protective clothing during

preparation of system of enclosures prior to commencing actual asbestos abatement.

.6 Provide and post in Clean Change Room and in Equipment and Access room the

procedures described in 1.7 of this section.

1.9 VISITOR PROTECTION

.1 Provide protective clothing and approved respirators to authorized visitors to the work areas.

.2 Instruct authorized visitors in the use of protective clothing, respirators and procedures.

.3 Instruct authorized visitors in the proper procedures to be followed in entering into and

exiting from the work area(s).



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Drop & Enclosure Sheets:

.1 Polyethylene: 0.15 mm (6 mil) thick. .2 Rip-proof polyethylene: Orange thick woven fabric bonded both sides with

polyethylene.

.2 Wetting Agent: 50% polyoxyethylene ester and 50% polyoxyethylene ether mixed with water in a concentration to provide thorough wetting of ACM.

.3 Waste Containers: As required by Ontario Regulation 309, asbestos waste shall be

contained in a rigid, impermeable, sealable container of sufficient strength to accommodate the weight and nature of the waste. Where the container is a cardboard box, the waste must be sealed in a 6 mil (0.15 mm) polyethylene bag before being placed within the box. All waste containers shall have a printed cautionary asbestos warning, clearly visible when ready for removal to the disposal site. The warning must be in large, easily legible letters that contrast in colour with the background, and consist of the word "CAUTION" in letters not less than 10 cm in height and the words:

CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBRES Avoid Creating Dust and Spillage Asbestos May be Harmful to Your Health Wear Approved Protective Equipment

Note that the above warning message must also be displayed on both sides of every vehicle used for the transportation of asbestos waste.

.4 Tape: Tape suitable for sealing polyethylene to surfaces under both wet conditions using

amended water, and dry conditions. .5 Slow Drying Sealer: Non-staining, clean, water dispersible type that remains tacky on

surface for at least 8 hours and designed for the purpose of trapping residual asbestos fibres. Sealer shall have flame spread and smoke developed rating less than 50 (and be compatible with new fireproofing).

.6 Encapsulant: Foster Bridging Encapsulant 32–32, Childers CHIL-BRIDGE CP-211

Bridging Encapsulant or other equivalent encapsulant product approved by the Consultant.

.7 HEPA Vacuum (refer to definition).



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Work Areas:

.1 Shut off air handling and ventilation systems to prevent contamination and fibre dispersal to other areas of the building during work phase.

.2 Critical Barriers: seal off all openings such as ducts, grilles and diffusers, with

polyethylene sheeting sealed with tape.

.3 Pre-clean moveable objects (and carpeting) within proposed work areas using HEPA vacuum and cover with polyethylene sheeting sealed with tape.

.4 Pre-clean fixed casework, plant and equipment within proposed work areas using

HEPA vacuum and cover with polyethylene sheeting sealed with tape. .5 Clean proposed work areas using, where practicable, HEPA vacuum cleaning

equipment. If not practicable, use a wet cleaning method. Do not use methods that raise dust, such as dry sweeping or vacuuming using other than HEPA vacuum equipment.

.6 Establish negative pressure system and operate continuously from the time the first

polyethylene is installed to seal openings until final completion of the work including final clean-up. Sufficient negative air units must be provided to maintain a minimum of four (4) air changes per hour within the work area (calculated at 75% efficiency of the units). Prior agreement from the Consultant is to be obtained for placement of the units. Exhaust ducting must be semi-rigid (i.e., wire-reinforced polyethylene).

.7 Seal off (critical barriers) the remainder of the openings such as corridors,

doorways, windows, skylights, etc., with polyethylene sheeting (6 mil) sealed with tape.

.8 Cover floor and wall surfaces with polyethylene sheeting sealed with tape. Use 1

layer of orange rip-proof to cover walls and 2 layers of orange rip-proof polyethylene to cover floor. Cover floors first so that polyethylene extends at least 300 mm up walls then cover walls to overlap floor sheeting.

.9 Build airlocks at all entrances to and exist from work areas so that work areas are

always closed off by one curtained doorway when workers enter or exit. .10 At each access to work areas install warning signs in upper case letters reading as

follows: "CAUTION ASBESTOS HAZARD AREA (24 mm) NO UNAUTHORIZED ENTRY (19 mm) WEAR ASSIGNED PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (19 mm) BREATHING ASBESTOS DUST MAY CAUSE SERIOUS BODILY HARM (7 mm)".

.11 After work area isolation, remove heating, ventilating, and air conditioning filters,

pack in sealed plastic bags 0.15 mm minimum thick and treat as contaminated asbestos waste. Remove ceiling-mounted objects such as lights, partitions, other fixtures not previously sealed off, and other objects that interfere with asbestos removal, as directed by Consultant. (Note -upon completion of removal, replacement of such objects and re-wiring shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, provided they are performing the re-instatement). Use localized water spraying during fixture removal to reduce fibre dispersal.



.12 Maintain emergency and fire exits from work areas or establish alternative exits satisfactory to Fire Commissioner of Canada and Provincial Fire Marshall.

.13 Where application of water is required for wetting ACM, shut off electrical power,

provide 24 volt safety lighting and ground fault interrupter circuits on power source for electrical tools, in accordance with CSA Standard. Ensure safe installation of electrical lines and equipment.

.2 Worker Decontamination Enclosure System:

Worker Decontamination Enclosure System shall consist of an Equipment / Access Room and a Clean Room, as follows:

.1 Equipment and Access Room: build an Equipment and Access Room between

Clean Room and work areas, with two curtained doorways, one to the Clean Room and one to work area using orange rip-proof polyethylene (2 layers on floor). Install waste receptor and storage facilities for workers' shoes and any protective clothing to be reused in work areas. The Equipment and Access Room shall be large enough to accommodate specified facilities, any other equipment needed and at least one worker allowing him sufficient space to undress comfortably.

.2 Clean Room: build a Clean Room between the Equipment and Access Room and

clean areas outside of the enclosure, with two curtained doorways, one to outside of enclosures and one to Equipment and Access Room using orange rip-proof polyethylene (2 layers on floor). Provide lockers or hangers for workers street clothes and personal belongings. Provide storage for clean protective clothing and respiratory equipment. Install a mirror to permit workers to fit respiratory equipment properly, and sufficient hangers and hooks.

.3 Container and Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System:

Container and Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System shall comprise of a Staging Area within the work area, a Wash Area, a Holding Room and an Unloading Room. The purpose of this system is to provide a means to decontaminate scaffolding, waste and material containers vacuum and spray equipment, and other tools and equipment for which the Worker Decontamination Enclosure System is not suitable.

.1 Staging Area: designate a Staging Area in the work area for gross removal of dust and debris from waste containers and equipment, labelling and sealing of waste containers, and temporary storage pending removal to Wash Area. Staging Area shall have a curtained doorway to the Wash Area.

.2 Wash Area: build a Wash Area between the Staging Area and Holding Room with

two curtained doorways, one to the Staging Area and one to the Holding Room using orange rip-proof polyethylene (2 layers on floor). Provide high-pressure low volume sprays for washing of waste containers and equipment. Provide piping and connect to water sources and drains.

.3 Holding Room: build a Holding Room between the Wash Area and Unloading

Room, with two curtained doorways, one to the Wash Area and one to the Unloading Room using orange rip-proof polyethylene. The Holding Room shall be of sufficient size to accommodate at least two waste containers and the largest item of equipment used.

.4 Unloading Room: build an Unloading Room between the Holding Room and

outside, with two curtained doorways, one to the Holding Room and one to outside using orange rip-proof polyethylene.



.4 Construction of Decontamination Enclosures:

.1 Build suitable framing for enclosures and line with orange rip-proof polyethylene

sheeting sealed with tape. Use two layer of orange rip-proof polyethylene on floors.

.2 Build curtained doorways between enclosures so that when people move through

or when waste containers and equipment are moved through a doorway, one of the two closures comprising the doorway always remains closed.

.5 Separation of Work Areas from Occupied Areas:

.1 Separate parts of the building required to remain in use from parts of the building

used for asbestos abatement by means of an airtight barrier system constructed as follows:

.1 Build suitable floor to ceiling lumber or metal stud framing, cover with orange

rip-proof polyethylene sheeting sealed with tape, and apply 9 mm minimum thick plywood. Seal all joints between plywood sheets and between plywood and adjacent materials with duct tape, to create an airtight barrier.

.2 Cover plywood barrier with orange rip-proof polyethylene sealed with tape,

as specified for work areas.

.6 Maintenance of Enclosures

.1 Maintain enclosures in tidy condition. .2 Ensure that barriers and polyethylene liners are effectively sealed and taped.

Repair damaged barriers and remedy defects immediately upon discovery. .3 Visually inspect all enclosures at the beginning of each working period. .4 Use smoke methods to test effectiveness of barriers when directed by Consultant.

.7 Asbestos Abatement work shall not commence until: .1 Arrangements have been made for disposal of waste. .2 For wet stripping techniques, arrangements have been made for containing,

filtering and disposal of waste water. .3 Work areas and decontamination enclosures (and parts of the building required to

remain in use) are effectively segregated. .4 Tools, equipment and material and waste containers are on hand. .5 Arrangements have been made for building security. .6 Warning signs specified in 3.1.1.10 are displayed where access to contamination

areas is possible. .7 All notifications have been completed and other preparatory steps have been

taken. .8 The Consultant has approved the enclosure for removal.



3.2 Asbestos Removal

.1 Before removing asbestos

.1 Prepare site. .2 Spray asbestos material with water containing the specified wetting agent, using

airless spray equipment capable of providing a "mist" application to prevent release of fibres. Saturate the asbestos material sufficient to wet it to the substrate without causing excess dripping. Spray the asbestos material repeatedly during work process to maintain saturation and to minimize asbestos fibre dispersion.

.2 Remove the saturated asbestos material in small sections. Do not allow saturated

asbestos to dry out. As it is being removed, pack the material in sealable plastic bags, 0.15 mm thick, with pre- printed asbestos warning labels. Double-bag to ensure integrity. If asbestos waste contains hard or sharp objects capable of puncturing the bags, bags must be immediately placed in rigid, watertight containers, appropriately labelled. No friable material is to remain lying on the floor at the end of the day shift.

.3 Seal filled bags by "goose-necking" top and taping. Clean external surfaces of

bags/containers thoroughly by wet sponging. Remove immediately from work area to Staging Area, and from there to decontamination Wash Area. Wash containers thoroughly in decontamination Wash Area, and store in Holding Room pending removal to Unloading Room and outside. Ensure that containers are removed from the Holding Room by workers who have entered from uncontaminated areas dressed in clean overalls. Place double-bagged waste in labelled, rigid containers (e.g., cardboard boxes, fibre or metal drums) for transport to dump, as required by Ont. Reg. 309 (double bags alone are not acceptable unless the hauler is specifically licensed to transport asbestos waste in bulk).

.4 After completion of stripping work, all surfaces from which asbestos has been removed

shall be nylon brushed and wet- sponged to remove all visible material. During this work the surfaces shall be kept wet.

.5 Where the Consultant decides complete removal of ACM is impossible due to

obstructions such as structural members or major service elements, seal/encapsulate the material to the satisfaction of the owner.

.6 After nylon brushing and wet sponging to remove visible asbestos and after sealing

asbestos-containing material impossible to remove, wet clean the entire work area including the Equipment and Access Room, and equipment used in the process. After inspection by Consultant, apply continuous coat of slow-drying sealer to all surfaces of workspace. Allow at least 4 hours with no entry, activity, ventilation or disturbance other than operation of negative pressure units during this period. A Final Air Sample will be collected inside the enclosure and the site will be approved for final clean-up if the fibre concentration of the air is less than 0.01 (f/cc).

3.3 Final Clean-up

.1 Following cleaning specified in 3.2.6 above proceed with final clean-up. Note: do not remove any of the critical barriers until the polyethylene used to protect the flooring and walls has been removed, all areas have been cleaned and the Consultant has approved the clean-up.



.2 Remove polyethylene sheet by rolling it away from walls to centre of work area. Vacuum

all visible asbestos-containing particles observed during clean-up immediately, using HEPA vacuum equipment. The work area is to remain enclosed and the negative air units running during this clean-up.

.3 Place polyethylene seals, tape, cleaning material, clothing, and other contaminated waste

in plastic bags and subsequently into sealed, labelled, rigid waste containers for transport (double plastic bags alone are not acceptable unless hauler is specifically licensed to transport asbestos waste in bulk).

.4 Work areas, Equipment and Access Room, and other enclosures that may be

contaminated shall be included in the clean-up.

.5 Sealed waste containers and all equipment used in the work shall be included in the clean-up and shall be removed from work areas, via the Container and Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System, at an appropriate time in the cleaning sequence.

.6 A final check shall be carried out to ensure that no dust or debris remains on surfaces as

a result of dismantling operations, and air monitoring, using aggressive methods, may be carried out again to ensure that asbestos levels in the building do not exceed 0.01 fibres/ml. Repeat cleaning using HEPA vacuum equipment, or set cleaning methods where feasible, in conjunction with sampling until levels meet this criteria.

.7 As work progresses, and to prevent exceeding available storage capacity on-site, remove

sealed and labelled containers containing asbestos waste from the site. Provide Consultant with a copy of the dump receipt for each load delivered to the landfill.

.8 Only when the area has been visually approved, subsequent to the removal of the

polyethylene from the floors and walls and the clean-up of the entire work area, will the critical barriers be permitted to be removed.

3.4 Air Monitoring .1 From commencement of work until completion of cleaning operations, air samples (non-

aggressive) will be taken periodically by Consultant both inside and outside of work area enclosures.

.2 If air monitoring shows that fibre concentrations outside of the work area have increased,

as compared to the background air samples, the Consultant may direct the Contractor to use more stringent procedures.

.3 Results of air monitoring inside work areas will be used to verify that the proper type of

respirators is being worn. .4 Final clearance air samples will be collected upon completion of the asbestos “lockdown”

settling period. Results are to be available within four hours to minimize costly delays in tear-down. If the results indicate airborne fibre levels of less than 0.01 f/ml, polyethylene barriers shall be removed and the area cleared for re-occupation. If results are greater than 0.01 f/ml, the area shall be re-cleaned and re-tested at the Contractor's expense until a satisfactory result is obtained



3.5 Re-establishment of Objects and Systems

.1 When clean-up is complete:

.1 Re-establish objects moved to temporary locations in the course of work, in their proper positions.

.2 Re-establish mechanical and electrical systems in proper working order. Install

new filters (supplied by Owner). .3 Repair or replace objects damaged in the course of the work, as directed by the

Consultant.

3.6 Inspections by Consultant .1 The Contractor must arrange for the Consultant to perform the following inspections

before carrying out additional work in the specific area: .1 Enclosure Inspection, prior to disturbing any ACM. .2 Contaminated Inspection, while removal work is in progress. .3 Visual Inspection # 1, prior to “lockdown” of the enclosure. .4 Visual Inspection # 2, subsequent to the final clean-up after the air test results

have indicated that the area may be re-occupied, but before removing the critical barriers.


THOMAS CONTRACTING 02084 North Bay, Ontario GLOVE BAG ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 1 of 8


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 OUTLINE OF WORK .1 Comply with the requirements of this Section when performing all Glove bag asbestos

abatement operations as noted in the project specifications under Section 02070 – “Asbestos Scope of Work”.

1.2 WORK REQUIREMENTS

.1 In addition to the noted project specifications and Ontario Regulations 278/05 the

following requirements will also be enforced under Glove bag operations on this project: .1 All movement of asbestos waste from the work area must not be conducted

between the hours of 6:00 am to 6:00 pm if accessing through public areas of the school (not including weekends / holidays / summer break).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

.1 ACM: Asbestos-containing materials

.2 HEPA Vacuum: High Efficiency Particulate Air filtered vacuum equipment with a filter system capable of collecting and retaining fibres greater than 0.3 microns in diameter at 99.97% efficiency.

.3 Amended Water: Water with a non-ionic surfactant wetting agent added to reduce water

tension to allow wetting of fibres.

.4 Authorized Visitor: the Consultant or his representative, and persons representing regulatory agencies.

.5 Work Areas: Areas where removal of ACM takes place.

.6 Critical Barriers: 6 mil polyethylene used to cover openings such as registers and

diffusers, heating units, radiators, windows, doors etc.

.7 Polyethylene sheeting sealed with tape: 6 mil polyethylene sheeting of type and thickness specified sealed with tape along all edges, around penetrating objects, over cuts and tears and elsewhere as required to provide a continuous polyethylene membrane to protect underlying surfaces from water damage or damage by sealants, and to prevent escape of asbestos fibres through the sheeting into a clean area.

.8 Glove-Bag: Acceptable materials: Safe-T-Strip products in configuration suitable for

work. Bags intended for use at more than one location shall have internal zipper fasteners.

1.4 REGULATORY AGENCIES

.1 Comply with Federal, Provincial, and local requirements pertaining to asbestos provided that in any case of conflict among these requirements or with these specifications the more stringent requirement shall apply.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

Before commencing asbestos work, submit to the Consultant the following:

.1 Copies of all necessary permits for transporting and disposal of asbestos waste. Ensure that dump operator is fully aware of nature of material being dumped, and proper methods of disposal. Submit proof satisfactory to Consultant that suitable arrangements have been made to receive and properly dispose of asbestos waste.

.2 Proof satisfactory to Project Consultant that all employees have had instruction on the

hazards of asbestos exposure under a glove-bag removal operation, respirator use, dress, and all aspects of work procedures and protective measures. The Contractor's Superintendent shall have attended an asbestos abatement course, of not less than two days duration, approved by the Project Consultant. Submit proof of attendance in the form of a certificate (to be submitted with Tender).

.3 Submit a copy of the fully filled out “Request for Asbestos Variance” form and “Checklist

for Type 3 Asbestos Removal Operations Using the Safe-T-Strip Glove Bag Procedure” to Project Consultant for review.

.4 Submit a sample of the Safe-T-Strip Glove-Bag to Project Consultant for review and

approval. .5 Copy of the written respirator procedures (use, cleaning and maintenance). .6 Copy of Notice of Project sent to inspector at local office of Ontario Ministry of Labour.

1.6 EXISTING CONDITIONS

.1 Lab testing results of ACM taken from surfaces within the scope of work and work area(s) of this project are attached in Section 02080. These are for general information only and are not necessarily representative of all ACM contained within the scope of this project or the work area(s).

.2 Notify the Consultant of friable ACM discovered during the work and not apparent from

the drawings, specifications or report, pertaining to the work. Do not disturb such material pending instructions from the Consultant.

1.7 INSTRUCTION & TRAINING

.1 Before commencing the work provide to the Consultant satisfactory proof that every worker has had instruction and training in the hazards of asbestos exposure, in personal hygiene and work practices, and in the use, cleaning and disposal of respirators and protective clothing. A qualified supervisor, who has completed an approved supervisor asbestos abatement course of at least three (3) day duration, must be on site during all work periods. The name(s) of the supervisor(s) assigned to the job and proof of training must be submitted to the Consultant.

.2 Instruction and training related to respirators shall include instruction and training related

to: .1 The limitations of the equipment. .2 The inspection and maintenance of the equipment. .3 The fitting of the equipment. .4 The disinfecting of the equipment.



1.8 WORKER PROTECTION

.1 Instructions: before commencing work instruct workers in use of respirators, dress, glove-bags, and all aspects of work procedures and protective measures.

.2 Respirators: provide workers with personally-issued and marked respiratory equipment

acceptable to Ontario Ministry of Labour as suitable for the asbestos exposure in the work area. If disposable-type filters are used, provide sufficient filters so that workers can install new filters following disposal of used filters and before re-entering contaminated areas.

.3 Protective Clothing: Provide workers with full body disposable-type coveralls that do not

readily retain or permit penetration of asbestos fibres, and consists of full-body covering including head covering with snug-fitting cuffs at wrists, ankles and neck. Every worker who enters the work area shall wear protective clothing.

.4 Eating, drinking, chewing and smoking are not permitted in the work area. .5 Each worker shall:

.1 Dorn a respirator with new filters or reusable filters that have been tested as satisfactory, clean coveralls and head covers prior to conducting any Glove-Bag preparation or removal operation.

.2 Remove protective clothing before leaving the work area. Place contaminated

work suits in receptacles for disposal with other asbestos contaminated materials, then proceed to the designative washing facility. Clean outside of respirator with soap and water; remove respirator; remove filters and wet them and dispose of filters in the container provided for the purpose; and wash and rinse the inside of the respirator as well as hands and head areas. When not in use in the work area, store respirator in a clean and safe place. Upon completion of asbestos abatement, dispose of footwear as contaminated waste or clean thoroughly inside and out using soap and water before removing from work area.

.3 Workers shall not eat, drink, smoke or chew gum or tobacco while undertaken any

Glove-Bag preparation or removal operation.

1.9 VISITOR PROTECTION

.1 Provide protective clothing and approved respirators to authorized visitors to the work areas.

.2 Instruct authorized visitors in the use of protective clothing, respirators and procedures.

.3 Instruct authorized visitors in the proper procedures to be followed in entering into and

exiting from the work area(s).

1.10 NOTIFICATION .1 Not later than ten (10) days before commencing any glove-bag work on this project, or as

soon as possible after award of the contract, notify, orally and in writing, an inspector at the local office of the Construction Health and Safety Branch of the Ontario Ministry of Labour.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Drop & Enclosure Sheets:

.1 Polyethylene: 0.15 mm (6 mil) thick. .2 Rip-proof polyethylene: Orange thick woven fabric bonded both sides with

polyethylene.

.2 Wetting Agent: 50% polyoxyethylene ester and 50% polyoxyethylene ether mixed with water in a concentration to provide thorough wetting of ACM.

.3 Waste Containers: As required by Ontario Regulation 309, asbestos waste shall be

contained in a rigid, impermeable, sealable container of sufficient strength to accommodate the weight and nature of the waste. Where the container is a cardboard box, the waste must be sealed in a 6 mil (0.15 mm) polyethylene bag before being placed within the box. All waste containers shall have a printed cautionary asbestos warning, clearly visible when ready for removal to the disposal site. The warning must be in large, easily legible letters that contrast in colour with the background, and consist of the word "CAUTION" in letters not less than 10 cm in height and the words:

CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBRES Avoid Creating Dust and Spillage Asbestos May be Harmful to Your Health Wear Approved Protective Equipment

Note that the above warning message must also be displayed on both sides of every vehicle used for the transportation of asbestos waste.

.4 Tape: Tape suitable for sealing polyethylene to surfaces under both wet conditions using

amended water, and dry conditions. .5 Slow Drying Sealer: Non-staining, clean, water dispersible type that remains tacky on

surface for at least 8 hours and designed for the purpose of trapping residual asbestos fibres. Sealer shall have flame spread and smoke developed rating less than 50 (and be compatible with new fireproofing).

.6 Encapsulant: Foster Bridging Encapsulant 32–32, Childers CHIL-BRIDGE CP-211

Bridging Encapsulant or other equivalent encapsulant product approved by the Consultant.

.7 HEPA Vacuum (refer to definition).



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Work Areas:

.1 Shut off air handling and ventilation systems to prevent contamination and fibre dispersal to other areas of the building during work phase.

.2 Critical Barriers: seal off all openings such as ducts, grilles and diffusers, with

polyethylene sheeting sealed with tape.

.3 Pre-clean moveable objects (and carpeting) within proposed work areas using HEPA vacuum and cover with polyethylene sheeting sealed with tape.

.4 Pre-clean fixed casework, plant and equipment within proposed work areas using

HEPA vacuum and cover with polyethylene sheeting sealed with tape. .5 Clean proposed work areas using, where practicable, HEPA vacuum cleaning

equipment. If not practicable, use a wet cleaning method. Do not use methods that raise dust, such as dry sweeping or vacuuming using other than HEPA vacuum equipment.

.6 Cover floor and other horizontal surfaces within a 2m radius of the Glove-Bag

operation with of orange rip-proof polyethylene drop sheets. .7 At each access to work areas install warning signs in upper case letters reading as

follows: "CAUTION ASBESTOS HAZARD AREA (24 mm) NO UNAUTHORIZED ENTRY (19 mm) WEAR ASSIGNED PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (19 mm) BREATHING ASBESTOS DUST MAY CAUSE SERIOUS BODILY HARM (7 mm)".

.8 Maintain emergency and fire exits from work areas or establish alternative exits

satisfactory to Fire Commissioner of Canada and Provincial Fire Marshall. .9 Where application of water is required for wetting ACM, shut off electrical power,

provide 24 volt safety lighting and ground fault interrupter circuits on power source for electrical tools, in accordance with CSA Standard. Ensure safe installation of electrical lines and equipment.

.2 Asbestos Abatement work shall not commence until:

.1 Arrangements have been made for disposal of waste. .3 Work areas are effectively segregated from the rest of the building. .4 Tools, equipment and material and waste containers are on hand. .5 Arrangements have been made for building security. .6 Warning signs specified in 3.1.1.7 are displayed where access to contamination

areas is possible. .7 All notifications have been completed and other preparatory steps have been

taken. .8 The Consultant has approved the Glove bag(s) for removal.



3.2 Asbestos Removal

.1 Before removing asbestos .1 Prepare site. .2 Place tools necessary to remove insulation, in tool pouch. Wrap the bag around

pipe and close zippers. Seal bag to pipe with cloth straps and tape.

.3 Place hands in gloves and use necessary tools to removal insulation. Arrange insulation in bag to obtain full capacity of bag.

.4 Insert nozzle of spray pump into bag through valve and wash down pipe and interior

of bag thoroughly. Wet surface of insulation in lower section of bag. .5 Waste material in bags intended for use at more than one location and which are

equipped with internal zippers to seal off waste, shall be sealed off in lower sections of bag before bag is removed from pipe. Reinstall bag in new location before opening zip-lock.

.6 If bag is to be moved along pipe, loosen straps, move bag, re-seal to pipe using

double-pull zipper to pass hangers. Repeat stripping operation. .7 To remove bag after completion of stripping wash top section and tools thoroughly.

Pull polyethylene waste container over glove-bag before removing from pipe. Release one strap and remove freshly washed tools. Place tools in water. Remove second strap and zipper. Fold over into waste container and seal.

.8 After removal of bag ensure that pipe is free of all residue. Remove all residue

using HEPA vacuum or wet cloths. Ensure that surfaces are free of sludge which after drying could release asbestos dust into atmosphere. Seal exposed surfaces of pipe and ends of insulation with slow-drying sealer to seal in any residual fibres.

.9 Upon completion of work shift, cover exposed ends of remaining pipe insulation

with polyethylene taped in place. .10 All work will be subject to visual inspection and air monitoring. Any contamination of

surrounding areas indicated by visual inspection or air monitoring will require the complete enclosure and clean-up of affected areas.

3.3 Final Clean-up

.1 Immediately following the completion of the glove-bag work re-clean all surfaces within the work area using a HEPA vacuum or by damp mopping.

.2 Place glove-bags containing asbestos in sealed dust-tight waste bags. Drop sheets and disposable protective clothing shall be treated as asbestos waste and shall be wetted and folded to contain dust and then placed in waste bags.

.3 Immediately before their removal from the work area, and disposal, clean each filled waste bag using damp cloths or HEPA vacuum.



.4 Seal and remove double-bagged waste from site. Dispose of in accordance with requirements of Provincial and Federal authority having jurisdiction. Supervise dumping and ensure that dump operator is fully aware of hazardous nature of material to be dumped and that guidelines and regulations for asbestos disposal are followed.

.5 Perform final thorough cleanup of work areas and adjacent areas affected by the work using HEPA vacuum.

.6 Following cleaning specified in 3.3 above, and post abatement visual inspection by the project consultant, proceed with sub-section 3.6 below.

3.4 Air Monitoring .1 From commencement of work until completion of cleaning operations, air samples (non-

aggressive) will be taken periodically by Consultant outside of work area enclosures.

3.5 Waste and Material Handing

.1 Ensure asbestos-containing or contaminated materials removed during work is treated, packaged, transported and disposed of as asbestos waste.

.2 Clean up waste routes and loading area(s) after each load. Use asbestos abatement

procedures if appropriate or requested by the Project Consultant. .3 Drop garbage bins at designated locations. Keep bins covered and enclosed while at the

site. Bin loading area shall be kept clean at all times. .4 Do not transfer waste through Occupied Areas. .5 Transport asbestos contaminated waste to landfill licensed by the Ontario Ministry of

Environment (MOE). .6 Provide the Project Consultant with copies of landfill weigh scale receipts for disposal of

all asbestos waste. The Contractor is responsible to ensure that a receipt is submitted for each load of asbestos waste leaving the site.

.7 Co-operate with MOE inspectors and immediately carry out instructions for remedial work

at the dump to maintain environment, at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.6 Re-establishment of Objects and Systems .1 When clean-up is complete:

.1 Re-establish objects moved to temporary locations in the course of work, in their proper positions.

.2 Re-establish mechanical and electrical systems in proper working order. Install

new filters (supplied by Owner). .3 Repair or replace objects damaged in the course of the work, as directed by the

Consultant.



3.7 Inspections by Consultant

.1 The Contractor must arrange for the Consultant to perform the following inspections

before carrying out additional work in the specific area: .1 Glove-Bag Inspection, prior to disturbing any ACM’s. .2 Visual Inspection, subsequent to the final clean-up and prior to re-occupying the

work area(s).


06 10 13 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING

Page 1


218001

March 2018

Section 06 10 13 - Wood Blocking and Curbing

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Blocking in wall openings. .2 Wood furring and grounds. .3 Telephone and electrical panel back boards. .4 Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Division 10 - Specialties.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 CSA-O141-05 (R2009) - Softwood Lumber. .2 CSA-O151-09 - Canadian Softwood Plywood. .3 APA (The Engineered Wood Association) - Product Guide Grades and Specifications. .4 CANPLY (Canadian Plywood Association) - Canadian Plywood Handbook. .5 NLGA (National Lumber Grades Authority) - Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, 2010

edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Provide application instructions.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Lumber Products: Graded and stamped to NLGA requirements. .2 Plywood Products: Certified and graded to CANPLY requirements.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Lumber: NLGA (Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber).

.1 CSA-O141, softwood SPF species, S4S, grade no. 2 or better.

.2 19% maximum moisture content. .2 Plywood: CSA-O151, Sheathing Grade; unsanded. .3 Telephone and Electrical Panel Boards: Plywood. .4 Furring, blocking, nailing strips, grounds, rough bucks, cants, curbs, fascia backing and sleepers:

UseS4S material, S/P/F species, NLGA, Standard or better grade, grade marked S-Dry, in standard boardsizes as indicated on Drawings

06 10 13 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING

Page 2


218001

March 2018

2.2 FASTENERS .1 Fasteners and Anchors:

.1 Screws and Nails: Galvanized steel; type suitable for application.

.2 Anchors: Galvanized steel; toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry, expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel.

.3 Galvanized Coating for Exterior Work: Hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 FRAMING .1 Set members level and plumb, in correct position. .2 Place horizontal members, crown side up. .3 Construct curb members of single pieces. .4 Space furring at 400 mm on centre.

3.2 SHEATHING .1 Secure sheathing to framing members with ends over firm bearing and staggered. .2 Install telephone and electrical panel back boards with plywood sheathing material where required.

Size the back board by [300 mm ] beyond size of electrical panel.

END OF SECTION

06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY

Page 1


218001

March 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Finish carpentry items. .2 Hardware and attachment accessories. .3 Provide miscellaneous wood trims, panel boards for electrical, telephone and other equipment. .4 Receive and install: Steel Doors and Frames from Section 08 11 13. .5 Receive and install: Hardware from Section 08 71 00 - Finish Hardware. .6 Receive and install: Division 10 specialties. .7 Receive and install: Owner supplied washroom accessories.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 06 10 13 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Grounds and support framing. .2 Section 08 11 13 - Standard Metal Doors and Frames. .3 Section 08 71 00 - Finish Hardware .4 Division 10: Specialties.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM E84-13a - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. .2 ASTM D5116-10 Standard Guide for Small-Scale Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic

Emissions From Indoor Materials/Products. .3 CSA-O141-05 (R2009) - Softwood Lumber. .4 CSA-O151-09 - Canadian Softwood Plywood. .5 AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) – 2nd Edition, 2014. .6 CHPVA (Canadian Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association) - Official Grading Rules for Canadian

Hardwood Plywood-2010. .7 NLGA (National Lumber Grades Authority) - Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, 2010

edition. .8 NHLA (National Hardwood Lumber Association).

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS .1 Coordination:

.1 Coordinate with other work having a direct bearing on work of this section.

.2 Coordinate the work with electrical and plumbing rough-ins, installation of associated and adjacent components, and finishes.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform work to AWMAC Premium quality.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION .1 Protect work from moisture damage.


Page 2


218001

March 2018

PART 2 - Products

2.1 ADHESIVE .1 Adhesives are to be Low VOC content, unless the application does not recommend it for a specific use. .2 Adhesive: to CSA O112 Series and ASTM D2832; Polyvinyl acetate adhesive. .3 Adhesive for High Humidity Areas: to CSA O112 Series, Type I and II water resistant area formaldehyde

adhesive. .4 Adhesive for locations exposed to weather: to CSA O112 Series, Class I - Type I, or Class II - Type I

phenol or resorcinol resin adhesive. .5 Contact Adhesive: water base type. .6 Wall Adhesive: solvent release, cartridge type, compatible with wall substrate, capable of achieving

durable bond. .7 Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer and AWMAC to suit application.

2.2 FASTENERS .1 Fasteners: Unfinished steel, unless otherwise noted in Drawings, of size and type to suit application. .2 Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded, galvanized steel. .3 Galvanized Coating for Interior High Humidity Areas or Exterior: Hot dip galvanized to ASTM

A153/A153M.

2.3 ACCESSORIES .1 Lumber for Shimming, Blocking: as specified in Section 06 10 13. .2 Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type. .3 Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish colour.

2.4 FABRICATION .1 Fabricate to AWMAC Premium standards. .2 Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. .3 When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide

trim for scribing and site cutting. .4 Use running members in greatest lengths obtainable. .5 Machine dressed wood shall be slow fed using sharp cutters and finished work shall be free from drag,

feathers, slivers, or roughness of any kind. Remove machine marks by sanding. .6 In finished work machine sand exposed surfaces in shop and hand sand on job site to even smooth

surface, fee from scratches, ready for finishing. .7 Frame materials with tight joints rigidly held in place. Use glue blocks where necessary. .8 Assemble work in shop and deliver ready for installation, as far as practicable. Leave ample

allowance for fitting and scribing on job. .9 Take care to prevent opening up of glue lines in finished work. .10 Design construction methods for the expansion and contraction of materials. .11 Conceal joints and connections wherever possible. Locate prominent joints where directed by

Consultant. Intermediate joints between supports not permitted. .12 Mortise and tenon joints shall be glued and pinned. .13 Glue, blind screw or nail all work unless otherwise specified. Where surface fasteners are not

possible, confirm locations with Consultant, set nails and plug surface screws with wood plugs of material to match surface. Conceal nailing of tongued and grooved work.


Page 3


218001

March 2018

.14 Accurately scribe, cope and mitre members where required.

.15 Finished work shall be free from bruises, blemishes, mineral marks, knots, shakes, and other defects and shall be selected for colour and grain.

.16 Take field dimensions and fabricate work to suit field dimensions.

.17 Fasten wood nailers, blocking solidly to adjacent materials in true planes.

.18 Check access clearance at site before assembling large units or components in factory for shipment to site.

.19 Provide all blocking coming in direct contact with millwork in accordance with applicable provision set forth herein.

.20 Comply with glue manufacturer's recommendations for lumber moisture content, glue shelf life, pot life, working life, mixing, spreading, assembly time, time under pressure and ambient temperature.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the approved Shop Drawings. .2 Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. .3 Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to

receive this work.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install work to AWMAC Architectural Woodworks Standards, Premium Quality Standard. .2 Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. .3 Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1 mm. Do not use

additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. .4 Install all carpentry and millwork shown on drawings or as specified for completion of the work.

Cooperate with other trades in installing items supplied by other sections. .5 Set and secure all materials and components in place, rigid plumb and square. .6 Install all work in accordance with the best practice of skilled craftspeople specialized in work specified

and to the requirements of other trades. .7 Be responsible for methods of construction and for ensuring that materials are rigidly and securely

attached and will not be loosened by work of other trades. .8 Joints made on site shall be equal in quality and workmanship to joints made in the shop. .9 Apply water resistant building paper or bituminous coating over wood framing members in contact

with masonry or cementitious construction. .10 Install hardware and all specialties listed in Division 08 and Division 10 as per manufacturer's

recommendation or as specified in Division 08 and Division 10. .11 On completion, remove manufacturers identification marks and clean surfaces. .12 Install with concealed fasteners using glue, blind screw or nail all work unless otherwise specified.

Where surface fasteners are not possible, confirm locations with Consultant, set nails and plug surface screws with wood plugs of material to match surface. Conceal nailing of tongued and grooved work.

.13 Install hardware to manufacturer's written instructions supplied by Section 06 41 11.

.14 Apply solid surfacing as specified in Section 06 61 00.

.15 Install hollow metal doors and frames as specified in Section 08 11 13.

.16 Install finish hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00.


Page 4


218001

March 2018

3.3 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING .1 Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. .2 Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09 91 10. .3 Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious

materials.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Variation from True Position: 1.5 mm. .2 Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1 mm.

END OF SECTION

07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS

Page 1


218001

March 2018

Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Preparing substrate surfaces. .2 Sealant and joint backing.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 08 11 13 - Metal Doors and Frames: Sealants required in conjunction with door frames.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM C834-10 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. .2 ASTM C919-12 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. .3 ASTM C920-14 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. .4 ASTM C1193-16 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. .5 ASTM C1311-10 - Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants. .6 ASTM C1330-02(2013) - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid

Applied Sealants. .7 ASTM E330/E330M-14 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,

Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. .8 CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87: Sealing Compound, One Component, Elastomeric, Chemical Curing. .9 CAN/CGSB-19.17-M90: One Component Acrylic Emulsion Base Sealing Compound.



.2 Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria,

substrate preparation, staining characteristics, limitations, and colour availability. .2 Samples: Submit two (2) samples, of each specified joint sealant, illustrating available sealant colours

for selection.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements.

.1 Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, field quality control testing.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform work to sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material

installation instructions. .2 Perform sealant application work to ASTM C1193.


Page 2


218001

March 2018

.3 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five (5) years documented experience.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after

installation. .2 Do not allow products to exceed temperature ranges recommended by manufacturer before, during

application and during curing. .3 Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.

1.9 WARRANTY .1 Provide a five (5) year system warranty to include coverage for failure to meet specified requirements. .2 System Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve water

tight and air tight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. .3 Warranty that surfaces will not be stained by sealants. Non-staining is defined as bleeding not more

than 3 mm beyond edges of sealant.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 INTERIOR SEALANTS .1 Mildew Resistant Interior Silicone Sealant (Washrooms, Food Preparation Areas, or Plumbing Fixtures):

ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT; single component, non-sagging, non-staining, mildew resistant, fungicidal silicone rubber; colour as later selected by Consultant .1 Product: DC 786, manufactured by Dow Corning. .2 Product: Tremsil 200 Sanitary, manufactured by Tremco.

.2 Interior General Applications (unless specified otherwise): ASTM C920 and CAN/CGSB 19.13, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT; single component, siliconized acrylic latex, non-sagging, non-staining, mildew resistant, accommodating joint movement plus or minus 12 percent; colour as later selected by Consultant. .1 Product: Tremflex 834, manufactured by Tremco. .2 Product: GE Contractors 1000, manufactured by GE.

2.2 ACCESSORIES .1 Primer: Non-staining type, to suit application. .2 Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;

compatible with joint forming materials. .3 Joint Backing: ASTM C1330, round, closed cell, semi-rigid, compressible; polyethylene or

polyurethane foam rod product, oversized 30% to 50% larger than joint width. .4 Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. .5 Masking tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent type compatible with sealant and adjacent surfaces.


Page 3


218001

March 2018

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that joint openings and substrate surfaces are clean, dry, and free of frost and ready to receive

work. .2 Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. .3 Inspection: Inspect work of other Sections upon which work of this Section depends and verify that

conditions are suitable for this Work to proceed. .4 The sections providing joints between elements to be sealed by or in conformance with this section

shall conform to the limits of movement of the specified sealant by the careful determination of acceptable lengths of element to be joined (spacing of joints) and establishment of sufficiently wide joints to accommodate anticipated movement in the finished Work.

.5 Check compatibility of proposed sealants with materials to be in contact with sealant including roofing and waterproofing materials and sealants.

.6 Where sealant beads terminate against another material, check compatibility of sealant with materials encountered and ensure durable seal is provided there.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. .2 Clean and prime joints as required to meet sealant manufacturer's written instructions. .3 Perform preparation to ASTM C1193 for solvent release and latex base sealants .4 Perform preparation to sealant manufacturer's written instructions. .5 Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration. .6 Verify that mean ambient annual temperatures meet manufacturer's written tolerances. .7 Clean joints and spaces which are to be caulked and ensure that they are dry and free of dust, loose

mortar, oil, grease, and other foreign matter. Clean ferrous metals of rust, mill scale and foreign materials by wire brushing, grinding or sanding.

.8 Wipe metal surfaces to be caulked, except pre-coated metals, with cellulose sponges or clean rags soaked with ethyl alcohol, a ketone solvent, xylol or toluol and wipe dry with a clean cloth. Clean pre-coated metals with solutions or compounds which will not injure finish and which are compatible with the primer and sealant.

.9 Provide bond breaker between sealant and other materials spanning joint where backup rod cannot be provided because of depth.

.10 Where joint depth/width ratio is 3:2 or greater, install joint filler to proper, uniform depth to give sealant bead of optimum size and shape for joint condition and expected movement condition.

.11 Where surfaces adjacent to joints are likely to become coated with sealant during applications, mask them prior to priming and caulking.

.12 Seal joints in surfaces to be painted before surfaces are painted. Where surfaces to be caulked are prime painted in shop before caulking, check to make sure prime paint is compatible with primer and sealant. If they are incompatible, inform Consultant and change primer and sealant to compatible types approved by Consultant.

.13 Prime sides of joints, if priming is recommended by sealant manufacturer for type of surface being caulked, for service conditions or performance requirement of joint.


Page 4


218001

March 2018

3.3 INSTALLATION .1 Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 for solvent release and latex base sealants. .2 Install sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Apply sealant using

air- or hand-operated guns fitted with suitable nozzles and equipment approved by manufacturer. .3 Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. .4 Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width. .5 Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. .6 Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. .7 Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when

sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. .8 Apply sealant under pressure in such a manner as to assure good adhesion to sides of joints and to

completely fill all voids in the joint. .9 Form surface of sealant smooth, concave, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded

foreign matter. .10 Upon completion, remove masking and sealant smears and droppings from adjacent and other

surfaces. .11 Tool joints concave. .12 Remove and repair defective areas in sealant installation as required.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Joint Sealants: Perform adhesion tests to manufacturer's written instructions and ASTM C1193,

Method A - Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab .2 Remove sealants failing adhesion test, clean substrates, reinstall sealants and perform retesting.

3.5 CLEANING .1 Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK .1 Remove masking tape and excess sealant. .2 Protect sealants until cured.

END OF SECTION

08 11 13 STANDARD METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

Page 1


218001

March 2018

Section 08 11 13 - Standard Metal Doors and Frames

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Hollow metal doors. .2 Pressed steel door frames.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry: Installation. .2 Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. .3 Section 09 91 10 - Painting: Field painting of doors.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM A653/A653M-13 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .2 ASTM B29-03(2009) - Standard Specification for Refined Lead. .3 ASTM B749-03(2009) - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. .4 ASTM C553-13 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial

and Industrial Applications. .5 ASTM C578-13 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. .6 ASTM C591-13 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal

Insulation. .7 ASTM C665-12 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame

Construction and Manufactured Housing. .8 ASTM C1289-14 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation

Board. .9 ASTM E90-09 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission

Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. .10 ASTM E413-10 - Classification for Rating of Sound Insulation. .11 CAN/ULC-S104-10 - Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. .12 CAN/ULC-S105-09 - Standard Specification for Fire Door Frames Meeting the Performance Required by

CAN/ULC-S104. .13 CAN/ULC-S701-11 - Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering. .14 CAN/ULC-S702-09 - Standard for Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings (Includes Amendment

1, 2012). .15 CAN/ULC-S704-11 - Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polyurethane and Polyisocyanurate Boards,

Faced. .16 CSA-G40.20-13/G40.21-13 - General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/

Structural Quality Steel. .17 CSA-W59-13 - Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). .18 FM (Factory Mutual). .19 CSDMA (Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association).

.1 Recommended Dimensional Standards for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames, 2000.


Page 2


218001

March 2018

.2 Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Commercial Steel Doors and Frame Products, 2009.

.20 NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives, 2013 Edition.

.21 NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, 2012 Edition.

.22 ULC-FR-14 - Fire Resistance Directory (2014 Edition).

.23 UL - Fire Resistance Directory.


.1 Coordinate with other work having a direct bearing on work of this Section.

.2 Coordinate the work with frame opening construction, door, and hardware installation. .2 Sequencing: Sequence installation to ensure wire connections are achieved in an orderly and

expeditious manner.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Indicate door and frame configurations and finishes, location of cut-outs for hardware

reinforcement. .2 Shop Drawings:

.1 Indicate frame elevations, reinforcement, anchor types and spacing, location of cut-outs for hardware, and finish.

.2 Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cut-outs for louvres and glazing.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements. .2 Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Conform to requirements of CSDMA. Maintain one (1) copy of document on site. .2 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.

1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .1 Fire Rated Door and Frame Construction: Labeled and listed to CAN/ULC-S104. .2 Fire Rated Door Construction: Rate of rise of 250 C degrees across door thickness. .3 Installed Door and Frame Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION .1 Remove doors and frames from wrappings or coverings upon receipt on site and inspect for damage. .2 Store in vertical position, spaced with blocking to permit air circulation between components. .3 Store materials on planks or dunnage, out of water and covered to protect from damage. .4 Clean and touch up scratches or disfigurement caused by shipping or handling with zinc-rich primer.


Page 3


218001

March 2018

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS .1 Manufacturers having Product considered acceptable for use:

.1 All Steel Doors 2000 Ltd.

.2 Ambico Ltd.

.3 Artek Door (1985) Ltd.

.4 Baron Metal Industries Inc.

.5 Daybar Industries Limited.

.6 Fleming Door Products Ltd.

.7 Gensteel Doors.

.8 Metal Door Limited.

.9 Steldor.

.10 Trillium Steel Doors Limited.

.11 Vision Hollow Metal Limited. .2 Minimum specification for products specified herein shall be Canadian Steel Door and Frame

Manufacturer's Association.

2.2 MATERIALS .1 Sheet Steel: Galvanized steel to ASTM A653/A653M, commercial grade (CS), Type B.

.1 Exterior Doors: Coating designation ZF120 .

.2 Interior Doors: Coating designation ZF75 . .2 Reinforcement Channel: CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Type 44W, ZF75 coating designation to ASTM

A653/A653M. .3 Reinforcement: CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Type 44W, ZF75 coating designation to ASTM A653/A653M.

Requirements of CSDFMA Standard shall govern except as specified following: .1 Glazing stops and lite trim: 1 mm (20 ga) steel. .2 Hardware reinforcing:

.1 Butts and Pivots: 3.5 mm (10 ga) steel.

.2 Top hinge Reinforcement: 3.5mm (10ga) steel, high frequency type with additional stiffening bend.

.3 Panic Bars: 3.5 mm (10 ga) steel.

.4 Flush Bolts, Locks and Strikes: 2.5 mm (12 ga) steel.

.5 Closers and Holders: 3.5 mm (10 ga) steel.

.6 Mortar Boxes: 1 mm (20 ga) steel.

.7 Surface Mounted Overhead Stops / Closers: 2.8mm (3/16”) steel. .4 Metal jamb anchors occurring in exterior walls shall be fabricated from hot dipped galvanized sheet

steel. .5 Anchors: cold rolled commercial quality steel, regular galvannealed finish, nominal coated thickness

as indicated: .1 T-strap Type: 1.30 mm. .2 Stirrup-strap type: 50 x 250 mm size, 1.60 mm thick. .3 Jamb Floor Type: 1.60 mm thick. .4 Stud Type: 1.00 mm thick.

.6 Jamb Spreaders: 1.00mm thick, cold-rolled commercial quality steel, regular galvannealed finish.


Page 4


218001

March 2018

2.3 DOOR CORE MATERIALS .1 Honeycomb Core: Structural small cell 25.4 mm maximum kraft paper honeycomb; weight 36.3 kg

ream minimum, density 16.5 kg/cu m minimum, sanded to required thickness. .2 Polystyrene Core: ASTM C578, Type 1, rigid extruded fire retardant, closed cell board, density 16 to 32

kg/cu m, thermal values RSI-1.0 minimum. .3 Temperature Rise Rated (TRR): Core composition to provide fire-protection rating and limit

temperature rise on unexposed side of door to 250 degrees C at 30 or 60 minutes, as determined by governing code requirements, core tested as part of a complete door and frame assembly, to CAN/ULC-S104, and listed by a nationally recognized testing agency having a factory inspection service.

2.4 ADHESIVES .1 Cores and Steel Components: Heat resistant, structural reinforced epoxy, resin based adhesive. .2 Adhesive For Lock Seam Edges: 2 component, fire-resistant RRPC type designed to maintain doors

faces in permanently locked position at mechanically interlocked edge seam, and having the ability to hold paint

2.5 PRIMERS .1 Primer: Rust inhibitive touch-up only.

2.6 ACCESSORIES .1 Door Silencers: Single stud rubber/neoprene. .2 Exterior Top Caps: Rigid polyvinylchloride (PVC) extrusion. .3 Frame Thermal Breaks: Rigid polyvinylchloride (PVC) extrusion. .4 Fire Rated Louvres:

.1 Size(s): as indicated on drawings.

.2 Material and Finish: 16ga cold rolled steel, baked silicone polyester powder coat to match clear anodized aluminum finish.

.3 Louver Blade: adjustable ‘Z’ blade fitted integral blade stop and heat actuated fusible link.

.4 Frame: angle frame with surface fasteners.

.5 "Type SDL-FP" Louvers as manufactured by K.N. Crowder. .5 Non-Fire Rated Louvres:

.1 Size(s): as indicated on drawings.

.2 Material and Finish: Extruded aluminum; clear anodized finish.

.3 Louver Blade: Inverted Y blade, sight proof.

.4 Frame: angle frame with surface fasteners.

.5 "Type CDL" Louvers as manufactured by K.N. Crowder.

.6

2.7 FABRICATION - DOORS .1 Interior Doors: Laminated core construction and welded steel, stiffened where specifically

indicated on Drawings. .2 Longitudinal Edges: Mechanically interlocked, tack welded and filled with no visible edge seams. .3 Mortised, blanked, reinforced, drilled and tapped for templated hardware, in accordance with

templates provided by hardware supplier. .4 Reinforce for surface mounted hardware, anchor hinges, thrust pivots, pivot reinforced hinges, or

non-templated hardware.


Page 5


218001

March 2018

.5 Top and Bottom Channels: Inverted, recessed, welded steel channels.

.6 Provide doors with provisions for glass and/or louvers as detailed. Provide closely fitted steel glass stops with mitred corners where required, set flush and true and weathertight for exterior locations. Drill and countersink fasteners symmetrically at 150 mm oc, and place on secure side of frame. Screw stops in place, or snap in place as applicable.

.7 Reinforce doors to ensure that the maximum corner-to-corner racking of doors does not exceed 1.5 mm.

.8 Factory prepare and reinforce doors for hardware as per frame requirements, including weatherstripping. Where pairs of doors occur, prepare meeting edge to form integral astragal at exterior locations, and to receive mortised flat bar astragal for interior locations, or where no astragal, to a 55 mm radius. Refer to Hardware Schedule for removable mullions, astragals and the like for fire-rated doors. Provide permanent astragals in accordance with ULC requirements and Door Schedule.

.9 Bevel strike edges of doors 1.5 mm maximum per 50 mm thickness.

.10 Clean doors of all deleterious substances and contaminants, sand, flood coat with air drying paste filler, and again sand to eliminate all unevenness or irregularities including dimpling resulting from welding.

.11 Provide factory-applied touch-up primer at areas where zinc coating has been removed during fabrication.

2.8 WELDED STIFFENER CONSTRUCTION .1 Interior Doors: Both face sheets 1.3 mm (steel. .2 Reinforce doors with vertical stiffeners, welded to each face sheet at 150 mm on center maximum. .3 Fill voids between vertical stiffeners with fibreglass batt insulation.

2.9 FABRICATION - FRAMES .1 Exterior Frames: 1.6 mm ( thick base metal thickness.

.1 Frames: Welded type construction, thermally broken.

.2 Transom Frames, Sidelight and Window Assemblies: Welded type construction, thermally broken.

.2 Interior Frames: 1.6 mm ( thick base metal thickness. .1 Door Frames and Window Assemblies: Welded type construction. .2 Sidelight Assemblies: Welded type construction.

.3 Form profiles accurately to details indicated. All frames shall have mitred corners. Provide knock-down style frames for field assembly and installation where specifically indicated as knock-down style in the Door Schedule. Provide fully welded frames in all other locations.

.4 Mortised, blanked, reinforced, drilled and tapped for templated hardware, in accordance with templates provided by hardware supplier.

.5 At closer locations required, reinforce door frames with reinforcement plates. Supply removable portion of stop and frame where required for overhead concealed door closers, and properly connect to frame and prepare for attachment to closer prior to shipment.

.6 Provide frames with 10ga hinge reinforcement welded to frame. Provide high frequency reinforcement (i.e. hinge reinforcement fabricated with additional stiffening bend) for top hinge reinforcement.


Page 6


218001

March 2018

.7 Prepare frames for heavy weight oversize butt hinges, cylindrical locksets, rim and concealed vertical rod / mortise lock case exit devices, magnetic locks, surface door closers and concealed overhead stops. Conform to approved Finish Hardware Schedule.

.8 Furnish tightly fitted mortar boxes at all penetration points of frames, including those at electrical devices.

.9 Reinforce frames wider than 1 200 mm with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top.

.10 Prepare frames for silencers. Provide three (3) single silencers for single doors and mullions of double doors on strike side. Provide two (2) single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions.

.11 Attach fire rated label to each fire rated door unit.

.12 Fill all exposed surface depressions and all joints resulting from fabrication of frames with metallic filler and sand to a smooth, uniform finish.

.13 Ship each frame complete with easily removable metal channel or angle shaped spreaders.

.14 Terminate all door frames at top of concrete slab,

.15 For frames having a height exceeding 2500 mm, provide heavy duty, galvanized jamb reinforcement channels for each jamb in metal stud partitions, extending to and structurally connected to underside of structure, with provision for vertical adjustment and L/200 deflection of structure over.

.16 Provide continuous closure angles welded to frames as detailed.

.17 Include pressed steel frames for glazed screens throughout building, constructed as per steel door frames, except as follows: .1 Minimum thickness of frames: 1.6 mm (16 ga). .2 Utilize all-welded construction with mechanical field joints for oversized frames determined by

transportation limitations and accessibility to locations within building. .3 Equip glazed lites with removable stops accurately fitted weathertight for exterior locations and

secured in place from the secure side of room with countersunk, oval head screws.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable; check floor area within path of door swing for

flatness. .2 Verify doors and frames are correct size, swing, rating and opening number. .3 Remove temporary shipping spreaders.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install doors and frames to CSDMA. .2 Install fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80, and local authority having jurisdiction. .3 Coordinate with specified new or existing wall construction for anchor placement. .4 Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. .5 Coordinate installation of doors and frames with installation of hardware specified in Section 08 71 00. .6 Set frames plumb, square, level and at correct elevation. .7 Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. .8 Ensure integrity of lead-lining between interior of frame and adjacent wall assembly. .9 Brace frames rigidly in position while building-in. Install wood spreaders at third points of frame

rebate height to maintain frame width. Provide vertical support at centre of head for openings exceeding 1 200 mm in width.


Page 7


218001

March 2018

.10 Remove wood spreaders after frames have been built-in.

.11 Make allowance for deflection to ensure structural loads are not transmitted to frame product.

.12 Install doors, and hardware in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturer's instructions.

.13 Adjust operable parts for correct clearances and function.

.14 Install louvers, glazing and door silencers.

.15 Finish paint as specified in Section 09 91 10.

.16 Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1.5 mm measured with straight edges, crossed corner to corner.

END OF SECTION

08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE

Page 1


218001

March 2018

Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware

PART 1 - General

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Conform to Division 01, General Requirements.

1.2 DESCRIPTION .1 Work Included:

.1 Supply and delivery of finish hardware for hollow metal doors and frames (Section 08 11 13). .2 Related Work:

.1 Installation of hardware supplied by this Section installed under Section 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1 Standard hardware location dimensions in accordance with Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and

Frames (Modular Construction) prepared by Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers' Association.

1.4 MAINTENANCE DATA .1 Provide maintenance data, parts list, and manufacturer's instructions for each type door closers,

lockets, and door holders and for incorporation into maintenance manual.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCES .1 The company furnishing hardware shall be regularly engaged in the sale and distribution of builders

hardware for commercial projects. .2 Person responsible for scheduling, detailing, ordering and co-ordinating hardware for the project shall

be an experienced hardware consultant. Architectural Hardware Consultant membership in the Door & Hardware Institute is acceptable as an indication of the required experience.

.3 Hardware finished shall comply with the requirements of the Standards and Codes and as described in 1.3 of this Section.

1.6 SUBMITTALS .1 Immediately after receipt of the approved finish hardware shop drawing, purchase, co-ordinate

approved shop drawings from affected trades. .2 After approval of Hardware Schedule, submit template information to related trades .3 Prepare and submit within 30 days of receipt of a purchase order the complete detailed Hardware

Schedule Shop Drawing for Review. Provide 5 copies. .4 If requested by Consultant, supply samples of hardware which will be retained for comparison with

hardware furnished. Samples to be returned in time for installation on the project. Tag for opening identification.

.5 Catalogue cuts of products proposed for substitution shall be furnished with the Hardware Schedule submissions.

.6 Keying Schedule - Submit 3 copies of complete keying schedule based on DHI keying procedures, system and nomenclature within 90 days of receipt of purchase order.


Page 2


218001

March 2018

1.7 DELIVERY .1 Hardware shall be delivered to the job site in manufacturers original packages. Each item shall be

clearly marked with the opening number and scheduled item number to identify correct location. .2 Packing slips shall identify the quantity and item number of hardware shipped for ease of checking at

job site. .3 All hardware shall be ordered so that it will be available on time for job requirements.

1.8 WARRANTY .1 General Door Hardware shall be warranted against defects in material and manufacturer per hardware

manufacturer’s standard but not less than one year on all components. .2 Provide Manufacture published Warranty on products as follows, Locksets, Latch sets, Deadlocks, Exit

Devices, Door Closers. .3 Provide Limited Lifetime warranty on products as follows, mortise hinges, magnetic locks.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MATERIAL .1 Refer to the Hardware Schedule appended to this Section for a list of specified hardware. .2 Where specified as product manufacturer number only on sized product, hardware supplier is to

include for material, as required, to complete door opening. This is typical for Exit Device, Weather seals, Flatware sized products.

.3 Acceptable alternates to exceed as noted above in conformance with BHMA/ANSI certified testing and design, function, finish, application to that specified.

.4 Screws and Fasteners: .1 Screws to be matching finish to their product and to be manufacturer’s standard. Door closers,

door holders and exit devices installed on fire rated wood doors and hollow metal doors to be attached with the appropriate fasteners to meet code requirements.

2.2 FINISHES .1 Finishes: identified in Schedule appended to this Section.

2.3 KEYING .1 Key new hardware to existing building keying system. .2 Meet with the Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain keying instructions in writing.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 INSPECTION .1 Examine doors, frames and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper application of

finish hardware. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Hardware shall be installed by carpenter mechanics skilled in the application of commercial grade

hardware. .2 A schedule of mounting heights for items of hardware shall be included in the Hardware Schedule

Shop Drawing for approval.


Page 3


218001

March 2018

.3 Degree of opening for doors with overhead holders, closers and other affected hardware shall be included in the Hardware Schedule Shop Drawing for approval.

.4 The hands of doors shall be shown in the Hardware Schedule Shop Drawing.

3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING .1 Hardware shall be adjusted for correct operation. .2 After installation of hardware and before the building is accepted, inspect the installation and certify

that the hardware is correctly installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. .3 After installation of hardware, and before acceptance of the building check each locked door against

keying schedule to assure proper cylinder are on proper doors. For any incorrectly located cylinders, tag and relocate to proper location.

3.4 PROTECTION .1 Hardware shall be protected against field painting, finishing, cleaning and all other related work

performed at job site.

3.5 EXTRA STOCK .1 Supply 2 each of special adjusting tools furnished with hardware. .2 Supply 10 each of typical fasteners used to install hardware. .3 Extra finish hardware components as listed in the Hardware Groups.

3.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE .1 Refer to Hardware Schedule appended to this Section.

END OF SECTION

Domestic Water Piping and Washroom Upgrades Project No. 218001 West Ferris Secondary School Near North District School Board March 2018

HARDWARE SCHEDULE – Appendix to Section 08 71 00.01 - Door Hardware – Common Requirements General Notes 1. Hardware supplier shall visit the site prior to submitting hardware schedule submission for review by

Consultant and verify existing hardware preparation details on existing frames specified to be reused to ensure specified new hardware is compatible with existing frames and new doors. Hardware supplier shall identify discrepancies to Consultant.

2. Quantity of hardware listed is per door for Headings listing multiple doors. Provide quantity of hardware per door for multiple door listings. .1 HEADING A Girls WR #1, Girls WR #2 and Girls WR #3 New Interior Door and Existing Frame (914 x 2135 x 45mm New HM Door x EX PSF Frame)

Qty 3 Hinges HH BB1168 114 x 101mm (Note: verify size suits existing frame) 626 1 Deadbolt CR DL3117 c/w core to match existing school masterkey system 626 1 Door Pull CB 7430 630 1 Push Plate CB 923 - 150 x 610mm MS 630 1 Closer LC 5011 695 (Note: verify size suits existing frame) 1 Kick Plate CB 903 - 305 x 850mm MS 630 1 Sign CB P/W 2 - 203 x 203mm 630

.1 HEADING B Boys WR #1, Boys WR #2 and Boys WR #3 New Interior Door and Existing Frame (914 x 2135 x 45mm New HM Door x EX PSF Frame)

Qty 3 Hinges HH BB1168 114 x 101mm (Note: verify size suits existing frame) 626 1 Deadbolt CR DL3117 c/w core to match existing school masterkey system 626 1 Door Pull CB 7430 630 1 Push Plate CB 923 - 150 x 610mm MS 630 1 Closer LC 5011 695 (Note: verify size suits existing frame) 1 Kick Plate CB 903 - 305 x 850mm MS 630 1 Sign CB P/M 2 - 203 x 203mm 630 Abbreviations: Finishes

HH = Hager Hinge 626 = Satin Chrome Plated LC = LCN Closer 689 = Painted Aluminum SC = Schlage 630 = Satin Stainless Steel CB = Canadian Builder’s Hardware ALUM - Aluminum CR = Corbin Russwin 695 – Dark Bronze Painted

END OF SCHEDULE

09 03 95 TERRAZZO RESTORATION

Page 1


218001

March 2018

Section 09 03 95 - Terrazzo Restoration

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Cleaning and repair of existing terrazzo finishes. .2 Resurfacing of existing Portland cement terrazzo finishes. .3 Sealing of existing terrazzo finishes.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 09 66 13 - Portland Cement Terrazzo: New terrazzo finishes.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM C33/C33M-13 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. .2 ASTM C150/C150M-12 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. .3 CSA-A3000-13 - Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004 and

A3005). .4 TTMAC - Specification Guide 09 30 00, Tile Installation Manual 2012-2014.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Descriptive data and application instructions for cleaner and sealer. .2 Samples: Provide two (2) terrazzo samples, 300 x 300 mm size, in each color specified.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Qualification Statement: Installer qualifications, including previous projects.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Restorer Qualifications:

.1 Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.

.2 Successful completion of at least three (3) projects of similar scope and complexity within past five (5) years.

1.7 |SITE CONDITIONS .1 Ambient Conditions:

.1 Do not resurface terrazzo at ambient temperatures below 10 degrees C or above 32 degrees C.

.2 Maintain this temperature range for 24 hours prior to, during, and for 72 hours after completion of terrazzo resurfacing.


Page 2


218001

March 2018

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Portland Cement: CSA-A3000, Type GU, colour White. .2 Sand: CSA-A3000, sharp, coarse, screened, clean, and free of deleterious matter, colour to match

existing terrazzo. .3 Colour Pigments: Alkali-resistant, non-fading mineral pigments. .4 Water: Potable, clean, and free of organic matter.

2.2 ACCESSORIES .1 Curing Materials: Heavy kraft paper or polyethylene sheeting. .2 Terrazzo Cleaner: Specifically produced for use on terrazzo, pH factor between 7 and 10;

biodegradable and phosphate free. .3 Paint Stripper: Capable of removing paints with damage to terrazzo. .4 Sealer: Penetrating type specifically produced for use on terrazzo, pH factor between 7 and 10,

slip-resistant.

2.3 MIXES .1 Terrazzo Surfacing: Proportions to match existing terrazzo. .2 Thoroughly mix dry materials prior to adding water. Add water and mix to workable consistency.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 PREPARATION .1 Remove damaged and deteriorated terrazzo without damage to adjacent terrazzo. .2 Clean substrate; remove loose and foreign matter that could impair adhesion.

3.2 CLEANING TERRAZZO .1 Remove paints using strippers applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Rinse surfaces

with clean water. .2 Clean with cold water and detergent solution using fibre brush. .3 If detergent solution proves ineffective, clean with terrazzo cleaner:

.1 Wet surfaces with clean water.

.2 Apply terrazzo cleaner to manufacturer's written instructions by brush or roller. Allow to stand on surface for period recommended by manufacturer.

.3 Rinse thoroughly with clean water.

.4 Repeat cleaning procedure when required, but do not apply cleaner more than twice. .4 Remove paint using paint remover applied to manufacturer's written instructions. Rinse surfaces with

clean water.

3.3 PATCHING .1 Thoroughly saturate surfaces to be patched with clean water. .2 Where terrazzo has been completely removed down to substrate, coat substrate with neat cement

paste. Do not allow to dry before placing terrazzo.


Page 3


218001

March 2018

.3 Fill holes and voids with terrazzo mix to height of existing terrazzo. Where depth of new terrazzo exceeds 13 mm, place terrazzo in multiple layers.

.4 Trowel smooth and mixture level with existing surfaces.

.5 Cover terrazzo with paper or sheeting for minimum seven (7) days or until patches develop sufficient strength to prevent lifting and pulling of chips during grinding.

.6 Grind with 24 or finer grit stones or with comparable diamond plates.

.7 Grind again with 80 or finer grit stones until grout is removed from surface and terrazzo shows percentage of surface aggregate to match existing.

.8 Wash floor with clean water and rinse thoroughly. Remove excess rinse water. Apply grout using identical cement and color pigments used in topping; fill voids.

3.4 RESURFACING TERRAZZO .1 Thoroughly saturate subfloor with clean water. .2 Coat substrate with neat cement paste; broom into substrate. Do not allow to dry before placing

terrazzo. .3 Seed troweled surface with additional chips in same proportions as contained in terrazzo mix, and

trowel. .4 Roll seeded surface with heavy roller until excess water has been extracted. .5 Trowel to uniform, smooth, and level surface. .6 Cover terrazzo with paper or sheeting for minimum seven (7) days or until topping develops sufficient

strength to prevent lifting and pulling of chips during grinding. .7 Grind with 24 or finer grit stones or with comparable diamond plates. .8 Grind again with 80 or finer grit stones until grout is removed from surface and terrazzo shows percent

of surface aggregate to match existing. .9 Wash floor with clean water and rinse thoroughly. Remove excess rinse water. Apply grout using

identical cement and colour pigments used in topping; fill voids.

3.5 SEALING .1 Thoroughly wash surfaces with neutral cleaner. Rinse with clean water and allow to dry. .2 Apply sealer to manufacturer's instructions.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK .1 Provide temporary protection for completed work using non-staining coverings.

END OF SECTION

09 30 00 TILING Page 1


218001

March 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Ceramic tiling. .2 Tile accessories. .3 Mortar and Grout.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Mildew resistant sealant. .2 Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum board and cementitious backer board wall

substrate. .3 Division 15 – Mechanical: Plumbing Fixtures.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ANSI A108/A118/A136.1-2013 - Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile - Version 2013.1..

.1 ANSI A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

.2 ANSI A108.10 - Installation of Grout in Tilework.

.3 ANSI A118.1 - Specifications for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar.

.4 ANSI A118.6 - Specifications for Standard Cement Grouts for Tile Installation.

.5 ANSI A118.9 - Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units.

.6 ANSI A137.1 - Specification for Ceramic Tile. .2 CAN/CGSB 51.34-M86 - Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction. .3 CSA-A3000-13 - Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004 and

A3005). .4 TTMAC - Specification Guide 09 30 00, Tile Installation Manual 2012-2014.



.2 Coordinate requirements for floor recesses, accounting for mortar bed, bond coat and tile thickness where finished tile surfaces are installed flush with adjacent floor finishes.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of product specified. .2 Shop Drawings: Indicate movement joints, transitions and intersections with dissimilar materials,

colour arrangement, tile layout, patterns and edging details. .3 Samples for Initial Selection: Submit the following samples for initial selection:

.1 Tile: Submit samples of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing manufacturer's full range of colours, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of tile indicated. Include samples of accessories involving colour selection.

.2 Grout: Manufacturer's standard colours using actual sections of grout showing full range of colours available for each type of grout indicated.

.3 Trims: Submit samples of specified trims and transitions showing manufacturer's full range of colours.



218001

March 2018

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed the requirements of the

performance criteria as specified. .2 Installation Data:

.1 Manufacturer's recommended and special installation requirements.

.2 Written instructions for using adhesives and grouts.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS .1 Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit copies of TTMAC Maintenance Guide and additional

information as follows. .1 Manufacturer’s maintenance data sheets for floor sealers and other non-tile maintenance

materials and accessories. .2 Warning of maintenance practices or materials that may damage or disfigure finished Work.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Conform to ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 and TTMAC. .2 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum three (3) years documented experience. .3 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

three (3) years documented experience and having completed tile installations similar in material, design and extent to this Project.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION .1 Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. .2 Store materials to prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter,

and other causes; store cementitious materials in a dry area, and raised off floor and ground surfaces.

1.10 SITE CONDITIONS .1 Ambient Conditions:

.1 Apply tile after completion of Work by other sections, to dry, clean, firm, level and plumb surfaces, free from oil or wax or any other material detrimental to tile adhesion.

.2 Maintain tile materials and substrate temperature between TTMAC and manufacturer's recommended minimum and maximum temperature range whichever is more stringent.

.3 Maintain temperature range for minimum forty-eight (48) hours before and during installation and until materials are fully set and cured to manufacturer’s recommendations.

.4 Maintain adequate ventilation where Work generates toxic gases or where there is a risk of raising relative humidity to levels detrimental to building finishes and assemblies.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 CERAMIC TILE MATERIALS .1 Ceramic wall tile: to CAN2-75.1-M77, Type 1, class MR1. 105 x 105 mm size, glazed surface c/w

matching radiused edge trim, "Maple Leaf" by Olympia Tile, or approved alternate. Up to two (2) colours as later selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s standard colour range.



218001

March 2018

.2 Ceramic Floor Tile and Base: to ANSI A137.1; moisture resistance less than 0.5%, chemical resistance passing ISO 10545, unglazed porcelain, for heavy traffic, 300 x 600 mm size tiles, 100 mm high for floor base, matte finish; "Regal Series" as distributed by Olympia Tile International or approved alternate, Colour as later selected from full colour range.

2.2 TRIMS AND EDGING .1 Trims: Shapes and profiles to match colour and finish of adjoining field tile; coordinate with size and

coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. .2 Premanufactured Edging and Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum, clear satin anodized finish, 'L'

shape; height as required to suit tile installation; with integral perforated anchoring leg. .1 Product: Jolly, manufactured by Schluter.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS .1 Floor and Wall Tile Mortar:

.1 Latex-Portland Cement (interior thin set): ANSI A118.1, fast-setting, non-sagging water, latex modified, retentive Portland cement mortar. .1 Product: C-Crylic 200 with Permabond, manufactured by C-Cure. .2 Product: Kerabond with Keralstic, manufactured by Mapei. .3 Product: Laticrete 272 Mortar with Laticrete 333, manufactured by Laticrete

.2 Tile Grout: .1 Portland Cement Grout - Unsanded:

.1 ANSI A118.6 , factory blended latex-portland cement grout, specifically formulated for joints maximum 3 mm wide.

.2 Colour: As selected from manufacturer¢s standard range.

.3 Products: .1 Product: MP Non-Sanded 923, manufactured by C-Cure. .2 Product: Keracolor 'U', manufactured by Mapei. .3 Product: Laticrete 1600 with Laticrete 1776 Grout Admix Plus, manufactured by

Laticrete. .2 Portland Cement Grout - Sanded:

.1 ANSI A118.6 , factory blended dry-set stain resistant, latex modified portland cement and graded silica sand, formulated for joints greater than 3 mm wide.

.2 Colour: As selected from manufacturer's standard range.

.3 Products: .1 Product: MP Sanded 924, manufactured by C-Cure. .2 Product: Keracolor 'S', manufactured by Mapei. .3 Product: Laticrete 1500 with Laticrete 1776 Grout Admix Plus, manufactured by

Laticrete.

2.4 ACCESSORIES .1 Joint Sealant: As specified in Section 07 92 00.



218001

March 2018

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Examine surfaces and verify that surfaces are ready to receive tile installation.

.1 Concrete substrates have cured minimum of ninety (90) days to TTMAC requirements.

.2 Substrates are dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and curing compounds.

.3 Grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of Work in or behind tile have been installed.

.4 Joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations. .2 Verify tile subject to colour variations has been factory blended and packaged. If not factory blended,

blend tiles at site before installing.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration. .2 Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. .3 Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to flatness tolerances

specified. .4 Install backing board over metal studs to board manufacturer's written instructions. Tape joints and

corners.

3.3 INSTALLATION .1 Install tile to TTMAC and manufacturer’s written instructions. .2 Request tile pattern. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. .3 Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete

covering without interruptions: .4 Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners neatly. Align wall joints. .5 Install premanufactured metal edge trim to all outside corners and exposed tile edges which

are field cut and/or do not have a factory bullnose profile including cut tile used for floor base. .6 Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints

watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or grout. .7 Adjust tile layout to minimize tile cutting. Maintain minimum tile width of one-third unit size unless

indicated otherwise on Drawings. .8 Form internal angles square and external angles square. .9 Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. .10 Keep control joints joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. .11 Allow tile to set for a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours prior to grouting. .12 Install grout to TTMAC and manufacturer’s written instructions. .13 Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and planes.



218001

March 2018

3.4 LIPPAGE TOLERANCES .1 Field Verification of Finished Installation: To TTMAC lippage limits as follows:

TILE TYPE TILE SIZE JOINT WIDTH ALLOWABLE LIPPAGE Glazed Wall/Mosaics 25 x 25 mm to 150 x 150

mm 1.5 mmto 3 mm 0.78 mm

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Provide inspection of the following:

.1 Tiles are set flush and level with adjacent tiles, meeting lippage requirements.

.2 Identify broken, cracked, damaged or hollow sounding tiles.

.3 Accessories are correctly installed.

.4 Grouting and sealant are correctly installed.

.5 Installation is complete to TTMAC.

3.6 CLEANING .1 Clean tile and grout surfaces with manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods.

3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK .1 Protect finished areas from traffic until setting materials have sufficiently cured to TTMAC

requirements. .2 Protect finished floor areas from foot and wheel traffic from floors for a minimum of twenty-four (24)

hours after completion of grouting.

END OF SECTION

09 51 13 ACOUSTIC PANEL CEILINGS

Page 1


218001

March 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Suspended metal grid ceiling system and perimeter trim. .2 Acoustic tile.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Division 15 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC): Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. .2 Division 16 – Electrical: Light fixtures in ceiling system. .3 Division 16 – Electronic Safety and Security: Fire alarm components in ceiling system.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM C635/C635M-13a - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of

Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. .2 ASTM C636/C636M-13 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels. .3 ASTM E580/E580M-11be1 - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions. .4 ASTM E1264-08e1 - Standard Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products. .5 Ceiling & Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA): Ceiling Systems Handbook. .6 UL - Fire Resistance Directory. .7 ULC-FR-14 - Fire Resistance Directory (2014 Edition).

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS .1 Installed System: Conform to UL or ULC Listed Assembly Designs indicated on the Drawings and

Construction Data. .2 Suspension System: Maximum deflection of 1:360 for acoustic ceiling system including integral

mechanical and electrical components.

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS .1 Division 01: Project management and coordination procedures. .2 Sequencing:

.1 Sequence work to ensure acoustic ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.

.2 Install acoustic units after interior wet work is dry.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Division 01: Submission procedures. .2 Product Data: Provide data on metal grid system components, acoustic units and trims. .3 Samples:

.1 Submit one (1) sample of each type of lay-in tile specified, 150 x 300 mm in size, illustrating, texture, pattern, edge profile, colour, material and finish of acoustic units.

.2 Submit one (1) samples of each, 300 mm long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, perimeter molding, or profile edge moulding.


Page 2


218001

March 2018

1.7 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Division 01: Submission procedures. .2 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements, including perimeter conditions

requiring special attention.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS .1 Division 01: Maintenance and extra material requirements. .2 Extra Stock Materials: for each lay in tile ceiling Product, colour and pattern, clearly marked to

identify: .1 Manufacturer's name; .2 Product name; .3 Product colour and pattern.

.3 Provide minimum of two (2) full, unopened bundles for each of extra ceiling tile to Owner.

.4 Provide letter from Owner's representative acknowledging receipt of this material.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Conform to CISCA requirements. .2 Grid Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience. .3 Acoustic Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.

1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .1 Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies and combustibility requirements for materials.


.1 Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 16 degrees C , and maximum humidity of 40% prior to, during, and after acoustic unit installation.

1.12 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .1 Deliver materials in their original wrappings or containers with manufacturer's labels and seals intact

and store in a dry area under cover and clear of the ground. .2 Ship grid members and mouldings in rigid crates and avoid damage. Bent or deformed material will

be rejected.

1.13 WARRANTY .1 Provide One (1) Year Written Warranty against sagging of acoustical ceiling tiles. .2 Provide Ten (10) Year Written Warranty against rusting and other manufacture defects for grid system.


Page 3


218001

March 2018

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS - SUSPENSION SYSTEM .1 Manufacturers offering functionally and aesthetically equivalent products.

.1 Armstrong World Industries.

.2 CGC Inc.

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM / CEILING GRID MATERIALS .1 Fire Rated Grid: ASTM C635/C635M, heavy duty, listed by ULC for use in a 1 or 2 hour assembly,

double webbed, hot dipped galvanized, cold rolled steel, non rated; main tees, cross tees and grid adapters with components die cut and interlocking; shop finished. .1 Profile: exposed T, with 43 mm depth. .2 Exposed Grid Surface Width: 24 mm. .3 Grid Finish: Colour White. .4 Product: Basis of Design Prelude XL 15/16" Fireguard by Armstrong Ceilings or Donn

BrandDX/DXL 15/16" by CGC inc. .2 Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips required for

suspended grid system. .3 Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, ceiling system

flatness requirement specified. .4 Hanger Wire: to ASTM A641/A641M, zinc coated, soft annealed, minimum 3.77 mm OD steel wire. .5 Tie Wire: to ASTM A641/A641M, zinc coated, soft annealed, minimum 1.21 mm OD steel wire.

2.3 MANUFACTURERS - ACOUSTIC UNIT MATERIALS .1 Manufacturers offering functionally and aesthetically equivalent products.

.1 Armstrong World Industries.

.2 CGC Inc.

2.4 ACOUSTIC / LAY-IN TILE MATERIALS .1 Acoustic Ceiling Tile - Fire Rated: UL listed fire rating, wet formed mineral fiber and fire-rated core,

non-sagging, lay-in tile to ASTM E1264, Type III, Form 2, Pattern C, E; complete with anti-mould and mildew treatment and sag resisting treatment; conforming to the following: .1 Size: 610 x 1220 mm. .2 Thickness: 16 mm minimum as required to meet UL Des and weight requirements. .3 Composition: Mineral. .4 Weight: minimum 5.3 kg/s m (1.1 lbs/sq.ft). .5 Light Reflectance: 84% or greater. .6 NRC Range: 0.55 or greater. .7 CAC Range: 33 or greater. .8 Fire Hazard Classification CAN/ULC S102: Class A, Flame spread 25 or less, Smoke

Development 50 or less. .9 UL Design Listing: UL-FR-83 or to comply with requirements of UL Design G205. .10 Edge: Square. .11 Surface Colour: White. .12 Surface Finish: Non-directional fissured.


Page 4


218001

March 2018

.13 Basis of Design: Radar Climaplus FC 5/8" by CGC inc. or Fine Fissured Fire Guard w/ Humi-Guard by Armstrong.

2.5 ACCESSORIES .1 Hold Down Clips: Fire rated hold down clips as required by manufacturer and UL Design. .2 Fire Rated Light Fixture Enclosure: site constructed from fire rated acoustic panel material as indicated

in UL Design. .3 Touch-up Paint: Type and colour to match acoustic and grid units.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Division 01: Verify existing conditions before starting work. .2 Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

3.2 INSTALLATION - LAY-IN GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM .1 Install suspension system to ASTM C636/C636M, manufacturer's written instructions, UL Design, and as

supplemented in this section. .2 Install system to ASTM E580/E580M. .3 Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. .4 Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. .5 Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other

work. .6 Provide hanger clips during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. .7 Hang suspension system directly from structural elements, independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes

and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.

.8 Space hangers at minimum of 1200 mm on centre along main tees, and not more than 150 mm from ends. Do not place hangers in front of access panels.

.9 Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.

.10 Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within [150 mm ] of each corner; or support components independently.

.11 Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners.

.12 Install additional hangers and reinforcing as required to accommodate loads being carried.

.13 Install main tees suspended at maximum 1200 mm on centre and maximum 600 mm from walls. Ensure when main tees are cut to suit room length the thermal expansion punch out is provided in the cut piece of main tee.

.14 Install cross tees and adapters perpendicular to main tees, and interlock with main tees.

.15 Frame around fixtures and openings.

.16 Design system to accommodate movement caused by thermal expansion or contraction.

.17 Design hangers and carrying members to support the entire ceiling system including lighting fixtures, diffusers and equipment openings in location shown on Drawings.

.18 Perimeter Molding: .1 Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces with continuous gasket.


Page 5


218001

March 2018

.2 Use longest practical lengths.

.3 Mitre corners.

.4 Provide molding at junctions with other interruptions. .19 Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus [25 mm ] movement.

Maintain visual closure. .20 Install light fixture boxes constructed of acoustic panel above light fixtures to UL/ULC assembly

requirements and light fixture ventilation requirements.

3.3 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTIC UNITS .1 Install acoustic units to manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and

function. .3 Lay directional patterned units as indicated on drawings. Fit border trim neatly against abutting

surfaces. .4 Install units after above ceiling work is complete. .5 Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. .6 Cutting Acoustic Units:

.1 Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.

.2 Double cut and field paint exposed edges of tegular units. .7 Where bullnose concrete block corners or round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to

match perimeter molding. .8 Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system where UL listed assembly indicates clips are

required, and/or within 6 m20 ft of an exterior door.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 3 mm in 3.6 m. .2 Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.

END OF SECTION

09 66 13 PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING

Page 1


218001

March 2018

Section 09 66 13 - Portland Cement Terrazzo Flooring

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Terrazzo flooring. .2 Divider strips and edging.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 09 03 95 - Terrazzo Restoration.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM A1064/A1064M-13 - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. .2 ASTM C33/C33M-13 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. .3 ASTM C150/C150M-12 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. .4 ASTM C309-11 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. .5 CSA-A3000-13 - Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004 and

A3005). .6 Specification Guide 09 66 00, Terrazzo Installation Manual 2006-2007.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS .1 Coordination: Coordinate with other work having a direct bearing on work of this section.

.1 Coordinate the work with mechanical and electrical access cover placement in relation to terrazzo divider strips.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Provide data for divider strips sealer. .2 Samples: Submit two (2) samples, 150 x 150 mm in size illustrating colour, chip size / variation and

mortar colour.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS .1 Operation and Maintenance Data: Include procedures for stain removal, stripping, and sealing.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform Work in accordance with TTMAC. .2 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

three (3) years documented experience.


Page 2


218001

March 2018

1.9 MOCK-UP .1 Provide mock-up including floor and divider strips. .2 Locate where directed by Consultant. .3 Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work.


.1 Do not install terrazzo when temperature is below 10 degrees C or above 32 degrees C.

.2 Maintain this temperature range 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after installation of terrazzo.

.3 Provide lighting level of 860 lx measured at floor surface.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Portland Cement: CSA-A3000, Type TTMAC; GU colour for topping mix; grey colour for underbed;

modified to white higher compressive strength requirements; obtained from single source. .2 Colour Pigments For Topping: Non-fading mineral type. .3 Terrazzo Sand: Sharp, coarse, clean, screened, and free of deleterious material. .4 Water: Potable. .5 Surface Aggregate: Type, colour, and size to match existing.

2.2 ACCESSORIES .1 Divider Strips: zinc exposed top strip to match existing. .2 Curing Compound: ASTM C309. .3 Cleaner: Neutralizing liquid type, pH of 7 - 10. .4 Sealer: Colourless, penetrating liquid type to completely seal cementitious matrix surface; not

detrimental to terrazzo components.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. .2 Do not begin terrazzo work until concrete substrate has cured 28 days, minimum.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Clean substrate of foreign matter. .2 Remove surface water and thoroughly brush in neat cement slurry bond coat. .3 Prepare wood subfloor, tape joints, and apply subfloor filler. Isolate terrazzo installation from wood

subfloor with slip sheet, lap edges and ends.


Page 3


218001

March 2018

3.3 INSTALLATION - MONOLITHIC TERRAZZO .1 Saw cut underbed to install divider strips as required. .2 Install strips straight and level to match existing patterns. .3 Install terminating cap strip at top of base; attach securely to wall substrate. .4 Place terrazzo topping mix over slurry coated substrate to a nominal thickness of 25 mm.

3.4 CURING .1 Cure terrazzo topping seven (7) days by the liquid membrane curing method. .2 Use curing method to TTMAC. .3 Close area to allow undisturbed curing.

3.5 SURFACE FINISHING .1 Brush apply terrazzo topping mix slurry to topping surface. .2 Finish terrazzo to TTMAC. .3 Produce terrazzo finish surface to match approved mock-up with minimum 70% chip exposed. .4 Grind terrazzo surface with power disc machine; successively sequence using coarse to fine grit

abrasive, using a wet method. .5 Apply grout mix to match matrix over ground surfaces to fill honeycomb exposed during grinding. .6 After grout has sufficiently cured, grind, using a fine grit abrasive.

3.6 TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Variation from Flat Surface: 3 mm in 1 m. .2 Maximum Variation from Level (Except Surfaces Sloping to Drain): 3 mm.

3.7 CLEANING .1 Scrub and clean terrazzo surfaces with cleaner to TTMAC. Let dry. .2 Immediately when dry, apply sealer to manufacturer's written instructions. Let dry. .3 Seal and polish surfaces to manufacturer's written instructions written instructions.

3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK .1 Do not permit traffic over finished terrazzo surfaces.

END OF SECTION

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 1


218001

March 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Surface preparation. .2 Painting.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. .2 Division 26 - Electrical.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 MPI (Master Painters Institute) - Architectural Painting Specifications Manual and Maintenance

Repainting Manual. .2 CAN/CGSB-85.100-93: Painting. .3 SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council): Painting Manual, Volume 2 - Systems and Specifications.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS .1 Coordination: Coordinate with other Work having a direct bearing on Work of this section. .2 Scheduling:

.1 Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of and by other trades.

.2 Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants in and about building.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data:

.1 Submit Product data on all specified finishing products.

.2 Submit copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.

.3 A list of materials proposed for use on the Work, prepared by paint manufacturer, shall be submitted in writing to the Consultant for approval 60 days before the materials are required. The list shall bear the manufacturer's official certification that the materials listed thereon are of the best quality made by the company.

.2 Samples: .1 Prepare and submit samples of each of the various finishes to the Consultant for approval at

least 30 days prior to material being required. Submit samples in triplicate on [300 x 300 mm ] material. Identify each sample as to job, finish, colour schedule identifier, formula, name of manufacturer, colour name, number, sheen name and gloss values, date and name of Contract and Sub-Contractor.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements including special surface

preparation procedures and substrate conditions requiring special attention. .2 Schedule:

.1 If requested, submit Work schedule for various stages of Work when painting occupied areas for Consultant's review and Owner's approval.

.2 Submit schedule minimum of forty-eight (48) hours in advance of proposed operations.

.3 Obtain written authorization from Consultant for changes in Work schedule.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 2


218001

March 2018

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS .1 Record Documentation: Upon completion, provide itemized list of products used including the

following: .1 Manufacturer's name. .2 Product name, type and use. .3 Colour coding number. .4 Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS .1 Extra Stock Materials: Provide properly packaged maintenance material as follows.

.1 Minimum 1 L of each coating type and colour to Owner.

.2 Label each container with colour, type, texture in addition to manufacturer's label.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. .2 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section. All work is to

be completed by skilled workers with minimum five (5) years documented experience. .3 Conform to MPI Painting Manual requirements for materials, preparation and workmanship. .4 Paint Products: Paint manufacturers and paint Products listed under the Approved Product List

section of the MPI Painting Manual. .5 Notify General Contractor in writing of defects or problems, prior to commencing painting work, or

after prime coat shows defects in substrate condition or preparation.

1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .1 Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for finishes, storage, mixing,

application and disposal of paint and related waste materials.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION .1 Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers showing manufacturer's name, type of paint,

brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, colour designation, and written instructions for mixing and reducing.

.2 Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 10 degrees C and a maximum of 32 degrees C, in dry, ventilated area and as required by manufacturer's written instructions.

.3 Provide adequate fireproof storage lockers and warnings as required by authorities having jurisdiction for storing toxic and volatile/explosive/flammable materials.

.4 Provide CO2 fire extinguisher of minimum 9 kg capacity in storage area.

.5 Protection: .1 Provide metal pans or adequate tarpaulins to protect floors in areas assigned for the storage

and mixing of paints. .2 Use sufficient drop cloths and protective coverings for the full protection of floors, furnishings

and work not being painted. Protect mechanical, electrical and special equipment, hardware, and all other components of the building which do not require painting, from paint spotting and other soiling during painting process.

.3 Leave above areas clean and free from evidence of occupancy upon completion of painting.

.4 Protect paint materials from fire and freezing.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 3


218001

March 2018

.5 Keep waste rags in metal drum containing water and remove from building at end of each working shift.


.1 Do not perform painting or decorating Work when ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 10 degrees C for both interior and exterior work, or as required by paint product manufacturer.

.2 Do not perform painting or decorating Work when relative humidity is above 85% or when dew point is less than 3 degrees C variance between the air/surface temperature required by paint Product manufacturer.

.3 Provide suitable weatherproof covering and sufficient heating facilities to maintain minimum ambient air and substrate temperatures for twenty-four (24) hours before, during and after paint application.

.4 Do not perform painting and decorating Work when maximum moisture content of substrate exceeds: .1 Wood: 15%. .2 Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 %. .3 Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12%. .4 Concrete Floors: 8%.

.5 Conduct moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using a simple cover patch test.

.6 Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required.

.7 Provide minimum lighting level of 323 lux is provided on surfaces to be painted or decorated.

1.13 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL .1 Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinner, solvents, etc.) are regarded

as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Obtain information on these controls from the authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Dispose of waste materials in accordance with local and provincial authorities having jurisdiction.

.3 Where paint recycling is available, collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility.

.4 Place non-reusable materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste.

.5 To reduce contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems or into the ground, adhere to the following procedures: .1 Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be filtered out. In no

case shall equipment be cleaned using free draining water. .2 Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated containers and

ensure proper disposal. .3 Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant recovery,

proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering. .4 Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous waste

regulations. .5 Dry out empty paint cans prior to disposal or recycling.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 4


218001

March 2018

.6 Close and seal tightly partly used cans of materials including sealant and adhesive containers and store protected in well ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature.

.6 Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials and deliver or arrange collection for verifiable re-use or re-manufacturing.

1.14 WARRANTY .1 Provide two (2) year warranty on interior and exterior paint or varnish finishes, unless noted otherwise.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Use only materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers) listed in the latest

edition of the MPI Approved Product List (APL) on this project. .2 Ancillary materials such as linseed oil, shellac, thinners, solvents to be of highest quality product and

provided by an MPI listed manufacturer, and compatible with paint materials being used. .3 Where possible, all materials to be lead and mercury free with low VOC content. Use ECOLOGO

paints and coatings with volatile organic compound (VOC) contents less than 150 g/L for non-flat sheen coatings and 50 g/L for flat sheen coatings.

.4 Provide all material for each system from a single manufacturer.

.5 Fire Hazard: Flame spread and smoke developed ratings in accordance with applicable code and local authorities having jurisdiction.

.6 Patching Materials: filler as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the specific application and finish system.

.7 Fastener Head Cover Materials: filler as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the specific application and finish system.

.8 Bonding primer: For use on all previously finished surfaces specified to receive new finish. Premium quality, waterborne, acrylic urethane, low odor/low VOC, bonding primer. .1 Product: "Stix®" as manufactured by Benjamin Moore.

.9 Where required, use only materials having a minimum MPI "Environmentally Friendly" E3 rating based on VOC (EPA Method 24) content levels.

.10 Where indoor air quality (odour) is an issue, use only MPI listed materials having a minimum E3 rating.

2.2 MIXING AND TINTING .1 Coatings: Ready-mixed and pre-tinted; re-mix all paint in containers prior to and during application

to ensure break-up of lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and colour and gloss uniformity to a complete homogeneous mixture.

.2 Paste, Powder or Catalyzed Paint: Mixed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

.3 Carefully mix and prepare paints and coating materials according to manufacturer's instructions.

.4 Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary strain before using.

.5 Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the colour of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each coat, but not create an issue with coverage.

.6 Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 5


218001

March 2018

.1 Use thinners only where approved by paint or coating system manufacturer.

.2 Do not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations for addition of thinner. Do not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints.

.3 Thin paint for spraying in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions.

2.3 FINISH AND COLOUR .1 Finish: To MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. .2 Colours and Finishes: to be provided after award of Contract. .3 General:

.1 Finish all exposed, non-prefinished materials/surfaces, as indicated on the Drawings, and as described in herein.

.2 Exposed means visible in the complete work. In the case of closets, cabinets and drawers, it included the interiors.

.3 In instances where materials specified are not suitable for a particular job application or are contrary to the manufacturer's recommendations for use on a particular surface, such condition shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Consultant for clarification and instruction.

.4 Finishes shall match approved samples, but Consultant reserves the right to make reasonable changes to finish specifications to obtain desired results without additional cost or obligation to the Owner.

.5 A colour chart giving colour schemes and gloss values for various areas will be prepared after tendering by the Consultant. The final selection of colours and surface textures of all finishes throughout, transparent (natural) or opaque (paint), shall rest solely with the Consultant.

.6 Do not paint baked enamel, chrome plated, stainless steel, aluminum or other surfaces finished with a final factory finish. All primed surfaces shall be finish painted under this Section. Exception: pre-painted mechanical grilles where directed by the Consultant.

.7 Paint all non-prefinished miscellaneous metal, doors, frames, mechanical and electrical items.

.8 Paint all radiators in occupied spaces.

.9 Previously painted surfaces are assumed to be finished with alkyd based paint. Apply bonding primer over all previously finished surfaces prior to applying new paint coatings.

2.4 GLOSS/SHEEN RATINGS .1 Paint gloss is defined as the sheen rating of applied paint with the following values:

Gloss Level

Description Gloss @ 60 degrees Sheen @ 85 degrees

G1 Matte Finish (flat) 0 to 5 10 max. G2 Velvet-Like Finish 0 to 10 10 to 35 G3 Eggshell Finish 10 to 25 10 to 35 G4 Satin-Like Finish 20 to 35 35 min. G5 Traditional Semi-Gloss Finish 35 to 70 G6 Traditional Gloss 70 to 85 G7 High Gloss Finish More than 85

.2 Gloss level ratings of painted surfaces as specified.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 6


218001

March 2018

2.5 MANUFACTURERS .1 Manufacturers: Use only manufacturers and Products listed in the MPI Architectural Painting

Specification Manual. .2 Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoats produced by the same manufacturer

as the finish coats.

2.6 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS .1 Interior Finishes: The following specifications apply to the finishing of all surfaces required to be

painted or varnished or stained or sealed, as indicated in the Room Finish Schedule located in the Drawings. All finishes shall comply with the following MPI Painting Manual requirements. For ALL existing surfaces to be repainted, utilize specified bonding primer in lieu of or in addition to listed primer.

.2 Concrete Masonry Units: .1 INT 4.2D: High performance architectural latex, G5 finish

.1 Primer: MPI product code #50.

.2 Top coat: MPI product code #141 .3 Gypsum Board: (ceilings)

.1 INT 9.2B: High performance architectural latex, G1 finish. .1 Primer: MPI product code #50. .2 Top coat: MPI product code #141.

.4 Galvanized Metal: (doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking, ducts, etc.).: .1 INT 5.3M: High performance architectural latex, G5 finish.

.1 Primer: MPI product code #134.

.2 Top coat: MPI product code #141.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that substrate conditions and surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product

manufacturer. .2 Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition

that may potentially affect proper application. .3 Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

.1 Apply paint finish in areas where dust is no longer being generated by related construction operations or when wind or ventilation conditions are such that airborne particles will not affect quality of finished surface.

.2 Apply paint to adequately prepared surfaces and to surfaces within moisture limits.

.3 Apply paint when previous coat of paint is dry or adequately cured. .4 Conditions and Surfaces:

.1 Check all surfaces with electric moisture meter and do not proceed if reading is higher than 12-15%, without written permission from the Consultant.

.2 Proceed with work only when surfaces and conditions are satisfactory for production fo a first class job.

.3 Remove dust, grease, rust and extraneous matter from surfaces (except rust occurring on items specified to be primed under other Sections shall be remove and work re-primed by those Sections).

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 7


218001

March 2018

.4 A representative of the product manufacturer will inspect the surfaces to be painted prior to application, arrange for such inspection and provide written report to the Consultant.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI requirements. .2 Remove and store miscellaneous hardware and surface fittings such as electrical plates, hardware,

light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to painting. Clean and replace upon completion of painting Work in each area. Remove doors before painting to paint bottom and top edges and re-hang.

.3 Protect adjacent surfaces and areas, including rating and instruction labels on doors, frames, glass, aluminum surfaces, equipment, piping, from painting operations with drop cloths, shields, masking, templates, or other suitable protective means.

.4 Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Start of finish painting of defective surfaces indicates acceptance of substrate and making good defects will be at no cost to Owner.

.5 Confirm preparation and primer used with fabricator of steel items.

.6 Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and finish system.

.7 Erect barriers or screens and post signs to warn of, or limit, or direct traffic away or around work areas as required.

.8 Seal with shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.

.9 Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

.10 Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning.

.11 Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.

.12 Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.

.13 Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.

.14 Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Test surfaces for alkalinity with litmus paper or other recognized method. Remove alkalinity, oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.

.15 Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.

.16 Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs.

.17 Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 8


218001

March 2018

.18 Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats.

.19 Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.

.20 Preparation for Previously Finished Surfaces .1 Clean existing surfaces to be repainted or varnished to provide bond. Ensure compatibility of

existing finishes with specified new finishes. .2 Remove rust, scale, oil, grease, mildew, chemicals and other foreign matter. Remove loose paint

and fill flush with suitable patching material. Clean off bubbled, cracked, peeling or otherwise defective paint by stripping with suitable environmental strippers or by burning. Do not burn off paints suspected of having lead content. Treat residue from stripping as Hazardous Waste.

.3 Flatten gloss paint and varnish with sandpaper and wipe off dust.

.4 If previous coatings have failed so as to affect proper performance or appearance of coatings to be applied, remove previous coatings completely and prepare substrates properly and refinish as specified for new work.

.5 Previously painted surfaces are assumed to be finished with alkyd based paint. Apply bonding primer over all previously finished surfaces prior to applying new paint coatings.

.6 Leave entire surface suitable to receive designated finishes and in accordance with finish manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 APPLICATION .1 Apply paint or stain in accordance with CAN/CBSG 85.100 and the MPI Painting Manual Premium Grade

finish requirements. .2 Apply products to adequately prepared surfaces, within moisture limits and acceptable environmental

conditions. .3 Apply paint finish in areas where dust is no longer being generated or when wind or ventilation

conditions will not affect quality of finished surface. .4 Apply Products under adequate illumination. .5 Use methods best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. .6 Spraying will not be allowed unless specified herein or recommended by the paint manufacturer.

Obtain prior approval by Consultant. .7 Apply each coat to uniform finish. Spread finishes evenly and flow on smoothly without runs or sags. .8 Apply Products no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spread rate. Provide total dry film

thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. .9 Tint each coat of paint progressively lighter to enable confirmation of number of coats. .10 Unless otherwise approved, apply a minimum of four (4) coats of paint where deep or bright colours

are used to achieve satisfactory results. .11 Sand and dust between each coat to provide an anchor for next coat and to remove defects visible

from a distance up to 1000 mm. .12 Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat. .13 Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. .14 Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set.

Wipe excess from surface. .15 Continue paint finish behind wall-mounted items such as chalk and tack boards, and washroom

accessories. .16 Prime concealed surfaces of exterior woodwork with primer paint.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 9


218001

March 2018

.17 Prime concealed surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25% with mineral spirits.

.18 Prime/seal wood doors, re-seal all cut edges of wood to be painted or finished, if the material was cut subsequent to initial sealing. Seal tops and bottoms of wood doors with minimum 3 coats of sealer. Apply primer/sealer coats by brush or roller method. Permit paint to dry before applying succeeding coats, touch up suction spots and sand between coats with No. 100 sandpaper.

.19 Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: completely cover substrate to a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, colour, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness , or other surface imperfections will not be accepted.

.20 Transparent (Clear) Finishes: use multiple coats to produce a smooth surface film of even luster to gloss level indicated by finish system. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness , or other surface imperfections will not be accepted.

.21 Match approved samples of colour, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.

.22 Any area exhibiting incomplete or unsatisfactory coverage shall have the entire plane painted.

3.4 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT .1 Refer to Division 21 through Division 28 for schedule of colour coding and identification banding of

equipment, duct work, piping, and conduit. .2 Unless otherwise specified, paint all unfinished conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other

mechanical and electrical equipment with colour and texture to match adjacent surfaces in the following areas: .1 Exposed-to-view exterior and interior areas. .2 High humidity interior areas. .3 Boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms.

.3 In unfinished areas leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment in original finish; touch up scratches and marks.

.4 Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as supplied by manufacturer of equipment.

.5 Do not paint over nameplates.

.6 Paint inside of ductwork and convector and baseboard heating cabinets where visible behind louvers, grilles and diffusers for a minimum of 460 mm18 inch or beyond sight line, whichever is greater, with primer and one (1) coat of matt black (non-reflecting) paint.

.7 Paint the inside of light valances gloss white.

.8 Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.

.9 Paint red or band all fire protection piping and sprinkler lines in accordance with mechanical specification requirements. Keep sprinkler heads free of paint.

.10 Paint yellow or band all natural gas piping in accordance with mechanical specification requirements.

.11 Backprime and paint face and edges of plywood service panels for telephone and electrical equipment before installation to match adjacent wall surface. Leave equipment in original finish except for touch-up as required, and paint conduits, mounting accessories and other unfinished items.

.12 Remove and reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings as required for finishing.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 10


218001

March 2018

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Acceptance of Surfaces - Painted surfaces may be rejected if any of the following are evident under

natural lighting in for exterior surfaces and final lighting source (including daylight) for interior surfaces: .1 Visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles from a

distance of not less than 1000 mm. .2 Visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles from a

distance of not less than 1000 mm. .3 Visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit and other overhead surfaces when viewed at normal

viewing angles. .4 Final coats on any surface exhibit a lack of uniformity of colour, sheen, texture, and hiding

across full surface area. .2 Painted surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any of the following defects

are apparent to the inspector: .1 Brush/roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or shadowing by

inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and foreign materials in coatings. .2 Evidence of poor coverage at fastener heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets corners

and re-enterant angles. .3 Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or other contributory cause. .4 Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from

weather/moisture. .5 Damage or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants (dust, spray, other paints, etc.).

.3 Make good rejected surfaces. Small areas may be touched up; large areas without sufficient dry film thickness of coatings shall be repainted. Runs, sags or damaged paint shall be removed by scrapper or sanding prior to reapplication. Acceptance of repair and method is at the sole discretion of the Consultant.

3.6 CLEANING .1 Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove

daily from site. Dispose of materials in accordance with the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Remove paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed using means and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.

.3 Keep work areas free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.

END OF SECTION

10 21 14 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

Page 1


218001

March 2018

Section 10 21 14 - Metal Toilet Compartments

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Metal toilet compartments, floor mounted and head rail braced. .2 Urinal screens; wall mounted with floor to ceiling pilaster brace.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry: Installation. .2 Section 10 28 14 - Toilet and Bath Accessories.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM A167-99(2009) - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip. .2 ASTM A424/A424M-09a - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling. .3 ASTM A653/A653M-13 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .4 CSA-B651-12 - Accessible Design for the Built Environment.


.1 Coordinate with other Work having a direct bearing on work of this Section.

.2 Coordinate the Work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. .2 Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevations, dimensions, details of wall supports, door swings. .3 Samples: Submit two (2) samples of partition panel colours available for selection.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements, including perimeter conditions

requiring special attention.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .1 Conform to CSA-B651 for accessibility requirements for the handicapped.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS .1 Hadrian; Product: Powder Coated (standard). .2 Other acceptable manufacturers offering functionally and aesthetically equivalent products.

.1 Shanahans.

.2 Global Partitions.

.3 ASI Group Canada.


Page 2


218001

March 2018

.4 Global Storage Systems.

2.2 MATERIALS .1 Steel Sheet: ASTM A424/A424M, Type I, commercial quality.

2.3 ACCESSORIES .1 Pilaster Shoe: Formed ASTM A167, Type 304 stainless steel, 75 mm high, with adjustable screw jack. .2 Head Rails: Hollow aluminum tube, 25 x 41 mm size, with anti-grip strips. .3 Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel; tamper proof type .4 Pilaster Wall Attachment: continuous length, stainless steel or prefinished steel 'U' channel. .5 Panel to Panel Brackets: manufacturer's standard cast metal, stainless steel or aluminum. .6 Hardware: Chrome plated non-ferrous cast metal.

.1 Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning.

.2 Nylon bearings.

.3 Thumb turn door latch with exterior emergency access feature.

.4 Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper.

.5 Coat hook: NOT REQUIRED - NOT PERMITTED.

.6 Door pull for out-swinging doors.

2.4 FABRICATION .1 Fabricate components of steel sheet as follows:

.1 Panel and Door Faces: 0.8 mm (20 gauge).

.2 Pilaster Faces: 1.2 mm (18 gauge).

.3 Reinforcement: 2.5 mm (12 gauge). .2 Doors and Panels:

.1 Thickness: 25 mm.

.2 Door Width: 600 mm.

.3 Door Width for Handicapped Use: 915 mm, out-swinging.

.4 Height: Nominal 1,800 mm. .3 Pilasters: 32 mm thick, of sizes required to suit cubicle width and spacing. .4 Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Sheet steel face, pressure bonded to sound deadening core,

form and close edges, mitre and weld corners, grind smooth. .5 Internal Reinforcement: Provide in areas of attached hardware and fittings. Mark locations of

reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories.

2.5 FINISHES .1 Clean, degrease, and neutralize panels. .2 Follow immediately with a phosphatizing treatment, prime coat and two finish coats baked enamel. .3 Single Colour: Colour as later selected by Consultant from manufacturer's standard colour range. .4 Stainless Steel Surfaces: No. 4 finish. .5 Exposed Steel Surfaces: Chrome plated, Polished finish. .6 Aluminum: Anodized, clear. .7 Non-ferrous Surfaces: Polished chrome plated.


Page 3


218001

March 2018

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings and as instructed by the

manufacturer. .2 Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. .3 Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install partitions to manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level. .3 Maintain 10 to 13 mm space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. .4 Attached panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. .5 Attach panels and pilasters to brackets with tamper proof through bolts and nuts. Locate head rail

joints at pilaster centre lines. .6 Anchor urinal screen panels to walls with continuous fastening channel and vertical upright consisting

of pilaster anchored to floor and ceiling. .7 Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster.

Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes. .8 Equip each door with two (2) hinges, one (1) door latch. Out-swinging doors to be equipped with

barrier free accessible pull. .9 Install door strike and keeper with door bumper on each pilaster in alignment with door latch. .10 Field touch-up of scratches or damaged enamel finish will not be permitted. .11 Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Variation From True Position: 6 mm. .2 Maximum Variation From Plumb: 3 mm.

3.4 ADJUSTING .1 Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 5 mm. .2 Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out swinging

doors to closed position. .3 Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.

END OF SECTION

10 28 14 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

Page 1


218001

March 2018

Section 10 28 14 - Toilet and Bath Accessories

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Toilet, washroom accessories. .2 Grab bars. .3 Attachment hardware.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry: Installation. .2 Section 10 21 14 - Metal Toilet Compartments.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM A123/A123M-13 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products. .2 ASTM A167-99(2009) - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip. .3 ASTM A269-13 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for

General Service. .4 ASTM A1008/A1008M-13 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,

High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.

.5 ASTM B456-11e1 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium.

.6 CSA-B651-12 - Accessible Design for the Built Environment.

.7 NEMA LD3-2005 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates (HPDL).



.2 Coordinate the work with the placement of reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment

methods.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements including special procedures.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .1 Conform to CSA-B651 for accessibility requirements for the handicapped.


Page 2


218001

March 2018

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS .1 Toilet and bath accessories listed in Fixtures section are manufactured by Frost unless otherwise

noted. .2 Other acceptable manufacturers offering functionally and aesthetically equivalent products. The

supplier is solely responsible for ensuring that proposed equivalent accessories meet or exceed the requirements/specifications of the products listed. Lesser products will be rejected during construction and an equivalent or better product will be required at no additional cost to the Owner. .1 ASI - Watrous. .2 Bobrick. .3 Twin-Cee.

2.2 MATERIALS .1 Sheet Steel: ASTM A1008/A1008M. .2 Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304. .3 Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel. .4 Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof. .5 Expansion Shields: Fibre, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for

component and substrate.

2.3 FABRICATION .1 Weld and grind joints of fabricated components, smooth. .2 Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without

distortion. Maintain surfaces without scratches or dents. .3 Fabricate grab bars of tubing, free of visible joints, return to wall with end attachment flanges. Form

bar with [<Insert Option> mm ] clear of wall surface. Knurl grip surfaces. .4 Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. .5 Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.

2.4 FIXTURES .1 Fixtures listed below correspond to Frost model numbers, unless otherwise noted. Letters in

brackets correspond to the Washroom Accessory Schedule at the end of this Section, which indicate fixture quantities by room.

.2 Toilet Tissue Dispenser (TTD): supplied and installed by Owner's service provider.

.3 Paper Towel Dispenser (PTD): supplied and installed by Owner's service provider.

.4 Soap Dispenser: (SD) supplied and installed by Owner's service provider.

.5 Grab Bars: model code 1001 NP, 38 mm outside diameter x 1.6 mm wall tubing, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, wall flanges secured to wall mounting flanges with stainless steel set screws, concealed screw attachment, flanges welded to tubular bar, provided with steel back plates and all accessories. Knurl/peen bar at area of hand grips. Grab bar material and anchorage to withstand downward pull of 2.2 kN. Provide the following grab bars as indicated. .1 Type 1 (GB1): 610 mm long .2 Type 2 (GB2): 760 x 760 mm 'L' shaped.

.6 Fixed Mirrors: 941-TG Series, sizes as indicated in 3.4 Schedule, fixed 6mm tempered glass mirror, No. 4 finish, stainless steel frame.


Page 3


218001

March 2018

.7 Shelf: model code 950-24, heavy duty construction, 140mm deep 610mm long, fabricated from 14ga stainless steel, rounded corners and safety hemmed edges.

.8 Coat Hook: model code 1150, front mounted, surface mounted, security clothes hook, wall plate fabricated from 14ga stainless steel, 10mm diameter spring loaded stainless steel hook mounted with swivel trip ball.

2.5 KEYING .1 Supply 2 (two) keys for each accessory to Owner. .2 Master key all accessories.

2.6 FINISHES .1 Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M, appropriate grade for type and size of steel

material indicated. Galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices. .2 Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pre-treat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. .3 Enamel: Pre-treat to clean condition, apply one (1) coat primer and minimum two (2) coats

electrostatic baked enamel. .4 Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, Type SC 2, polished finish. .5 Stainless Steel: No. 4 Satin finish. .6 Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that field measurements are as indicated on product data. .2 Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the

manufacturer. .3 Verify exact location of accessories for installation.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. .2 Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION .1 Install accessories to manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. .3 Upon completion of installation, adjust all components for proper operation and straight alignment. .4 Instruct Owner's personnel in adjustment, operation and refilling procedures. .5 Remove all protective films and clean accessories, touch up all scratches and abrasions to be invisible.


Page 4


218001

March 2018

3.4 SCHEDULE .1 Boys Washrooms #1, #2 and #3 (quantities per washroom).

.1 1 - Fixed Mirror (914 x 914 mm). .2 Girls Washrooms #1, #2 and #3 (quantities per washroom).

.1 1 - Fixed Mirror (914 x 914 mm). .3 Mens Staff Washroom.

.1 1 - Fixed Mirror (914 x 914 mm).

.2 1 - Coat Hook (install on door of toilet stall)

.3 1 - Shelf .4 Womens Staff Washroom.

.1 1 - Fixed Mirror (914 x 914 mm).

.2 2 - Coat Hook (install on door of toilet stall).

.3 1 - Shelf

END OF SECTION

West Ferris Secondary School 15010 Domestic Water Piping and MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134


North Bay, Ontario March 2018

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL

1. This section covers items common to all sections of Division 15 and is supplementary to requirements of Division 1.

2. Division 1, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here.

3. Coordinate all requirements with General Contractor.

1.2. CODE OF STANDARDS

1. Do complete installation in compliance with latest editions and all amendments of the following Codes and Standards. Where conflicts in requirements occur, the higher standard shall apply:

1. ASHRAE

2. CSA

3. Ontario Building Code

4. All governing municipal requirements

5. ULC

1.3. DEFINITIONS

1. “Provide” means supply and install.

2. “Approved” means approved in writing by Consultant.

3. “Consultant” means designated qualified professional engineer acting as representative of Owner for monitoring of work.

4. “Manual” means Operations and Maintenance manual.

1.4. CARE, OPERATION, START-UP AND INSTRUCTION TO OWNERS

1. Provide certified personnel to instruct Owner of operation mechanical equipment. Provide maintenance specialist personnel to instruct on maintenance and adjustment of mechanical equipment and any changes or modification equipment must be under terms of guarantee.

2. Provide instruction during regular work hours prior to acceptance and turn over to Owner's staff for regular operation.




3. Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to put equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel are conversant with all aspects of its care and operation.

4. Use operation and maintenance data manual for instruction purposes. On completion of instruction, turn three manuals over to the Owner.

5. Operation and maintenance manual to be approved by and final copies deposited with Consultant before final inspection.

6. Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factory service engineer to supervise start-up of installation, check, adjust, balance and calibrate components and instruct operating personnel.

1.5. PERMITS, CERTIFICATES, FEES AND INSPECTIONS

1. Submit to the Building Department the necessary number of drawings and specifications for examination prior to commencement of work to obtain a building/plumbing permit.

2. Submit Notice of Project to Ministry of Labour.

3. Contractor shall be responsible to pay associated fees.

4. Notify Consultant of changes required by Building Department prior to making changes.

5. Notify Consultant upon completion of work.

1.6. EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS AND INSTALLATION

1. Permit equipment maintenance and disassembly by use of unions or flanges to minimize disturbance to connecting piping and duct systems and without interference from building structure or other equipment.

2. Provide accessible means for lubricating equipment including permanent lubricated "lifetime" bearings.

3. Pipe drain lines to drains.

4. Line-up equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items with building walls wherever possible.

5. Provide equipment commissioning and preliminary balancing and confirm the proper operation of all equipment and related systems.

1.7. RESPONSIBILITY FOR TRIAL USAGE

1. Obtain written permission to start and test permanent equipment and systems prior to acceptance by Consultant.




2. Consultant may use plumbing equipment and systems for testing.

3. Protect equipment and systems' openings from dirt, dust and other foreign materials during test usage.

1.8. ELECTRICAL

1. Division 15 shall supply and install motors, controls and control wiring, VFD, supply starters, switches and relays, for all motor driven equipment under Division 15. Starters, switches, VFD and relays shall be handed over to Division 16 for installation and wiring.

2. Electrical equipment not supplied by Division 15 is listed on the drawings or elsewhere in the Specification for quality of material and workmanship.

3. Safety disconnect switches shall be supplied for each rotating equipment unless within viewing distance for motor control but max 6 m (20') supplied by Division 15 and installed by Division 16.

4. Wiring and controls for connections below 50 V, which are related to control systems are the responsibility of Division 15. Refer to Division 16 for quality of materials and workmanship.

1. Control cables, type LVT, soft annealed copper conductors with thermoplastic insulation and colour coding. Installation in EMT conduit.

2. Two conductors parallel with an overall thermoplastic jacket; three or more conductors twisted with an overall thermoplastic jacket.

3. Cable to be installed in EMT conduit or to be plenum rated FT6 type.

1.9. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

1. See Section 15140 – Hangers and Supports for Piping.

1.10. DRAIN VALVES

1. Locate at low points and at section isolating valves unless otherwise specified.

2. Minimum NPS 3/4 unless otherwise specified: bronze, with hose end male thread and complete with cap and chain.

1.11. SLEEVES

1. Provide pipe sleeves at points where pipes pass through masonry or concrete.

2. Provide sleeves of minimum 1.0 mm (20 GA) galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints or use PVC pipe in non rated walls.

3. Use cast iron or steel pipe sleeves with annular fin continuously welded at mid-point.




1. Through foundation walls.

2. Where sleeve penetrates fire rated wall or floor ceiling assembly.

4. Sizes:

1. Provide 5 mm (1/4") clearance all around, between sleeves and pipes or between sleeve and insulation.

2. Where piping passes below footings, provide min clearance of 50 mm (2") between sleeve and pipe. Fill void with elastic, water proof material. Backfill up to underside of footing with concrete of same strength as footing.

5. Fill voids around pipes. Remove plastic sleeves.

1. Caulk between sleeve & pipe in foundation walls and below grade floors with oakum that lead between sleeve and pipe.

2. Where sleeves pass through walls or floors, caulk space between insulation and sleeve or between pipe and sleeve with waterproof fire retardant non-hardening mastic.

3. Ensure no contact between copper tube or pipe and ferrous sleeve.

4. Coat exposed exterior surfaces of ferrous sleeves with heavy application of zinc rich paint.

6. Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, floors and partitions, maintain fire rating integrity assembly in compliance with OBC. Submit shop drawings and details on all products.

7. Temporarily plug all openings during construction.

1.12. ESCUTCHEONS AND PLATES

1. Provide on pipes passing through finished walls, partitions, floors and ceilings.

2. Use split type chrome plated brass, with set screws for ceiling or wall mounting.

3. Inside diameter shall fit around finished pipe. Outside diameter shall cover opening or sleeve.

4. Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheons or plates shall clear sleeve extension.

5. Secure to pipe or finished surface but not insulation.

1.13. TESTS

1. Provide the following supplementary requirements to tests specified:




1. Give 48 h notice of date when tests will be made.

2. Do not insulate or conceal work until tested and approved.

3. Conduct tests in presence of Consultant.

4. Bear costs including retesting and make good.

5. Pipe pressure:

1. Hydraulically test water supply systems at 1-1/2 times system operating pressure or minimum 1050 kPa (150 psig).

2. Maintain test pressures without loss of 4 h unless otherwise specified.

1.14. PAINTING

1. Apply at least one coat of corrosion resistant primer paint to supports, and equipment fabricated from ferrous metals.

2. Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged too extensively to be merely primed and touched up.

1.15. SPECIAL TOOLS

1. Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by manufacturers.

1.16. DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS

1. Provide wherever pipes of dissimilar metals are joined.

2. Provide felt or rubber gaskets to prevent dissimilar metal contact.

1.17. CUTTING AND PATCHING

1. All cutting and patching shall be by Division 15 and coordinated by Division 15. Coordinate with other trades. Notify Structural Engineer before cutting any structural members and obtain written permission.

1.18. EXISTING SYSTEMS

1. Before submitting tender price verify on job site location of all accessible existing systems affecting execution of this contract. Difficulties arising during construction will not be considered as grounds for additional payment.

2. Where work involves breaking into or connecting to existing systems, carry out work at times




directed by governing authorities, with minimum of disturbance to pedestrian traffic.



1.19. INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNERS

1. Provide certified personnel to instruct Owner of operation mechanical equipment. Provide maintenance specialist personnel to instruct on maintenance and adjustment of mechanical equipment and any changes or modification equipment must be under terms of guarantee.

2. Training plans to be submitted prior to the execution of the training. At a minimum, training plans to include the list of systems and equipment which are to be trained on. Instructor’s name and qualifications and allotted time for training. Training plans to be reviewed and approved by Owner and Consultant prior to commencement of training.




1.20. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1. Provide one (1) paper copy and one “PDF” format on USB stick of Mechanical Operation and Maintenance Manuals complete with As-built Drawings, in accordance to the following and Section 01 78 00 “Closeout Submittals”.

2. Mechanical Operation and Maintenance Manuals to be delivered to the Engineer’s office 60-days prior to the completion of the Contract.

3. Manuals to be bound in hard cover neatly labeled: “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS”.

4. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be divided into sections with neatly labeled and tabbed dividers between each section. The sections to be included in the manual are:

1. Section I – General

2. Section II – Piping and Plumbing Systems

5. The following information shall be contained within the sections:

1. SECTION I: A list giving name, address and telephone number of the Consultant,




Engineers, Construction Manager, Mechanical Trade and Controls Trade. Written guarantees for the Mechanical Systems. A copy of the Valve directory giving number, valve location, normal valve position, and purpose of valve. A framed copy of valve directory to be hung in Mechanical Room. Equipment lists and certificates shall be provided. Certificates shall be signed and sealed by the appropriate suppliers. All major equipment including but not limited to boilers, cooling towers, chillers, air handling units, isolators, silencers, pumps and humidifiers are to be inspected by the manufacturer to ensure the equipment has been installed in accordance with their recommendations.

2. SECTION II and III: A copy of all pressure tests and operational tests for plumbing system. A list giving name, address and telephone number of all suppliers. A copy of all approved Shop Drawings. Copies of warranties.

6. MAINTENANCE MATRIX

1. A maintenance matrix is to be provided in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. The matrix shall indicate each piece of equipment and the required maintenance tasks and the frequency at which they are to be carried out.

1.21. OWNER OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE

1. The existing building may remain occupied during construction - summer time.

2. Provide temporary protection for all finishes, appliances or equipment in the existing building.

3. Protect and maintain electrical room operations during the work.

1.22. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

1. Site records:

1. One set to be kept on site and all changes to be recorded on daily basis. At the completion of the project, all changes shall be transferred to clean set, signed and passed to the Consultant. Provide “PDF” format of As-Built Drawings on USB stick with Maintenance Manuals at completion of project.

2. Make these drawings available for reference purposes and to inspection at all times.

2. Submit 2 copies of as-built marked up prints with final TAB report.

3. As-built drawings must be delivered before system acceptance.

1.23. SPARE PARTS

1. Three (3) sets of each type and size of valve (up to 2”) and one set of valves above 2” in size.

2. Leave on site and coordinate with the Owner.




1.24. TRAINING

1. Provide minimum of four 6 hour training sessions on systems.

1.25. SCOPE OF WORK

1. Domestic Water Piping Upgrades - Corridor Areas (Level 100)

1. Remove T-bar ceiling tiles and grid as required complete with lighting fixtures, fire alarm devices, exit lighting, lighting control, P.A. speakers, security devices and reinstall all after work completion and ceiling restoration. Provide fire alarm, lighting control, P.A. and security testing and verification reports.

2. Remove all domestic water piping from corridor areas/some spaces - complete with insulation, clevis hangers, etc.

3. Replace all piping and shut-off valves as identified on the drawings.

4. Remove all asbestos from domestic water piping insulation / elbows as per asbestos consultant’s report.

5. Install new domestic water piping complete with clevis hangers, shut-off valve, new piping insulation.

6. Upgrade existing incoming water plumbing assemblies as per drawing.

7. Perform any other mechanical work as required by this contract.

2. Washroom Upgrades - Level 100 and 200

1. Remove all old plumbing fixtures, cap and make safe all services.

2. Remove water piping, venting from renovated areas.

3. Install new plumbing fixtures, new drainage (urinal system), water piping, new venting (majority in piping chases).

4. Upgrade exhaust air diffusers with new product - washrooms.

5. Modify exhaust air ductwork to suite new ceiling layouts.

6. Provide new heating convector, reroute heating piping (one washroom) to suit.

7. Perform any other mechanical work required by this contract.


West Ferris Secondary School 15130 Domestic Water Piping and THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL



1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

2. Indicate on manufacturer's catalogue literature the following:

1. Thermometers.

2. Pressure gauges.

3. Stop cocks.

4. Wells.

1.3. MAINTENANCE DATA

1. Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. GENERAL

1. Thermometers and pressure gauges to operate at mid point of scale or range.

2.2. DIRECT READING THERMOMETERS

1. Industrial, variable angle type, liquid in glass, cast aluminum case, lens front, 225 mm (9”) scale length, dual °F and °C range. Stem lengths to be 50% of pipe i.d. Thermometers to meet: CAN/CGSB 14.4, ASME B40.4.

2.3. REMOTE READING THERMOMETERS

1. 100 mm diameter activated dial type, accuracy within one scale division, brass movement, stainless steel capillary, stainless steel spiral armour, stainless steel bulb and polished brass or stainless steel case for wall mounting. Capillary to have an extra length of at least 5 ft. Thermometers to meet: CAN/CGSB 14.4, ASME B40.




2.4. THERMOMETER WELLS

1. Copper pipe: copper or bronze.

2. Steel pipe: brass or stainless steel.

3. Provide extension necks where insulation is present.

4. Acceptable Product: WIKA TI.901; Winters TIM.

2.5. PRESSURE GAUGES

1. 112 mm, dial type, grade A, 1% accuracy full scale unless otherwise specified. Wetted parts to be of phosphor bronze bourdon tube. Dual scale PSI/Kpa.

2. Acceptable Material: WIKA 213.53.

3. Provide liquid fill on all pump systems, supply and return hot water headers, heat exchangers.

4. Provide siphons for steam service

5. Provide bronze stop cocks for isolation

6. Provide diaphragm seals for corrosive services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. GENERAL

1. Install so they can be easily read from floor or platform. If this cannot be accomplished, install remote reading units.

2. Install engraved lamicoid nameplates as specified in Section 15190 - Identification, identifying medium.

3. Install between equipment and first fitting or valve.

3.2. THERMOMETERS

1. Install in wells on all piping. Provide heat conductive material for inside of well.

2. Install in locations as indicated and on:

1. On each return and supply.

2. In other locations as indicated.




3. Use extensions where thermometers are installed through insulation.

4. Provide well in supply water system from controller temperature sensors.

3.3. PRESSURE GAUGES

1. Install in following locations:

1. In other locations as indicated.

2. Use extensions where pressure gauges are installed through insulation.


West Ferris Secondary School 15140 Domestic Water Piping and PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. ASME B31.1-2012, (SI), Power Piping, (SI Edition).

2. MSS-SP-58-2009, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.



2. Indicate on manufacturer's catalogue literature the following:

1. Upper attachment.

2. Middle attachment.

3. Pipe attachment.

4. Riser clamps.

5. Shields and saddles.

6. Sway braces.


1. Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 - Submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. GENERAL

1. Fabricate hangers, supports and sway braces in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and MSS-SP-58.




2. Support from structural members. Where structural bearing does not exist or inserts are not in suitable locations, provide supplementary structural steel members.

2.2. UPPER ATTACHMENTS

1. Concrete:

1. Anchors for existing concrete roof structure, heavy duty anchors Hilti HSL.

2. Steel beam (bottom flange):

1. Cold piping NPS 2 and under: malleable iron C clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 19. ULC listed.

2. Cold piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger and all hot piping: malleable iron beam clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 28 or 29. ULC listed.

3. Steel beam (top):

1. Cold piping NPS 2 and under: malleable iron "top of beam" C clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 19. ULC listed.

2. Cold piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger and all hot piping: steel jaw, hook rod with nut, spring washer and plain washer, to MSS-SP-58, type 25. ULC listed.

4. Steel joist:

1. Cold piping NPS 2 and under: steel washer plate with double locking nuts.

2. Cold piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger and all hot piping: steel washer plates with double locking nut, carbon steel clevis and malleable iron socket.

5. Steel channel or angle (bottom):

1. Cold piping NPS 2 and under; malleable iron C clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 23. ULC listed.

2. Cold piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger and all hot piping; universal channel clamp. ULC listed.

2.3. MIDDLE ATTACHMENT (ROD)

1. Carbon steel threaded rod black finish.

2.4. PIPE ATTACHMENT

1. Cold piping, steel or cast iron: hot piping steel, with less than 25 mm, 1" horizontal movement; hot piping, steel, with more than 300 mm, 12" middle attachment rod length:




adjustable clevis to MSS-SP-58, type 1. ULC listed.

2. Cold copper piping; hot copper piping with less than 25 mm, 1" horizontal movement; hot copper piping with more than 300 mm, 12" middle attachment rod length: adjustable clevis to MSS-SP-58, type 1. Copper plated.

3. Suspended hot piping, steel and copper, with horizontal movement in excess of 25 mm, 1"; hot steel piping with middle attachment rod 300 mm, 12" or less; pipe roller to MSS-SP-58, type 43.

4. Bottom supported hot piping, steel and copper: pipe roller stand to MSS-SP-58, type 45.

2.5. RISER CLAMPS

1. Steel or cast iron pipe: black carbon steel to MSS-SP-58, type 42. ULC listed.

2. Copper pipe: carbon steel copper finished to MSS-SP-58, type 42.

2.6. SADDLES AND SHIELDS

1. Cold piping NPS 1-1/4 and over: protection shield with high density insulation under shield with uninterrupted vapour barrier.

2. Hot piping NPS 1-1/4 and over: protective saddle with insulation under saddle.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. HANGER SPACING

1. Spacing and middle attachment rod diameter as specified in paragraphs below or as in table below, whichever is more stringent.

1. Plumbing piping: most stringent requirements of Ontario Building Code, or authority having jurisdiction.

2. Fire protection: to applicable fire code.

3. Gas piping: up to NPS 1/2: every 6', 1.8 m

4. Copper piping: up to NPS 1/2: every 5' 1.5 m

5. Flexible joint roll groove pipe: in accordance with table below, but not less than one hanger at joints.

6. Within 12" of each horizontal elbow.

Pipe Rod Maximum Spacing




Size Diameter Steel Cooper (Nominal) NPS 1/2 10 mm 3/8" 1.8m 6' 5' 1.5m NPS 3/4, 1 10 mm 3/8" 2.1m 7' 6' 1.8m NPS 1-1/4 10 mm 3/8" 2.1m 7' 8' 2.4m NPS 1-1/2 10 mm 3/8" 2.7m 9' 8' 2.4m NPS 2 10 mm 3/8" 3.0m 10' 9' 2.7m NPS 2-1/2 10 mm 3/8" 3.0m 10' 10' 3.0m NPS 3 to 4 10 mm 3/8" 4.6m 15' 12' 3.6m

NPS 6 19 mm 3/4" 5.1 m 17' --

3.2. HANGER INSTALLATION

1. Offset hanger so that rod is vertical in operating position.

2. Adjust hangers to equalize load.


West Ferris Secondary School 15190 Domestic Water Piping and IDENTIFICATION Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. CGSB 1-GP-60M, Enamel, Interior, Gloss, Alkyd Type.

2. CGSB 24-GP-3a Identification and Classification of Piping Systems.

1.3. SAMPLES

1. Submit samples in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

2. Submit samples and lists of proposed wording for approval before engraving.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. MANUFACTURERS NAMEPLATES

1. Provide metal nameplate on each piece of equipment, mechanically fastened complete with raised or recessed letters.

2. Indicate size, equipment model, manufacturer's name, serial number, voltage, cycle, phase and power of motors.

2.2. SYSTEM NAMEPLATES

1. Colour:

1. Hazardous: red letters, white background.

2. Elsewhere: black letters, white background (except where required otherwise by applicable codes).

2. Construction:

1. 3 mm thick, laminated plastic or white anodized aluminum, matte finish, square corners, letters accurately aligned and machine engraved into core.

3. Sizes:




1. Conform to following table:

Size Dimensions No. of Letter # (mm) (in) Lines Height (mm) (in) 1 10 x 50 3/8 x 2 1 3 1/8 2 13 x 75 1/2 x 3 1 5 1/4 3 13 x 75 1/2 x 3 2 3 1/8 4 20 x 100 3/4 x 4 1 8 3/8 5 20 x 200 3/4 x 8 1 8 3/8 6 20 x 100 3/4 x 4 2 5 1/4 7 25 x 125 1 x 5 1 12 1/2 8 25 x 125 1 x 5 2 8 3/8 9 35 x 200 1-1/4 x 8 1 20 3/4

2. Use average of 25 letters/numbers (maximum) per nameplate.

3. Use size #6 for terminal cabinets and control panels.

4. Use size #9 for equipment in mechanical rooms.

5. Facilities Inspection Program (FIP) identification:

1. General: use system of Main Identifier, Source Identifier, Destination Identifier.

2. Equipment and Mechanical Rooms: Main Identifier: size #9; Source and Destination Identifiers: size #5.

3. Elsewhere: Sizes as appropriate.

2.3. PIPING

1. General

1. To CGSB 24-GP-3a.

2. Identify medium by lettered legend, classification by primary and secondary colours, direction of flow by arrows.

2. Sizes:

1. Legend: block capitals to following table:

Outside Dia. of Size of Pipe or Insulation Letters mm in mm in 30 1-1/4 13 1/2 50 2 19 3/4 150 6 32 1-1/4 250 7 63 2-1/2 Over 250 8 88 3




2. Primary colour bands:

1. At valves and fittings: 460 mm, 18" long.

2. Elsewhere: 1.8 m, 42" long.

3. Secondary colour bands: 50 mm, 2" wide, 75 mm, 3" in from one end of primary colour band.

3. Arrows:

1. Outside diameter of pipe/insulation 75 mm and greater: 150 mm, 6" long x 50 mm, 2" high.

2. Outside diameter of pipe/insulation less than 75 mm, 3": 100 mm, 4" long x 50 mm, 2" high.

3. Use double headed arrows where flow is reversible.

3. Material:

1. Paint: to CGSB 1-GP-60M.

2. Legend markers, arrow colour bands: plastic coated cloth material with protective overcoating and waterproof contact adhesive undercoating, suitable for 100% RH and continuous operating temperature of 150°C (300°F). Apply to prepared surfaces. Wrap tape around pipe or pipe covering with ends overlapping one (1) pipe diameter.

3. Waterproof and heat resistant plastic marker tags: for pipes and tubing 3/4" nominal and smaller.

4. Acceptable material: Brady

4. Colours:

1. Where not covered by table below, submit legend, primary and secondary classification colours to Consultant for approval.

5. Table:

1. Pipe and valve identification.

Pipe Marker Valve Tag Primary Secondary Legend Legend Colour Colour Cold Water C.W. Green None Hot Water H.W. Green None Recirc. Hot Water R.H.W. Green None

2. Legend and arrows:




1. Black or white to contrast with primary colour.

2. Fire protection: white on red background.

3. Low voltage control wiring installed by Division 15.

2.4. VALVES AND CONTROLLERS

1. Brass tags with 1/2" stamped code lettering and numbers filled with black paint.

2. Furnish Consultant with six identification flow diagrams of approved size for each system. Include valve tag schedule, designating number, service, function and location of each tagged item and normal operating position of valves.

2.5. CONTROLS IDENTIFICATION

1. Identify all systems, equipment, components, controls and sensors.

2. Inscription to identify function and fail-safe position.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. GENERAL

1. Do identification work in accordance with CGSB 24-GP-3a except where specified otherwise.

2. Provide ULC and/or CSA registration plates, as required by respective agency.

3. Identify systems and equipment to conform to PWC, FIP.

3.2. LOCATION OF NAMEPLATES

1. In conspicuous location to facilitate easy reading from operating floor and to properly identify equipment and/or system.

2. Provide stand-offs for nameplates on hot surfaces and insulated surfaces.

3. Do not insulate or paint over plates.

3.3. PIPING

1. Locations:

1. On long straight runs in open areas in boiler rooms, mechanical room, and tunnel so that at least one is clearly visible from any one viewpoint in operating areas or walking aisles and not at more than 15 m, 50' intervals.




2. Adjacent to all changes in direction.

3. At least once in each small room through which piping passes.

4. On both sides of visual obstruction or where run is difficult to follow.

5. On both sides of any separation such as walls, floors and partitions.

6. Where piping is concealed in pipe chase, ceiling space, or other confined space, at entry and leaving points and adjacent to each access opening.

7. At beginning and end points of each run and at each piece of equipment in run.

8. At point immediately upstream of major manually operated or automatically controlled valves. Where this is not possible, place identification as close to valve as possible, preferably on upstream side.

9. Legend to be easily and accurately readable from usual operating areas and all readily accessible points.

10. Plane of legend to be approximately at right angles to most convenient line of sight with consideration of operating positions, lighting conditions, reduced visibility of colour or legends caused by dust and dirt and risk of physical damage.

3.4. VALVES AND CONTROLLERS

1. Secure tags with non-ferrous chains or closed "S" hooks for valves and operating controllers except at plumbing fixtures and radiation.

2. Install one copy of flow diagram and valve schedule mounted in frame with non-glare glass where directed by Consultant. Provide one copy in each operating and maintenance instruction manual.

3. Consecutively number valves system.


West Ferris Secondary School 15260 Domestic Water Piping and THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPNG Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. Do thermal insulation in accordance with ACNBC, ASTM E96-66(1972) and ASTM C411-61 (1975).

2. Fire hazard rating:

1. Meet NFPA 90A-2002, NFPA 225-1984 and CAN4-S102-M83 for all components of insulation system.

1.3. DEFINITIONS

1. “CONCEALED” - insulated mechanical services in chases, furred spaces, pipe shafts or hung ceilings.

2. “EXPOSED” - will mean “not concealed” as defined herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. FORMED FIBROUS GLASS TO 200°C

1. Application: insulation system for piping, valves, fittings, etc. maximum temperature 200°C. On domestic hot water and recirculating piping and fittings.

2. Materials:

1. CGSB 51-GP-9M, rigid mineral fibre sleeving for piping, including foilcraft laminate packet with open mesh fibre scrim reinforcing.

2. Acceptable materials: Knauff; Fibreglass Rigid-Wrap pipe insulation.

3. Thickness:

1. Domestic hot water and recirculating lines – located in conditioned spaces:

Line Size Nominal Thickness Nominal Up to NPS 1 1/4" 25 mm (1")

NPS 1 1/2" and larger 40 mm (1 1/2") Run-outs to fixtures

For max. of 2.4 m (8') 25 mm (1")




2.2. FORMED FIBROUS GLASS WITH V.B. -14 TO 37°C

1. Application: insulation system for piping, valves, heat exchangers, headers, fittings, etc., for temperature range - 14 to 37°C. On domestic cold water, rain water leaders, above grade storm and condensate lines.

Media Temperature 41 to 56°F / 5 to 13°C Line Size Nominal Thickness Nominal Up to NPS 1 1/4” 13 mm (1/2") NPS 1 1/2 and over 25 mm (1")

2. Materials:

1. CGSB 51-GP-9M, rigid mineral fibre sleeving for piping, and CGBS 51-GP-52M vapour barrier jacket. Complete with factory applied foil laminate, reinforced with open mesh fibre scrim.

2.3. FASTENINGS

1. Self-adhesive tape and 100% coverage lagging adhesives.

1. Self-adhesive tape rated under 25 for flame spread and under 50 for smoke development.

2. For vapour barrier:

1. Quick-setting adhesive for joints and lamps sealing of vapour barriers. Flame spread 10 smoke development 0.

2.4. JACKETS

1. Fire retardant PVC jackets.

1. Apply in exposed areas (mechanical, boiler, storage rooms, corridors and other areas with exposed ceiling): compact, firm ULC listed, fire rated.

2. On concealed valves and fittings use ULC listed, fire rated, plain weave cotton fabric at 120 g/m

2 (0.38 oz/Sq. Ft.)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. APPLICATION

1. Apply insulation after required tests have been completed and approved by Consultant. Insulation and surfaces shall be clean and dry when installed and during application of any finish. Apply insulation materials, accessories and finishes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as specified herein.

2. On piping with insulation and vapour barrier, install high density calcium silicate black under




hanger shield and metal saddle. Maintain integrity of vapour barrier over full length of pipe without interruption at sleeves, fittings and supports.

3.2. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 90A and ANSI/NFPA 90B.

2. Perform insulation work using qualified insulation applicators, in accordance with latest trade application methods and to the Consultant’s approval.

3. Work to begin only when building is enclosed preventing insulation from getting wet due to elements such as rain, snow, construction, etc. All damaged or wet insulation to be replaced.

4. All piping (Section 15260) insulation to be continuous except at fire barriers.

5. Preformed: sectional up to NPS 12, sectional or curved segmented above NPS 12.

6. Multi-layered: staggered butt joint construction.

7. Vertical pipe over NPS 3: insulation supports welded or bolted to pipe directly above lowest pipe fitting. Thereafter, locate on 3 m, 15' centres.

8. Expansion joints in insulation: terminate single layer and each layer of multiple layers in straight cut at intervals recommended by manufacturer. Leave void of 25 mm, 1" between terminations. Pack void lightly with flexible mineral insulation.

9. Seal and finish exposed ends and other terminations with insulating cement.

10. Expansion joints in piping: provide for adequate movement of expansion joint without damage to insulation or finishes.

11. Orifice plate mounting flanges, flanges and unions at equipment, expansion joints, valves, other components requiring regular maintenance.

12. Insulation is not required for:

1. Chrome plated piping, valves and fittings.

3.3. FASTENINGS

1. Secure pipe insulation by tape at each end and centre of each section, but not greater than 1 m (36") on centres.


West Ferris Secondary School 15412 Domestic Water Piping and DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY PIPING: COPPER Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


2. All brass, bronze fittings and valves shall be “Lead Free Design”.


1. Do the work in accordance with Ontario Building Code and local authority having jurisdiction except where specified otherwise.

1.3. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

2. Indicate the following: valves.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. PIPING

1. Domestic hot, cold and recirculating tubing, within building.

1. Above ground: copper tube, hard drawn, type L: to ASTM B88M-05 (2011).

2. Buried: soft copper tube, type K soft, with silfoss soldered joints: to ASTM B88M-05 (2011).

2.2. FITTINGS

1. Brass or bronze flanges and flanged fittings: to ASME B16.24-2011.

2. Brass or bronze threaded fittings: to ASME B16.15-2011.

3. Cast bronze to ASME B16.18-2012 or wrought copper and bronze to ASME B16.22-2013.

2.3. JOINTS

1. Solder, tin antimony, 95:5 to ASTM B32-08 or approved type lead free up to 2” dia., or Viega Propress for copper.




2. Grooved ends on piping larger than 2 1/2” dia. and up or Viega ProPress for copper sizes 2 1/2” to 4” dia.

2.4. VALVES

1. For Sizes 50mm (2”) and under 1034KPA (150psig) 600 WOG,

1. Brass Body to ASM C49300 (Lead Free Brass) Full Port, PTFE Seats, Double ”O” Ring or Teflon packing. TEA Plated Forged Brass C49300 Vented Solid Ball, Blowout Proof Stem, Lever handle.

2. Standard of Acceptance:

1. Kitz 859 (Solder) Kitz 858 ( NPT) or approved Equal

2. NPS 2 1/2 and over, grooved ends:

1. Epoxy Coated Cast Iron Body Grooved ends, Teflon Fused Solid Ball, Full Port Rated 200 WOG @200F Class VI shutoff, 100% Lead Free,Ansi,NSF61-8

2. Acceptable material: American 3700V or Approved Equal

1. Option American 3700 Flanged end connection 2” to 8” or Approved Equal

2.5. SWING CHECK VALVES

1. Check Valves- Back Flow Prevention

1. For sizes 50mm (2”) and under, 860kPa (125psig) 200WOG. Bronze body to ASTM C89530 (Lead Free Bronze) Screwed Cap C49300 (Lead Free Brass) Integral Seat, PTFE Disc.

1. Swing “ Y” Pattern

2. Screwed Ends Kitz 822T

3. Soldered Ends Kitz 823T

2.6. BALL VALVES

1. NPS 2 and under:

1. Bronze body, screwed ends, TFE seal, bronze hard chrome plated ball, 4 MPa WOG.

2. Acceptable Material: Watts 6000, Red-White 5044A, NIBCO TFP600; Kitz 58.

PART 3 - EXECUTION




3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Connect to fixtures and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install tubing close to building structure to minimize furring, conserve head room and space. Group exposed piping and run parallel to walls.

3. Cut square, ream and clean tubing and tube ends, clean recesses of fittings and assemble without binding.

4. Isolate equipment, fixtures and branches with gate valves.

5. Provide necessary chemicals and equipment and disinfect system to requirements of authority having jurisdiction.

6. Coordinate with the Building Inspector to witness tests and inspect work.

7. Provide ball valves at each plumbing lines take-off and each plumbing fixtures and on isolation.


West Ferris Secondary School 15413 Domestic Water Piping and DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING: Washroom Upgrades CAST IRON AND COPPER Project Number: 6134 Page 1



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

1. Above ground sanitary and vent Type DWV to: ASTM B306-13 up to 2 1/2".

1. Fittings.

1. Cast brass: to CSA B158.1-1976.

2. Wrought copper: to ANSI B16.29-2012.

2. Solder: tin-lead, 50:50, to ASTM B32-08, type 50A.

2.2. CAST IRON PIPING AND FITTINGS

1. Above ground sanitary storm and vent: to CAN3-B70-M86 3" and larger.

1. Joints.

1. Mechanical joints.

1. Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets with stainless steel clamps.

2. Cast iron couplings.

1. Complete with neoprene gaskets and stainless steel bolts and nuts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

West Ferris Secondary School 15413 Domestic Water Piping and DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING: Washroom Upgrades CAST IRON AND COPPER Project Number: 6134 Page 2



1. Install piping parallel and close to walls and ceilings to conserve headroom and space, and to grade indicated.



West Ferris Secondary School 15414 Domestic Water Piping and DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING: PLASTIC Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. PIPING AND FITTINGS

1. For buried sanitary storm and vent piping up to NPS3 to:

1. CAN3-B181.2-M87 for PVC DWV with solvent weld joints.

2. For buried sanitary and storm piping NPS 4 and larger to:

1. CAN/CSA-B182.1 and B182.2, BNQ 3624-130DR35. With Ring-Tite joints or glue type joints - IPEX - System 15.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install buried pipe on 6" bed of washed clean sand, shaped to accommodate fittings, to line and grade as indicated. Backfill with washed clean sand.

2. Please pipe referenced in this section for below grade only. For above grade refer to Section 15413.

3. Provide ULC or Warnock Hersey listed and labelled fire seals at penetration of fire rated walls, ceilings, etc.

4. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and building code.



West Ferris Secondary School 15430 Domestic Water Piping and PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL




1.3. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

1.4. PRODUCT DATA


2. Indicate dimensions, construction details and materials for the following: floor drains, backflow preventers, hose bibbs, strainers, traps, trap seal primer.

3. All plumbing specialties to be “lead-free” design.



2. Data to include:

1. Description of plumbing specialties and accessories, giving manufacturers name, type, model, year and capacity.

2. Details of operation, servicing and maintenance.

3. Recommended spare parts list.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. BACK FLOW PREVENTERS

1. Reduced pressure principle type: to CSA B64.10-11.




2. Double check valve assembly: to CAN3-B64.6/B64.7.

3. Back flow preventer with intermediate atmospheric vent: to CSA B64 Series-2011.

2.2. VACUUM BREAKERS

1. Atmospheric vacuum breaker: to CSA B64 Series-2011.

2. Hose connection vacuum breaker: to CSA B64 Series-2011.

2.3. STRAINERS

1. 100 psi, Y type with 20 mesh, monel, bronze or stainless steel removable screen.

2. NPS 2 and under, bronze body, screwed ends, with brass cap.

1. Acceptable material: Watts 7775

3. NPS 2 1/2 and over, cast iron body, flanged ends, with bolted cap.

1. Acceptable material: Watts, Zurn

2.4. TRAP SEAL PRIMERS

1. All brass, with integral vacuum breaker, NPS 1/2 solder ends, NPS 1/2 drip line connection.

2. Acceptable material: Watts, Zurn, Enpoco (lead-free design).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified.


3.2. BACK FLOW PREVENTORS

1. Install and test in accordance with CSA B64.10-01, where indicated and elsewhere as required by code. Submit Certification.

2. Pipe discharge to over nearest drain or service sink.

3.3. STRAINERS




1. Allow sufficient room to remove basket.

3.4. TRAP SEAL PRIMERS

1. Install on cold water supply to nearest plumbing fixture, in concealed space.

2. Install soft copper tubing to floor drain.

3.5. COMMISSIONING

1. After start-up, test and adjust to suit site conditions.


West Ferris Secondary School 15440 Domestic Water Piping and PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. RELATED WORK

1. See Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties and Accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM

1. Plumbing fixtures shall be product of one manufacturer, and of same colour in any one washroom or location, unless listed otherwise.

2. Materials:

1. Vitreous china to CSA B45.1-02.

2. Stainless steel fixtures to CSA B45.04-02 Class II, type 302 unless otherwise stated.

3. Plumbing fittings to CSA B125-01.

4. Exposed plumbing brass and metal work shall be heavy triple chromium plated.

5. Faucets for counter sinks, lavatory, bubblers to be “lead-free” design.

6. Acceptable manufacturers of same quality, appearance and colour as selected fixtures:

7. Crane, Kohler, Fiat, Kindred Industries, Bradley, Symmons, American Standard, AMI, Acudor-Acorn, Zurn, Chicago Faucets.

2.2. WATER CLOSETS

1. WC#1: Flush valve, floor mounted.

1. Bowl: vitreous china, water closet with elongated rim, siphon jet, whirlpool flush action, 4.8 LPF flush. Crane ULF Commercial 3-310.

2. Seat: white molded plastic, open front less cover, complete with s.s. hinges, plate and solid brass insert post. Olsonite 46.

3. Flush Valve:

1. Exposed, quiet diaphragm-type, chrome plated, low flush 4.8 LPF Zurn Z6000AV-1.




2. WC #2: Flush tank, floor mounted.

1. Bowl: vitreous china, water closet bowl with elongated rim complete with lined tank, 4.8 litre ultra low flush toilet. Crane Radcliffe 3-405.

2. Seat: white molded plastic, open front with cover, complete with s.s. hinges, plate and solid brass insert post. Olsonite 46.

2.3. URINALS

1. U#1: vitreous china, washout wall urinal with extended shield, complete with integral trap top spud and steel hangers, 0.5 Gal. per flush. Crane Embassy 7397.

.1 Valve: automatic sensor operated. Exposed, quiet diaphragm-type, chrome plated,

flushometer with a polished exterior, chloramine resistant, dual seal diaphragm with a clog resistant, triple filtered by-pass, manual push-button override, high back pressure vacuum breaker, one piece hex coupling nut, adjustable tailpiece, spud coupling and flange for top spud connection. Courtesy flush button. Control stop has internal siphon-guard protection, vandal resistant stop cap, sweat solder kit, and a cast wall flange with set screw. Internal seals are made of chloramine resistant materials. Valve – 6V DC motor actuator complete with power converter.

Zurn ZEMS 6000AV-15-WS1.

2.4. WASH FOUNTAIN

1. WF#1: Acorn 3 Station ‘TRI-LAV WASHFOUNTAIN’ #3603-2-H-MXT, hand pushbuttons Operated Unit, 26" x 36" x 34" (660mm x 914mm x 863mm), floor mounted, factory pre-assembled with individual sectional control. Bowl, pedestal, and spray head to be of ‘Precast Terrazzo’ (colour - Palomino Tan) Pedestal to have front panel of 16 (1.5mm) heavy gauge stainless steel access plate, all exposed fasteners for access plate to be vandal-resistant. Spray nozzles to be vandal-resistant with 1.9 LPM (0.5 GPM) flow controls, hand pushbuttons operation. Fixtures with splashback anchored to wall and housing framework anchored to floor. Thermostatic Balancing Mixing Valve and strainers in 1/2" (12.7mm) H & CW supplies and field set water temperature at 105 deg. F (41 deg.C). Provide Supplies with angle stops. Provide Cast Brass ‘p’ Trap, 1-1/2" (38mm). Supplies and drain from wall (on floor).

2. WF#2: Acorn 4 Station ‘QUAD-LAV WASHFOUNTAIN’ #3604-2-H-MXT, hand pushbuttons Operated Unit, 26" x 36" x 34" (660mm x 914mm x 863mm), floor mounted, factory pre-assembled with individual sectional control. Bowl, pedestal, and spray head to be of ‘Precast Terrazzo’ (colour - Palomino Tan) Pedestal to have front panel of 16 (1.5mm) heavy gauge stainless steel access plate, all exposed fasteners for access plate to be vandal-resistant. Spray nozzles to be vandal-resistant with 1.9 LPM (0.5 GPM) flow controls, push buttons operation. Fixtures with splashback anchored to wall and housing framework anchored to floor. Thermostatic Balancing Mixing Valve and strainers in 1/2" (12.7mm) H & CW supplies and field set water temperature at 105 deg. F (41 deg.C). Provide Supplies with angle stops. Provide Cast Brass ‘p’ Trap, 1-1/2" (38mm). Supplies and drain from wall (on floor).




3. WF #3: Acorn Curved Front Dual Station, #3772-2-H-MXT, hand pushbuttons Operated Unit, 50” W x 21 1/2” D x 34" H (1270mm x 546mm x 863mm), floor mounted, factory assembled, ADA compliant bowls design to OBC, with individual bowl control. Basins, countertop, backsplash and spray heads to be constructed of solid surface polymer resin (Corterra) - colour Sahara (Tan). Wall mounted pedestal frame - stainless steel. Enclosure and scuff panel 16 Ga stainless steel. Provide temperature/pressure balancing mixing valve, checks, supply and waste. Field set water temperature at 105 deg. F (41 deg.C). Provide Cast Brass ‘p’ Trap, 1-1/2" (38mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. FIXTURE INSTALLATION

1. Connect fixtures complete with supplies and drains, trapped, supported level and square. Each fixture must have lockshield valves on supplies. Hot water faucet shall be on left. Mixing faucets and thermostatically controlled mixing valves to have check valves on supplies. Fixtures on outside walls to have supplies from floor; other fixtures to be served from wall.

2. Provide chrome plated rigid supplies to fixtures with screwdriver or handwheel stops, reducers and escutcheons.

3. Provide supports, required to set fixtures level and square. Mount fixtures so that 200 lb mass will not loosen or distort mounting.

4. Provide shock absorbers for each fixture or group of fixtures.

5. Mounting heights for wall hung fixtures and showers measured from finished floor:

1. Standard: to comply with manufacturer’s roughing-in details and Ontario Building Code, unless otherwise indicated or specified.

2. Physically handicapped: to comply with OBC 2012.

6. Test all devices and equipment.


West Ferris Secondary School 15516 Domestic Water Piping and FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS, ANCHORS, JOINTS Washroom Upgrades AND GUIDES Project Number: 6134 Page 1



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit product data and technical information.

2. Indicate for each item as applicable:

1. Manufacturer, model number, line content, pressure and temperature rating.

2. Movement handled; axial, lateral, angular and the amounts of each.

3. Nominal size and dimensions including details of construction and assembly.


1. Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section Submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. EXPANSION COMPENSATOR

1. Stainless steel bellows, steel stroud and fittings - for potable water.

2. Fittings: male thread ends or flange/flange.

3. Size and end connection: to suit.

4. Complete unit suitable for working pressure for 1040 kPa (150 psi) and working temperature of 230°C (450°F).

5. Capacity to absorb:

a) 2" linear movement – thread ends.

b) 1 – 6” linear movement – flange type – high corr

6. Standard of Acceptance: Flexonics Model H (up to 2” dia.); Flexonics Model CSF (2 ½” – 8” dia.) for potable water.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

West Ferris Secondary School 15516 Domestic Water Piping and FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS, ANCHORS, JOINTS Washroom Upgrades AND GUIDES Project Number: 6134 Page 2



3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Provide high corr expansion compensator to piping 2 1/2” and 3” dia.

3. Install pipe anchors and guides as indicated and recommended by manufacturer. Anchors to withstand 150% of axial thrust. Piping anchors – structural steel angles, channels, or plates secured to building structure at locations as shown. Provide two guides on each side of and adjacent to joint. Guides to be pipe rolls or structural steel shapes secured to building structure.


West Ferris Secondary School 15860 Domestic Water Piping and COMMERCIAL FANS Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. AMCA 99-10, Standards Handbook.

2. AMCA 210-07, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.

3. CGSB 1-GP-181M, Coating, Zinc Rich, Organic, Ready Mixed.

4. ASHRAE Standard 51-2007 -- Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating (ANSI/ASHRAE Approved) (ANSI/AMCA Standard 210-07)



2. Product data to include fan curves and sound rating data, showing point of operation.

3. Indicate the following: motors, wheels, bearings, shafts and enclosures.

1.4. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

1. Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 - Submittals.

1.5. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

1. Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01300 – Submittals.

1. Spare parts to include:

1. Matched sets of belts.

2. Furnish list of individual manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for equipment such as bearings and seals, and addresses of suppliers, together with list of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing, for placement into operating manual.

1.6. MANUFACTURED ITEMS




1. Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards in force.

2. Provide confirmation of testing.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. FANS – GENERAL

1. Capacity, total static pressure, revolutions per minute, power, model, size, sound power data and as indicated.

2. Sound ratings: comply with AMCA (Air Moving and Conditioning Association) 301, tested to AMCA 300. Unit shall bear AMCA certified sound rating seal.

3. Fans: statically and dynamically balanced, constructed in conformity with AMCA 99.

4. Performance ratings: based on tests performed in accordance with ANSI/AMCA 210, and ANSI/ASHRAE 51. Unit shall bear AMCA certified rating seal, except for propeller fans smaller than 12" diameter.

5. Motors: for use with variable speed controllers where indicated.

6. Motors: sizes as indicated.

7. Accessories and hardware: matched sets of V-belt drives, adjustable slide rail motor bases, belt guards, coupling guards, fan inlet outlet safety screens, outlet dampers and vanes as indicated.

8. Factory primed before assembly in colour standard to manufacturer.

9. Scroll casing drains: as indicated.

10. Bearing lubrication systems plus extension lubrication tubes where bearings are not easily accessible.

11. Provide 18” high roof curbs for all roof mounted fans, unless otherwise specified.

12. Flexible connections: to Section 15911 - Duct Accessories.

13. Acceptable Product: Penn, Cook, Jenco, Greenheck, Broan, Nutone.

2.2. CENTRIFUGAL FANS

1. Description:

1. Rotation, discharge and motor position to be as shown.

2. Fan classification to be established to permit operation at 125% of rotational speed




at point of selection.

2. Fan Wheels:

1. Backward curved or backward inclined blades for fan wheel diameters less than 686 mm.

2. Backward curved air foil blades for fan wheel diameters 686 mm and larger.

3. Accessories:

1. Fans to be fitted with:

1. 38 mm casing drains where fans discharge vertically.

2. Stuffing box style shaft seals on single inlet single width fans and utility sets.

2.3. CABINET FANS

1. Single or multiple wheel DWDI centrifugal fans with motor and V-belt drive, selected in accordance with requirements for centrifugal fans.

2. Arranged with not less than 0.75 wheel diameter clearance between fan inlet and plenum wall.

3. Factory fabricated casing of zinc coated or phosphorus treated steel of 1.6 mm thickness, reinforced and braced for rigidity.

4. Removable panels for access to internal parts.

5. Internally lined cabinet with 50 mm thick rigid acoustic insulation.

6. Expanded metal mesh over insulation on floor.


3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install fans as indicated, complete with resilient mountings supplied by manufacturer.

2. Install fan restraining snubbers as indicated.

3. Install fan complete with vibration isolation, flexible electrical wiring, flexible duct connections to inlet and discharge air ductwork.

4. Flexible connections shall not be in tension during running.

5. Provide sheaves and belts required for final air balance.


West Ferris Secondary School 15891 Domestic Water Piping and DUCTWORK, METALLIC, LOW PRESSURE - Washroom Upgrades TO 500 PA Project Number: 6134 Page 1



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL



1. Do work in accordance with:

1. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, 2005.

2. SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual, 2012 Edition.

3. ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals, and Systems Volumes.



2. Indicate following:

1. Sealants

2. Tape

3. Proprietary Joints

1.4. CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS

1. Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. CLASSIFICATION

1. Ductwork classification as follows:

Maximum SMACNA Pressure Seal Pa "WG Class 500 2 B 250 1 C 125 0.5 C




2.2. SEAL CLASSIFICATION

1. Class A: longitudinal seams, transverse joints, duct wall penetrations and connections made airtight with sealant and tape.

2. Class B: longitudinal seams, transverse joints and connections made airtight with sealant tape or combination thereof.

3. Class C: transverse joints and connections or made air tight with gaskets, sealant tape or combination thereof. Longitudinal seams unsealed.

4. Unsealed seams and joints.

2.3. SEALANT

1. Sealant: water based polymer type flame resistant duct sealant. Temperature range of minus 30°C to plus 93°C.

1. Acceptable material: Duro-Dyne DWN/water based, 3M Fastbond 900.

2.4. TAPE

1. Tape: polyvinyl treated, open weave fiberglass tape, 50 mm (2") wide.

1. Acceptable material: Duro-Dyne

2.5. DUCT LEAKAGE

1. In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual, 2012 Edition.

2. In accordance with ASHRAE 90.1

2.6. FITTINGS

1. Fabrication: to SMACNA.

2. Radiused elbows: standard radius and or short radius with single thickness turning vanes.

3. Square elbows: to 460 mm (18") with single thickness turning vanes.

4. Square elbows: over 460 mm (18") with double thickness turning vanes.

5. Main supply duct branches with splitter damper.

6. Sub branch duct with 45° entry and balancing damper on branch or sub branch duct with square connection, volume extractor and branch duct balancing damper.

7. Transitions:




1. Diverging: 20° maximum included angle.

2. Converging: 30° maximum included angle.

8. Offsets: square elbows or full radiused elbows.

9. Obstruction deflectors: maintain full cross-sectional area. Maximum included angles as for transitions.

2.7. FIRESTOPPING

1. Retaining angles all around duct, on both sides of fire separation.

2. Firestopping material and installation must not distort duct.

2.8. GALVANIZED STEEL

1. Lock forming quality: to ASTM A525M-86, Z90 zinc coating.

2. Thickness: to ASHRAE and SMACNA.

3. Fabrication: to ASHRAE and SMACNA.

4. Joints: to ASHRAE and SMACNA or proprietary manufactured duct joint.

1. Acceptable material: Duct-Mate

2.9. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

1. Strap hangers: of same material as duct, but next sheet metal thickness heavier than duct.

2. Hanger configuration: to ASHRAE and SMACNA. Maximum size duct supported by strap hanger 20".

3. Hangers: galvanized steel angle with black steel rods to ASHRAE and SMACNA.


3.1. GENERAL

1. Install ducts in accordance with ASHRAE and SMACNA.

2. Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier with hangers or rods. Insulate strap hangers 100 mm (4") beyond insulated duct.

3. Support risers in accordance with ASHRAE and SMACNA.

4. Install breakaway joints in ductwork on each side of fire separation.




3.2. HANGERS

1. Strap hangers: install in accordance with SMACNA.

2. Angle hangers: complete with locking nuts and washers.

3. Hanger spacing: in accordance with ASHRAE.

3.3. WATERTIGHT DUCT

1. Provide watertight duct for:

1. Fresh air intake.

2. As indicated.

2. Form bottom of horizontal duct without longitudinal seams. Seal all other joints with duct sealer.

3. Slope horizontal branch ductwork down towards hoods served. Slope header ducts down toward risers.

4. Fit base of riser with 100 mm (4") deep drain sump and 1 1/4" drain connected, with deep seal trap and discharging to open funnel drain.

3.4. SEALING AND TAPING

1. Apply sealant to outside of joint to manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Bed tape in sealant and recoat with minimum of 1 coat of sealant to manufacturer’s recommendations.


West Ferris Secondary School 15893 Domestic Water Piping and FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL



1. Do work in accordance with the following standards except where specified otherwise:

1. CAN/ULC S110-13 for fire tests for air ducts.

2. UL 181-2013 for factory made air ducts and connectors.

3. NFPA 90A-2012 for installation of air conditioning and ventilating systems.

4. NFPA 90B-2012 for installation of warm air heating and air conditioning systems.

5. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 1995.



2. Indicate the following:

1. Thermal properties.

2. Friction loss.

3. Acoustical loss.

4. Leakage.

5. Fire rating.


1. Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.

1.5. SAMPLES

1. Submit samples with product data of each different type of flexible duct being used in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

West Ferris Secondary School 15893 Domestic Water Piping and FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK Washroom Upgrades Page 2 Project Number: 6134



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. GENERAL

1. Factory fabricated.

2. Pressure drop coefficients listed below are based on relative sheet metal duct pressure drop coefficient of 1.00.

3. Flame spread rating not to exceed 25. Smoke developed rating not to exceed 50.

2.2. METALLIC - UNINSULATED

1. Spiral wound flexible aluminum.

2. Performance:

1. Minimum working pressure: 2500 Pa (10"WG)

2. Maximum relative pressure drop coefficient: 3.

3. Acceptable material: Flexmaster triple lock.

2.3. METALLIC - INSULATED

1. Spiral wound flexible aluminum with factory applied flexible glass fibre thermal insulation with vapour barrier and aluminum jacket.

2. Performance:

1. Minimum working pressure: 2500 Pa (10" WG)

2. Maximum relative pressure drop coefficient: 3.

3. Acceptable material: Flexmaster


3.1. DUCT INSTALLATION

1. Install where indicated and in accordance with SMACNA.

2. Support in accordance with SMACNA.

3. Maximum length of flexible duct: 1.8 m, 6' for diffuser / grille duct connection.


West Ferris Secondary School 15912 Domestic Water Piping and DAMPERS - BALANCING Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL



1. Do work in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, 1995, except where specified otherwise.

1.3. PRODUCT DATA


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. SPLITTER DAMPERS

1. Of same material as duct but one sheet metal thickness heavier.

2. Single thickness construction.

3. Control rod with locking device.

4. Bend end of rod to prevent end from entering duct.

5. Pivot: piano hinge.

2.2. SINGLE BLADE DAMPERS

1. Of same material as duct, but one sheet metal thickness heavier. V-groove stiffened.

2. Size and configuration to recommendations of SMACNA, except maximum height 9", 225 mm.

3. Locking quadrant.

4. Inside and outside end bearings.

2.3. MULTI-BLADED DAMPERS

1. Factory manufactured of material compatible with duct.

West Ferris Secondary School 15912 Domestic Water Piping and DAMPERS - BALANCING Washroom Upgrades Page 2 Project Number: 6134



2. Opposed blade: configuration to recommendations of SMACNA.

3. Maximum blade height: 4", 100 mm.

4. Bearings: pin in bronze bushings.

5. Linkage: shaft extension with locking quadrant.

6. Channel frame of same material as adjacent duct, complete with angle stop.


3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install at each take off and where indicated.

2. Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3. For supply, return and exhaust systems, volume dampers are to be located in each branch duct. Each grille, register and diffuser connection to have volume damper located as close as possible to main ducts.


West Ferris Secondary School 15914 Domestic Water Piping and DAMPERS - FIRE AND SMOKE Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. NFPA 90A-2012, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

2. CAN/ULC-S112-10, Fire Test of Fire Damper Assemblies.

3. CAN/ULC-S112.2-07, Fire Test of Ceiling Firestop Flap Assemblies.

4. ULC-S505-1974, Fusible Links for Fire Protection Service.

1.3. PRODUCT DATA


2. Indicate the following:

1. Fire dampers.



2. Provide following:

1. 6 fusible links of each type.


1. Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. FIRE DAMPERS

1. Fire dampers: listed and bear label of ULC and meet requirements of provincial fire authority




and NFPA 90A - to be dynamic type.

2. Mild steel, factory fabricated for fire rating requirement to maintain integrity of fire wall and/or fire separation.

3. Top hinged: interlocking type sized to maintain full duct cross section.

4. Fusible link actuated, weighted to close and lock in closed position when released or having negator-spring-closing operator for multi-leaf type or roll door type in horizontal position with vertical air flow.

5. 40 x 40 x 3 mm (1 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 1/8") retaining angle iron frame, on full perimeter of fire damper, on both sides of fire separation being pierced.

6. Acceptable material: Ruskin, Alumavent.

2.2. FIRE STOP FLAPS

1. To be ULC listed and labelled.

2. Construction of minimum 1.5 mm thick sheet steel with 1.6 mm thick non-asbestos ULC listed insulation and corrosion-resistant pins and hinges.


3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and in accordance with conditions of ULC listing.

2. Fire damper assemblies to be fire tested in accordance with CAN/ULC-S112.

3. Maintain integrity of fire separation.

4. After completion and prior to concealment obtain approvals of complete installation from authority having jurisdiction.

5. Install access door adjacent to each damper. See Section 15911 - Duct Accessories.

6. Coordinate with installer of firestopping.

7. Select interlocking curtain type blade damper frames as follows; (Width is duct dimension parallel to blades. Height is duct dimension perpendicular to blades.)

1. Type A - folded blades completely within airstream:

1. for rectangular ducts with both height and width greater than 300 mm, and where duct velocity is less than 7.5 m/s.

2. Type B - folded blades out of airstream:

1. for rectangular ducts 200 mm to 350 mm in height and width greater than




200 mm, and where duct velocity is less than 7.5 m/s.

3. Type C – folded blades and damper frame shielded with airstream impingement:

1. for circular or flat oval ducts

2. for rectangular duct less than 200 mm in height

3. for rectangular duct less than 350 mm in height when width is less than 200 mm, and

4. for rectangular ducts where duct velocity is greater than 7.5 m/s.


West Ferris Secondary School 15942 Domestic Water Piping and GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit shop drawings and technical information in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

2. Clearly indicate the following: material, gauge, finish, ratings and accessories.

1.2. RELATED WORK

1. Low Pressure Ductwork - Section 15891.


1.3. MANUFACTURED ITEMS

1. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be product of one manufacturer.


1. Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by an independent testing agency signifying adherence to applicable codes and standards.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS GENERAL

1. Sizes indicated are nominal. Provide correct standard product nearest to nominal for capacity noise level, throat and outlet velocity.

2. Furnish factory prime coated steel frames for setting into fire protecting membrane.

3. Where penetrating fire partitions, provide approved steel sleeve attached to structure and secured in accordance with NFPA 90.

4. Frame:

1. Steel: Prime coated, cold rolled steel with exposed joints welded and ground flush, mitred corners and completely closed.

2. Provide full perimeter sponge rubber gaskets.

3. Provide plaster frame or gypsum board.




4. Provide concealed fasteners and operators.

5. Sizes and capacities: as indicated.

6. Standard of Acceptance: E.H. Price, Krueger, Titus, Nailor Industries, Metal Aire.

2.2. SUPPLY GRILLES AND REGISTERS

1. Double deflection with horizontal face and vertical rear bars or as indicated in schedule.

2. Steel or aluminum construction.

2.3. EXHAUST GRILLES AND REGISTERS

1. Single deflection, horizontal adjustable bar type or as indicated in schedule.


2.4. AIR DIFFUSERS

1. Square, rectangular or linear with removable, flow straightening core and blank-off quadrants.


2.5. LINEAR GRILLES

1. Aluminum bar core type with margin as indicated, pattern adjustment, plaster frames, sealing strips, end caps, mitered corners and alignment key strips for multiple sections.

2.6. FINISHES

1. Primer: to CGSB 1-GP-40M, off white.

2. Enamel: to CGSB 1-GP-88E, off white.


3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

2. Fit frame with gasket to prevent leakage, and smudging.

3. Install with flat head screws in countersunk holes where fastenings are visible.




4. Diffusers to be installed with concealed fastenings.


West Ferris Secondary School 15990 Domestic Water Piping and TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 - TAB AGENCY

1. General:

1. The basic testing and balancing shall be provided by Division 15 and in accordance with this Section.

2. The independent TAB Agency employed and paid by Division 15 will be providing the final testing and balancing.


2. Quality assurance:

1. TAB to be performed to standards of ASHRAE.

3. Co-ordination:

1. Co-ordinate all work specified in this Section.

2. Provide all facilities required by TAB Agency in order to carry out work of this Section.

4. Adequacy of work for TAB:

1. TAB Agency to review contract documents before work is started and confirm in writing to Consultant adequacy of provisions for TAB and all other aspects of installation pertinent to TAB.

2. Division 15 shall provide equipment commissioning and preliminary balancing and confirm the proper operation of all systems.

5. List of TAB Agencies:

1. ABG Air Balance Group (416) 283-0637

2. Aerodynamics Inspecting Consultants Ltd. (905) 625-4388 3. Design Test Balance

(905) 886-6513 4. AirPlus (416) 298-6874

PART 2 - GENERAL

1. TAB: means to test, adjust and balance all systems to perform in accordance with Contract Documents.




2. Follow start-up procedures as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise specified.

3. Special start-up procedures may be specified elsewhere.

4. Notify Consultant 7 days prior to start of TAB.

5. Operate all systems to permit TAB to be performed.

6. TAB to apply to systems, equipment and related controls specified in Division 15.

7. Reference organization standards:

1. Do TAB over entire operating range in accordance with most stringent conditions of this specification and standard of following organization.

8. Alternate season testing to be provided by TAB Contractor where applicable.

9. TAB Contractor to inspect site during construction in order to assure that all balancing devices are installed properly and in pre-selected locations.

10. Mechanical contractor to provide the TAB contractor with all related approved shop drawings and change notices.

11. Start TAB only when building is essentially completed, including:

1. Installation of ceilings, doors, windows and other construction affecting TAB.

2. Application of sealing, caulking and weatherstripping.

3. All pressure, leakage and other tests specified elsewhere in Division 15 completed.

4. All provisions for TAB are installed and operational.

12. Start-up, verification for proper, safe and normal operation of mechanical and associated electrical and control systems affecting TAB including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Proper thermal overload protection in place for electrical equipment.

2. Air Systems:

1. Filters in place and in clean condition.

2. Duct systems clean of debris.

3. Air shafts, ceiling plenums are airtight to within specified tolerances.

4. Correct fan rotation.

5. Fire and volume dampers in place and open.

6. Coil fins cleaned and combed.

7. Access doors closed and duct end caps in place.




8. All outlets installed and connected.

13. Accuracy tolerances:

1. Do TAB to following tolerances of design values:

1. HVAC systems: Plus 5%; minus 5%.

2. As original tolerances.

3. Measurements to be accurate to within plus or minus 2% of actual values.

2. Instrument calibration: to be in accordance with TAB referenced organization standard, but within 3 months of commencement of TAB.

14. Submittals prior to commencement of TAB:

1. Proposed methodology and procedures for performing TAB.

2. Proposed check lists and report forms.

3. List of instrumentation, including details and certificates of calibration.

15. Report:

1. Format to be in accordance with TAB referenced organization standard, but using SI units.

2. Report to include as built full system schematics showing results of TAB.

3. Submit, prior to formal submission of TAB reports, for checking and approval by Consultant, sample of rough TAB sheets. Include:

1. Details of instruments used.

2. Details of TAB procedures employed.

3. Calculations procedures.

4. Summaries.

4. Submit 3 copies of TAB reports, each in "D" ring binders, complete with index tabs for verification and approval of Consultant.

16. Verification:

1. Reported measurements shall be subject to verification by Consultant. Provide instrumentation and manpower to verify results of up to 30% of all reported measurements. Number and location of verified measurements to be at discretion of Consultant.

2. Bear costs to repeat TAB, as required, to satisfaction of Consultant.




1. Settings: lock and permanently mark settings as required by reference standard.

2. Completion: TAB to be considered complete only when final reports are approved by Consultant.

PART 3 - AIR MOVING SYSTEMS

1. General: measurements as required by referenced organization standards, including, but not limited to, following:

1. Measurements:

1. Air velocity.

2. Static pressure.

3. Velocity pressure.

4. Temperature:

1. Dry bulb.

5. Cross sectional area.

6. RPM.

7. Electrical power:

1. Voltage 2. Current draw.

2. Location of equipment measurements:

1. Inlet and outlet of each:

1. Fan.

2. Coil.

3. Filter.

4. Damper.

5. Other auxiliary equipment.

3. Location of system measurements at:

1. Main ducts.

2. Main branch ducts.

3. Sub-branch ducts.




4. Each supply, exhaust and return air inlet and outlet.

5. Other auxiliary equipment.

6. All areas served by system.


West Ferris Secondary School 16010 Domestic Water Piping and ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


2. This Section covers items common to Sections of Division 16. This Section supplements requirements of Division 1.

3. Coordinate all requirements with general contractor.

1.2. SCOPE OF WORK

1. Disconnect old electrical devices such as lighting fixtures, heat detector and other devices from renovated washroom areas and Janitor Room.

2. Provide, install and wire new devices such as lighting fixtures, fire alarm devices, lighting controls, etc.

3. Wire new plumbing fixtures with electric control valve such as urinals, etc.

4. Perform any other electrical work required by this contract.

1.3. CODES AND STANDARDS

1. In this document, all references to Code numbers shall mean “Latest Edition”.

2. Do complete installation in accordance with Ontario Electrical Safety Code.

3. Do complete installation in accordance with CSA C22.1-12 except where specified otherwise.

4. Comply with all CSA and inspection Authority Bulletins in force at time of Tender.

5. Abbreviations for electrical terms: to CSA Z85-1983.

6. Where requirements of this specification exceed those of above mentioned standards, this specification shall govern.

1.4. DEFINITIONS

1. “Provide” means supply and install.

2. “Approved” means approved in writing by Consultant.

3. “Inspection Authority” means Electrical Safety Authority.

4. “Consultant” means designated qualified professional engineer acting as representative of




Owner for monitoring of work.

5. “Manual” means Operations and Maintenance manual.

6. “OESC” means latest edition of Ontario Electrical Safety Code

1.5. CARE, OPERATION, START-UP AND INSTRUCTION TO OWNERS

1. Provide certified personnel to instruct Owner of operation electrical equipment. Provide maintenance specialist personnel to instruct on maintenance and adjustment of electrical equipment and any changes or modification equipment must be under terms of guarantee.


3. Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to put equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel are conversant with all aspects of its care and operation.



6. Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factory service engineer to supervise start-up of installation, check, adjust, balance and calibrate components and instruct operating personnel.

1.6. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

1. Site records:

1. One set to be kept on site and all changes to be recorded on daily basis. At the completion of the project, all changes shall be transferred to clean set, signed and passed to the Consultant.

2. Make these drawings available for reference purposes and to inspection at all times.

2. As-built drawings must be delivered before system acceptance.

1.7. VOLTAGE RATINGS

1. Operating voltages: to CAN3-C235-83 (R2006).

2. Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz within normal operating limits established by above standard. Equipment to operate in extreme operating conditions established in above standard without damage to equipment.




1.8. PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTION

1. Submit to Inspection Authority necessary number of drawings and specifications for examination and approval prior to commencement of work.

2. Consultant will provide drawings and specifications required by Inspection Authority at no cost.

3. Submit to the Building Department the necessary number of drawings and specifications for examination prior to commencement of work to obtain a building permit.

4. Submit Notice of Project to Ministry of Labour.

5. Pay associated fees and obtain all permits required for the performance of the work.

6. Notify Consultant of changes required by Inspection Authority or Building Department prior to making changes.

7. Furnish Certificates of Acceptance from Inspection Authority on completion of work to Consultant.

1.9. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

1. Provide materials and equipment in accordance with Division 1.

2. Equipment and material to be CSA certified. Where there is no alternative to supplying equipment which is not CSA certified, obtain special approval from Inspection Authority.

3. Factory assemble control panels and component assemblies.

1.10. ELECTRIC MOTORS, EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS

1. Verify installation and co-ordination responsibilities related to motors, equipment and controls with other trades and as indicated.

2. Mechanical contractor shall supply and install all motors, controls and control wiring. Mechanical contractor shall supply all disconnect switches, starters, motor rated switches and relays, for all motor driven equipment under mechanical contract. All disconnect switches, starters, motor rated switches and relays shall be handed over to electrical contractor for installation and wiring. Both mechanical and electrical contractors to coordinate to ensure proper protection and equipment is provided and included in contract.

3. Control wiring and conduit to be installed in accordance with Section 16111 and 16122, except for connections below 50 V which are related to control systems specified in mechanical sections and as shown on mechanical drawings.

4. Electrical equipment not supplied by mechanical contractor is listed on the drawings or elsewhere in the specifications. Electrical contractor to coordinate with mechanical contractor to ensure proper protection and equipment is provided for all equipment and is included in Contract.




1.11. FINISHES

1. Apply at least one coat of corrosion resistant primer paint to supports, and equipment fabricated from ferrous metals.

2. Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged too extensively to be merely primed and touched up.

3. Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by application of rust resistant primer inside and outside, and at least two coats of finish enamel.

4. Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched or marred during shipment or installation, to match original paint.

5. Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks and fastenings to prevent rusting.

1.12. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

1. Identify electrical equipment with nameplates and labels as follows:

2. Nameplates:

1. Lamacoid 3 mm (1/8") thick plastic engraving sheet, white face, black core, mechanically attached with self tapping screws. For emergency power circuits, use a red face and black core.

NAMEPLATE SIZES Size 1 10 x 50 mm (3/8 x 2") 1 line 3 mm (1/8") high letters Size 2 12 x 70 mm (1/2 x 3") 1 line 5 mm (1/4") high letters Size 3 12 x 70 mm (1/2 x 3") 2 lines 3 mm (1/8") high letters Size 4 20 x 90 mm (3/4 x 4") 1 line 8 mm (3/8") high letters Size 5 20 x 90 mm (3/4 x 4") 2 lines 5 mm (1/4") high letters Size 6 25 x 100 mm (1" x 4") 1 line 12 mm (1/2") high letters Size 7 25 x 100 mm (1" x 4") 2 lines 6 mm (1/4") high letters

3. Labels:

1. Embossed plastic labels with 6 mm (1/4") high letters unless specified otherwise.

4. Wording on nameplates and labels to be approved by Consultant prior to manufacture.

5. Allow for average of twenty-five (25) letters per nameplate and label.

6. Identification to be English.

7. Nameplates for terminal cabinets and junction boxes to indicate system and/or voltage characteristics.

8. Disconnects, starters and contactors: indicate equipment being controlled and voltage.




9. Terminal cabinets and pull boxes: indicate system and voltage.

10. Coordinate names of equipment and systems with Division 15 to ensure that identical names are used.

1.13. WIRING IDENTIFICATION

1. Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings, either numbered or coloured plastic tapes, on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit wiring.

2. Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.

3. Colour code: to CSA C22.1.

4. Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system.

1.14. CONDUIT AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION

1. Colour code conduits, boxes and metallic sheathed cables.

2. Code with plastic tape or paint at points where conduit or cable enters wall, ceiling, or floor, and at 15 m intervals.

3. Colours: 25 mm (1") wide prime colour and 20 mm (3/4") wide auxiliary colour.

PRIME AUXILIARY up to 250 V yellow up to 600 V yellow green Other communication systems green blue Fire alarm red

1.15. WIRING TERMINATIONS

1. Lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring to be suitable for either copper or aluminum conductors.

1.16. MANUFACTURERS AND CSA LABELS

1. Ensure that manufacturer’s registration plates are properly affixed to all apparatus showing the size, name of equipment, serial number, and all information usually provided, including voltage, cycle, phase and the name and address of the manufacturer.

2. Do not paint over registration plates or approved labels. Leave openings through insulation for viewing the plates. Contractors or sub-contractors nameplate not acceptable.

1.17. WARNING SIGNS




1. As specified and to meet requirements of Inspection Authority and Consultant.

1.18. LOCATION OF OUTLETS

1. Locate outlets as shown on drawings.

2. Do not install outlets back-to-back in wall; allow minimum 150 mm (6") horizontal clearance between boxes.

3. Change location of outlets at no extra cost or credit, providing distance does not exceed 3 m (10 ft) and information is given before installation.

4. Locate light switches on latch side of doors. Locate disconnect devices in mechanical rooms on latch side of door.

1.19. MOUNTING HEIGHTS

1. Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centreline of equipment unless specified or indicated otherwise.

2. If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated, verify before proceeding with installation.

3. Install electrical equipment at following heights unless indicated otherwise.

1. Local switches: 1200 mm (48")

2. Emergency lighting heads: 2300 mm (90")

3. Fire alarm horns / strobe: 2100 mm (84")

4. Wall receptacles:

1. General: 400 mm (16")

1.20. LOAD BALANCE

1. Measure phase current to panelboards with normal loads (lighting) operating at time of acceptance. Adjust branch circuit connections as required to obtain best balance of current between phases and record changes.

2. Measure phase voltages at loads and adjust transformer taps to within 2% of rated voltage of equipment.

3. Submit, at completion of work, report listing phase and neutral currents on panelboards operating under normal load. State hour and date on which each load was measured, and voltage at time of test.

1.21. SLEEVES




1. Provide pipe sleeves at points where conduits (53 mm and larger) pass through masonry or concrete.

2. Provide sleeves of minimum 1.0 mm (20 GA) galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints.

3. Use cast iron or steel pipe sleeves with annular fin continuously welded at mid-point.

1. Through foundation walls.

2. Where sleeve penetrates fire rated wall or floor ceiling assembly.

4. Sizes:

1. Provide 5 mm (1/4") clearance all around, between sleeves and conduits.

5. Fill voids around pipes. Remove plastic sleeves.

1. Caulk between sleeve & conduit in foundation walls and below grade floors with oakum that lead between sleeve and pipe.

2. Where sleeves pass through walls or floors, caulk space between conduit and sleeve with waterproof fire retardant non-hardening mastic.

3. Coat exposed exterior surfaces of ferrous sleeves with heavy application of zinc rich paint.

6. Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, floors and partitions, maintain fire rating integrity assembly in compliance with OBC. Submit shop drawings and details on all products prior to commencing work.

7. Temporarily plug all openings during construction.

1.22. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. All electrical work to be carried out by qualified, licensed electricians or apprentices as per the conditions of the Provincial Act respecting manpower vocational training and qualification. Employees registered in a provincial apprentices program shall be permitted, under the direct supervision of a qualified licensed electrician, to perform specific tasks – the activities permitted shall be determined based on the level of training attained and the demonstration or ability to perform specific duties.

2. Conduct and pay for following tests:

1. Power distribution system including phasing, voltage, grounding and load balancing.

2. Circuits originating from branch distribution panels.

3. Lighting and its control.

3. Furnish manufacturer’s certificate or letter confirming the entire installation as it pertains to each system has been installed to manufacturer’s instructions.




4. Insulation resistance testing.

1. Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350 V with a 500 V instrument.

2. Check resistance to ground before energizing.

5. Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel required to conduct tests during and at conclusion of project.

6. Submit test results for Consultant's review.

1.23. DEMOLITION

1. Disconnect and make safe electrical equipment and services as required on site.

2. Be responsible for demolition and removal of electrical equipment and services designated on drawings for removal and as required by work unless specified otherwise under other divisions.

3. Electrical work being removed by other division shall be carried out under direction of this division. Do all disconnecting prior to authorizing removal.

1.24. FIREPROOFING

1. Where cables or conduits pass through floors and fire rated walls, pack space between wiring and sleeve full with firestopping system to CAN 4-S115.

1.25. CUTTING, PATCHING AND FINISHING

1. All cutting, patching and finishing for electrical work shall be by Division 16, coordinated by Division 16. Obtain approval before cutting any structural members. Upon removal of all conduit, wiring, light fixtures, equipment, etc., patch all holes and match existing finishes.

1.26. EXISTING SYSTEMS

1. Before submitting tender price verify on job site location of all accessible existing electrical systems affecting execution of this contract. Difficulties arising during construction will not be considered as grounds for additional payment.

2. Where work involves breaking into or connecting to existing systems, carry out work at times directed by governing authorities, with minimum of disturbance to pedestrian traffic.



1.27. OWNER OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE




1. The existing building may be occupied during normal occupancy hours.

2. Provide temporary protection for all finishes, appliances or equipment in the existing building.

3. Protect and maintain electrical room operations during the work.


West Ferris Secondary School 16111 Domestic Water Piping and CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS Washroom Upgrades AND CONDUIT FITTINGS Project Number: 6134 Page 1



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. LOCATION OF CONDUIT

1. Drawings do not indicate all conduit runs. Those indicated are in diagrammatic form only.

1.3. REFERENCES

1. Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

1. CSA C22.2 No. 18-98 (R2003), Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, and Fittings and Associated Hardware.

2. CSA C22.2 No. 45.2-08, Rigid Metal Conduit.

3. CSA C22.2 No. 56-04 (R2009), Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit.

4. CSA C22.2 No. 83-M1985(R2013), Electrical Metallic Tubing.

1.4. WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

1. Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Division 1.

2. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.

3. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.

4. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. CONDUITS

1. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): with steel couplings, sized as indicated.

2. Rigid metal conduit: galvanized steel threaded conduit, sized as indicated.

3. Epoxy coated conduit: with zinc coating and corrosion resistant epoxy finish inside and outside.




4. Flexible metal conduit and liquid-tight flexible metal conduit, sized as indicated.

2.2. CONDUIT FASTENINGS

1. One hole steel straps to secure surface conduits 50 mm (2") and smaller. Two hole steel straps for conduits larger than 50 mm (2").

2. Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel work.

3. Channel type supports for two or more conduits at 3 m (9') o/c.

4. 6 mm dia threaded rods to support suspended channels.

2.3. CONDUIT FITTINGS

1. Fittings: manufactured for use with conduit specified. Coating: same as conduit.

2. Fittings to be suitable sized for conduit used.

3. Fittings used for EMT to be steel, not cast.

4. Factory "ells" where 90° bends are required for 25 mm (1") and larger conduits.

2.4. EXPANSION FITTINGS FOR RIGID CONDUIT

1. Weatherproof expansion fittings with internal bonding assembly suitable for 100 or 200 mm linear expansion.

2. Watertight expansion fittings with integral bonding jumper suitable for linear expansion and 19 mm deflection in all directions.

3. Weatherproof expansion fittings for linear expansion at entry to panel.

2.5. FISH CORD

1. Polypropylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause minimum interference in spaces through which they pass.

2. Conceal conduits except in mechanical and electrical service rooms and in unfinished areas.

3. Use rigid galvanized steel threaded conduit in areas subject to mechanical injury such as




shops, loading docks etc.

4. Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight.

5. Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) above 2.4 m not subject to mechanical injury.

6. Use flexible metal conduit for final connection to devices in ceiling space max. length 3 m.

7. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for final connection to a vibrating piece of equipment.

8. Bend conduit cold. Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than 1/10th of its original diameter.

9. Mechanically bend steel conduit over 21 mm diameter.

10. All unterminated conduit ends to be reamed and protected by insulating bushings.

11. Install fish cord in empty conduits and all conduits 53 mm and greater.

12. Where conduits become blocked, remove and replace blocked section. Do not use liquids to clean out conduits.

13. Dry conduits out before installing wire.

3.2. SURFACE CONDUITS

1. Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

2. Locate conduits behind infrared or gas fired heaters with 1500 mm clearance.

3. Run conduits in flanged portion of structural steel.

4. Group conduits wherever possible on suspended channels.

5. Do not pass conduits through structural members except as indicated.

6. Do not locate conduits less than 75 mm (3") parallel to steam or hot water lines with minimum of 25 mm (1") at crossovers.

7. All exposed conduits in areas other than service spaces are to be painted to match existing finishes.

3.3. CONCEALED CONDUITS

1. Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

2. Do not install horizontal runs in masonry walls.


West Ferris Secondary School 16122 Domestic Water Piping and WIRES AND CABLES - 0 - 1000V Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. RELATED SECTIONS


2. Section 16151 – Wire and Box Connections – 0 – 1000V.

1.2. REFERENCES

1. CSA C22.2 No. 0.3-09, Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables.

2. CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 131-07 (R2012), Type TECK 90 cable.

1.3. PRODUCT DATA

1. Submit product data in accordance with Division 1.




3. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. GENERAL

1. All conductors to be copper, unless otherwise noted.

2.2. BUILDING WIRES

1. All conductors to be copper, unless otherwise noted.

2. Conductors: stranded for 10 AWG and larger. Minimum size: 12 AWG for power and # 16 AWG for controls and fire alarm.

3. Copper conductors: size as indicated, with 600 V insulation of chemically cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene material type RW75, or with thermoplastic insulation and nylon jacket, type T-75 nylon, rated at 600 V.




4. Wire and conduit sizes shown are based on RW75 XLPE and are minimum sizes. Contractor is responsible for wire and conduit sized for other approved wires.

5. Conductors shall be colour coded. Conductors size 10 AWG and smaller shall have colour impregnated into insulation at time of manufacture.

1. Colour code wiring for 120 / 208 Volt equipment as follows

1. Phase conductors: Red, Black, Blue

2. Neutral conductors: White

3. Bonding to ground: Green

4. Isolated bonding conductor: Green with Yellow stripe

2.3. ARMOURED CABLES

1. Conductors insulated copper sizes as indicated, minimum wire size #12 AWG.

2. Type: AC90.

3. Armour: interlocking type fabricated from aluminum strip.

4. Connectors: to suit.

5. Fastenings:

1. One hole steel straps to secure surface cables 25 mm and smaller. Two hole steel straps for cables larger than 25 mm.

2. Channel type supports for two or more cables at 1500 mm centres.

3. Threaded rods: 6 mm dia. To support suspended channels.

6. Approved compression type lugs accurately sized to allow bolted connections at each cable end.

7. All wiring shall be concealed in floor slabs, walls, ceiling and furred spaces. AC90 armoured cable may be used or AC90 armoured cable may be used only for drops to fixtures, maximum length 3 m in concealed ceiling spaces, or drops to receptacles in GWB partitions, maximum length 4.5 m. Otherwise cables shall be in EMT conduit.

2.4. CONTROL CABLES

1. Type LVT: 2 soft annealed copper conductors sized as indicated with thermoplastic insulation and outer covering thermoplastic jacket.

2. Plenum rated cable (FT-6) required in ceiling space where not in conduit.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRES

1. Install wiring in conduit in accordance with Section 16111, unless otherwise noted.

2. Use type RW75 or T-75 for branch circuit wiring unless otherwise indicated.

3. Minimum wire size shall be No. 12 AWG. For 15A, 120V branch circuit home runs which exceed 23 m length shall be minimum No. 10 AWG, and minimum No. 8 AWG for runs which exceed 36 m. For 20A, 120V branch circuit home runs which exceed 17 m in length shall be minimum No. 10 AWG, and minimum No. 8 AWG for runs which exceed 27 m. Where existing wiring is re-used, minimum wire sizes shall apply and wiring shall be replaced when it does not meet the minimum size.

4. Existing wiring may only be re-used if permitted by Engineer.

3.2. INSTALLATION OF ARMOURED CABLES

1. Use only for drops to fixtures maximum length 3 m in concealed ceiling spaces, or drops to receptacles in GWB partitions maximum length 4.5 m.

2. Terminate cables in accordance with Section 16151.

3.3. INSTALLATION OF CONTROL CABLES

1. Install control cables in conduit in accordance with Section 16111.

2. Ground control cable shield.


West Ferris Secondary School 16131 Domestic Water Piping and SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES Washroom Upgrades AND CABINETS Project Number: 6134 Page 1



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL



1. Submit shop drawings and product data for cabinets in accordance with Division 1.



4. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. SPLITTERS

1. Sheet metal enclosure, welded corners and formed hinged cover suitable for locking in closed position.

2. Main and branch lugs to match required size and number of incoming and outgoing conductors as indicated.

3. At least three spare terminals on each set of lugs in splitters less than 400 A.

2.2. JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

1. Welded steel construction with screw-on flat covers for surface mounting.

2. Covers with 25 mm (1") minimum extension all around, for flush-mounted pull and junction boxes.

2.3. CABINETS

1. Type E: sheet steel, hinged door and return flange overlapping sides, handle, lock and catch, for surface mounting.

2. Type T: sheet steel cabinet, with hinged door, latch, lock, 2 keys, containing 19 mm painted plywood backboard for surface/flush mounting as indicated.

West Ferris Secondary School 16131 Domestic Water Piping and SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES Washroom Upgrades AND CABINETS Project Number: 6134 Page 2



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. SPLITTER INSTALLATION

1. Install splitters and mount plumb, true and square to the building lines.

2. Extend splitters full length of equipment arrangement except where indicated otherwise.

3.2. JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS INSTALLATION

1. Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible location.

2. Mount cabinets with top not higher than 2 m (6'-0") above finished floor.

3. Install terminal block as indicated in type T cabinets, and for all fire alarm connections where multi-conductor cables are used.

4. Only main junction and pull boxes are indicated. Install pull boxes so as not to exceed 30 m (100'-0") of conduit run between pull boxes.

3.3. IDENTIFICATION

1. Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Provisions.

2. Install size 2 identification labels indicating system name, voltage and phase.


West Ferris Secondary School 16132 Domestic Water Piping and OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. CSA C22.1-12 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1.


1. Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Division 1, and with the Waste Reduction Workplan.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. OUTLET AND CONDUIT BOXES - GENERAL

1. Size boxes in accordance with CSA C22.1.

2. 102 mm (4") square or larger outlet boxes as required for special devices.

3. Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.

4. Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices.

5. Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one system are grouped.

2.2. SHEET STEEL OUTLET BOXES

1. Electro-galvanized steel single and multi gang flush device boxes for flush installation, minimum size 76 x 50 x 38 mm or as indicated. 102 mm (4") square outlet boxes when more than one conduit enters one side with extension and plaster rings as required.

2. Electro-galvanized steel utility boxes for outlets connected to surface-mounted EMT conduit, minimum size 102 x 54 x 48 mm

3. 102 mm (4") square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture outlets.

4. 102 mm (4") square outlet boxes with extension and plaster rings for flush mounting devices in finished tile walls.

West Ferris Secondary School 16132 Domestic Water Piping and OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS Washroom Upgrades Page 2 Project Number: 6134



2.3. CONDUIT BOXES

1. Cast FS or FD feraloy boxes with factory-threaded hubs and mounting feet for surface wiring of switches and receptacle.

2. Electro-galvanized utility tape for indoor surface wiring.

2.4. FITTINGS - GENERAL

1. Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats.

2. Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris.

3. Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 35 mm and pull boxes for larger conduits.

4. Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Support boxes independently of connecting conduits.

2. Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent entry of debris during construction. Remove upon completion of work.

3. For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to permit wall finish to come within 6 mm of opening.

4. Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit, mineral insulated and armoured cable connections. Reducing washers are not allowed.

5. Provide a suitable outlet box for each light, switch, receptacle or other outlet, approved for the particular area in which it is to be installed.

6. Locate outlet boxes, mounted in hung ceiling space, so they do not obstruct or interfere with the removal of lay-in ceiling tiles.

7. Offset outlet boxes, shown back to back in partitions, horizontally to minimize noise transmission between adjacent rooms.


West Ferris Secondary School 16141 Domestic Water Piping and WIRING DEVICES Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL



1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. SWITCHES

1. 20 A, 120 V single pole, three-way, or four-way specification grade, as indicated.

2. Manually-operated general purpose ac switches with following features:

1. Terminal holes approved for No. 10 AWG wire.

2. Silver alloy contacts.

3. Urea or melamine moulding for parts subject to carbon tracking.

4. Suitable for back and side wiring.

5. White toggle.

3. Toggle operated fully rated for tungsten filament and fluorescent lamps, and up to 80% of rated capacity of motor loads.

4. Provide motor rated switches, where indicated. To be complete with pilot light.

5. Switches of one manufacturer throughout project.

6. Acceptable materials: Hubbell, Bryant, Leviton, Pass & Seymour.

2.2. RECEPTACLES

1. Duplex receptacles, CSA type 5-15 R, 125 V, 15 A, U ground, with following features:

1. White urea moulded housing.

2. Suitable for No. 10 AWG for back and side wiring.




3. Break-off links for use as split receptacles.

4. Eight back wired entrances, four side wiring screws.

5. Triple wipe contacts and riveted grounding contacts.

2.3. OCCUPANCY SENSORS - EXISTING LINE VOLTAGE SENSORS TO BE RE-USED

2.4. COVER PLATES

1. Cover plates for wiring devices, complete with clear adhesive label with black lettering indicating source panel and circuit number.

2. Cover plates from one manufacturer throughout project.

3. Stainless steel, vertically brushed, 1 mm (1/16") thick cover plates for all wiring devices mounted in flush-mounted outlet box (including voice / data outlets).

4. Sheet metal cover plates for wiring devices mounted in surface-mounted FS or FD type conduit boxes, or utility boxes.

5. Weatherproof gasketted, lockable rain-tight while-in-use clear cover, suitable for GFCI outlet, equal to Leviton 5977-CL series.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Switches:

1. Install single throw switches with handle in "UP" position when switch closed.

2. Install switches in gang type outlet box when more than one switch is required in one location.

3. Mount toggle switches at height specified in Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements or as indicated.

4. Where lighting controls are grouped, each control shall be labelled to indicate the area controlled.

2. Receptacles:

1. Install receptacles in gang type outlet box when more than one receptacle is required in one location.

2. Mount receptacles at height specified in Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements or as indicated.




3. Cover plates:

1. Protect stainless steel cover plate finish with paper or plastic film until painting and other work is finished.

2. Install suitable common cover plates where wiring devices are grouped.

3. Do not use cover plates meant for flush outlet boxes on surface-mounted boxes.

4. Occupancy Sensors:

1. Re-use existing sensors and ancillary devices at location(s) shown on drawings.

2. Perform necessary field adjustments and settings of sensors as required for proper operation.

3. Time delay for all sensors to be set at 10 minutes.

4. Passive infrared setting to be set at minimum.

5. Occupancy Sensor Commissioning:

1. Manufacturer’s representative to provide on-site commissioning and set-up of system and provide letter confirming:

1. Installation is as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Settings and time delay are as per specification.

3. Confirm devices are operating properly after installation, and provide minor field modifications as required.

4. Identify which devices were adjusted in the field.

6. Grounding:

1. Ground all wiring devices and respective outlet boxes in accordance with applicable sections of Ontario Electrical Safety Code. Ensure proper ground connections of isolated ground receptacle.


West Ferris Secondary School 16151 Domestic Water Piping and WIRE AND BOX CONNECTIONS - Washroom Upgrades 0 TO 1000V Project Number: 6134 Page 1



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. CSA C22.2 No. 65-13 Wire Connectors.

2. EEMAC 1Y-2, 1961 Bushing Stud Connectors and Aluminum Adapters (1200 Ampere Maximum Rating).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. MATERIALS

1. Pressure type wire connectors: with current carrying parts of copper sized to fit copper conductors as required.

2. Fixture type splicing connectors: with current carrying parts of copper sized to fit copper conductors 10 AWG or less.

3. Bushing stud connectors: to EEMAC 1Y-2 to consist of:

1. Connector body and stud clamp for stranded copper conductors.

2. Clamp for stranded copper conductors

3. Stud clamp bolts.

4. Bolts for copper conductors

5. Sized for conductors as indicated.

4. Clamps or connectors for armoured cable, flexible conduit, as required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and:

West Ferris Secondary School 16151 Domestic Water Piping and WIRE AND BOX CONNECTIONS - Washroom Upgrades 0 TO 1000V Project Number: 6134 Page 2



1. Apply coat of zinc joint compound on aluminum conductors prior to installation of connectors.

2. Install mechanical pressure type connectors and tighten screws with appropriate compression tool recommended by manufacturer. Installation shall meet secureness tests in accordance with CSA C22.2 No.65.

3. Install fixture type connectors and tighten. Replace insulating cap.

4. Install bushing stud connectors in accordance with EEMAC 1Y-2.


West Ferris Secondary School 16191 Domestic Water Piping and FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. RELATED WORK


2. Fastenings and supports: Section 01600 Material and Equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. SUPPORT CHANNELS

1. U shape, size 41 x 41 x 2.5 mm thick, surface mounted or suspended.

2. Smaller sections subject to Consultant’s approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Secure equipment to tile and plaster surfaces with nylon anchors, with independent grip protrusions.

2. Secure equipment to poured concrete with expandable inserts.

3. Secure equipment to hollow masonry walls or suspended ceilings with toggle bolts.

4. Secure surface mounted equipment with twist clip fasteners to inverted T bar ceilings. Ensure that T bars are adequately supported to carry weight of equipment specified before installation.

5. Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring loaded bolts, cable clamps designed as accessories to basic channel members.

6. Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction or support system using straps.

1. One-hole steel straps to secure surface conduits and cables 50 mm and smaller.

2. Two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than 50 mm.

3. Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel work.

7. Suspended support systems.

West Ferris Secondary School 16191 Domestic Water Piping and FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS Washroom Upgrades Page 2 Project Number: 6134



1. Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6 mm dia threaded rods and spring clips.

2. Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channels supported by 6 mm dia threaded rod hangers where direct fastening to building construction is impractical.

8. For surface mounting of two or more conduits use channels at 3 m oc spacing.

9. Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support structures where indicated or as required to support conduit and cable runs.

10. Ensure adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to equipment where there is no wall support.

11. Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables.

12. Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support except with permission of other trade and approval of Consultant.

13. Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and conduits, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations.

14. Provide minimum 2400 mm support channel on each suspended fixture in open areas, with rigid stem supports from structure to channel, and fixture secured to channel.

15. All fastenings and supports to be hot dipped galvanized. All cut ends exposing base material to be completely sealed with field applied coating to give equivalent protection prior to installation. Following complete installation, all damage to protective layer to be carefully and completely touched up with same field applied coating.


West Ferris Secondary School 16450 Domestic Water Piping and GROUNDING - SECONDARY Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. IEEE 837-2002, Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding.

2. CSA Z32.1-M1986, Safety in Anaesthetizing Locations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. EQUIPMENT

1. Grounding conductors: bare stranded copper, soft annealed, size as indicated.

2. Insulated grounding conductors: green, type TWH.

3. Non-corroding accessories necessary for grounding system, type, size, material as indicated, including but not necessarily limited to:

1. Grounding and bonding bushings.

2. Protective type clamps.

3. Bolted type conductor connectors.

4. Thermit welded type conductor connectors.

5. Bonding jumpers, straps.

6. Pressure wire connectors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION GENERAL

1. Install complete permanent, continuous grounding system including, conductors, connectors, accessories, as indicated, to conform to requirements of Consultant, and Inspection Authority. Where EMT is used, run ground wire in conduit.

West Ferris Secondary School 16450 Domestic Water Piping and GROUNDING - SECONDARY Washroom Upgrades Page 2 Project Number: 6134



2. Install connectors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3. Protect exposed grounding conductors from mechanical injury.

4. Use mechanical connectors for grounding connections to equipment provided with lugs.

5. Soldered joints not permitted.

6. Install bonding wire for flexible conduit, connected at both ends to grounding bushing, solderless lug, clamp or cup washer and screw. Neatly cleat bonding wire to exterior of flexible conduit.

7. Make grounding connections in radial configuration only, with connections terminating at single grounding point. Avoid loop connections.

3.2. SYSTEM AND CIRCUIT GROUNDING

1. Install system and circuit grounding connections to neutral of secondary 208 V system.

3.3. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

1. Install grounding connections to typical equipment included in, but not necessarily limited to following list. Service equipment, switchgear, duct systems, starters, control panels, and distribution panels.

3.4. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements.

2. Perform ground continuity and resistance tests using method appropriate to site conditions and to approval of Consultant and Inspection Authority.

3. Perform tests before energizing electrical system.


West Ferris Secondary School 16505 Domestic Water Piping and LIGHTING EQUIPMENT Washroom Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6134



PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

2. Submit complete data prepared by independent testing laboratory for all luminaires, for review by Consultant.

3. Photometric data to include: total input watts, candle power summary, candela distribution zonal lumen summary, luminaire efficiency, CIE type, coefficient of utilization, lamp type and lumen rating in accordance with IESNA testing procedure.

4. Indicate fixture manufacturer and model number.


1. Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Division 1, and with the Waste Reduction Work Plan.

2. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.

3. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.

4. Be responsible for the storage of all obsolete fluorescent lamps and ballasts in approved containers.

5. Include for the co-ordination and disposal with the lamp and ballast disposal company for removal of spent lamps and ballasts.

6. Identify unit costs for the destruction of PCB ballasts to be included as a separate price in tender.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. MATERIALS

1. LED lighting fixtures; to DLC Standard and Premium.

2.2. LUMINAIRE DETAILS

1. Provide luminaires as indicated.

2. Provide supporting devices, plaster frames, junction boxes and outlet boxes where required.

3. Stamped steel luminaire bodies not to be less than 1.0 mm thick cold rolled steel. Reflective




steel plates of minimum 0.8 mm thick metal.

4. Provide lenses or diffusers of glass or acrylic material as indicated.

5. Provide gasketting, stops and barriers to form light traps to prevent light leaks.

2.3. LED Lights

1. All LED lighting fixtures to be energy star or DLC rated.

2.4. CONTROLS

1. Ensure all lighting controls are fully compatible with the specific light fixtures and lamps being controlled.

2.5. FINISHES

1. Baked enamel finish:

1. Conditioning of metal before painting:

1. For corrosion resistance conversion coating to ASTM F 1137.

2. For paint base, conversion coating to ASTM F 1137.

2. Metal surfaces of luminaire housing and reflectors finished with high gloss baked enamel to give smooth, uniform appearance, free from pinholes or defects.

3. Reflector and other inside surfaces finished as follows:

1. White, minimum reflection factor 85%.

2. Colour fastness: yellowness factor not above 0.02 and after 250h exposure in Atlas fade-ometer not to exceed 0.05.

3. Film thickness, not less than 0.03 mm average and in no areas less than 0.025 mm.

4. Gloss not less than 80units as measured with Gardner 60° gloss meter.

5. Flexibility: withstand bending over [12] mm mandrel without showing signs of cracking or flaking under 10 times magnification.

6. Adhesion: 24mm square lattice made of 3mm squares cut through film to metal with sharp razor blade. Adhesive cellulose tape applied over lattice and pulled. Adhesion satisfactory if no coating removed.

2. Alzak finish:

1. Aluminium sheet fabricated from special aluminum alloys and chemically




brightened, subsequently anodically treated to specifications established by Alcoa, to produce:

1. Finish for mild commercial service, minimum density of coating 7.8 g/m ², minimum reflectivity 83% for specular, 80.5% for semi-specular and 75% for diffuse.

2. Finish for regular industrial service, minimum density of coating 14.8 g/m ², minimum reflectivity 82% for specular and 73% for diffuse.

3. Finish for heavy duty service, minimum density of coating 21.8 g/m ², minimum reflectivity 85% for specular, 65% for diffuse.

2.6. LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE

'A' 4 foot LED wall mounted strip-light, nominally 1220 mm (48”) long with steel housing, high-gloss, baked enamel finish, flat diffused lens, surface mounted, white and complete with 4000K, general distribution, 3,000 lumen output, Plug-In Wiring And All Required Components. 80CRI, 120V. CSA Certified.

Acceptable products: Lithonia CLX Series or Approved Equal

'A1' 4 foot LED wall mounted strip-light, nominally 1220 mm (48”) long with steel housing,

high-gloss, baked enamel finish, flat diffused lens, surface mounted, white and complete with 4000K, general distribution, 5,000 lumen output, 80CRI, 120V. CSA Certified.

Acceptable products: Lithonia CLX Series or Approved Equal 'B' LED square flush mount, nominally 330 mm (13”) wide, 2 3/4" thick, with metal housing,

thermal formed diffuser, white finish and complete with 1730 Lumens, 4000K Colour Temp.,40W LED package., 120 V. CSA Certified.

Acceptable products: Lithonia FMMSQL Series or Approved Equal ‘C’ Recessed LED troffer, nominally 610 x 1220 mm (2’ x 4’) for use in grid inverted T-bar

ceiling and complete with 47 Watt drive with 4800 lumen LED output, 4000k Colour Temp, 120V, c/w dimming LED driver and all required components. CSA Certified.

Acceptable products: Lithonia 2GTL4 Series Eaton 24GR Series GE LTL24 Series

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION




1. Locate and install luminaires as indicated.

2. For all luminaires with reflective surfaces, contractor is to use clean gloves during installation and clean off all fingerprints, dirt and dust at completion of project.

3. Where new luminaires are specified, the Contractor shall include for all required assembly and mounting. Provide all wiring, connections, inter-fixture wiring harnesses, fittings, hangers, safety chains, aligners, box covers and accessories which may be required to ensure a complete, safe and fully operational system.

4. Thoroughly review all ceiling types, construction details and mounting arrangements prior to placing orders for new luminaires.

5. Where existing luminaires are to be retrofitted, the work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Removing existing lamp(s) and ballast(s) and disposal. Disposal to be done to the satisfaction of all local and environmental codes, in accordance with MOE guidelines and in approved disposal facility. Provide report upon completion of project.

3.2. WIRING

1. Connect luminaires to lighting circuits as indicated.

3.3. LUMINAIRE ALIGNMENT

1. Align luminaires mounted individually parallel or perpendicular to building grid lines.


DRAWING NO:

This drawing and the design it represents

are protected by copyright law and are

the property of the author. Do not

reproduce or use in any fashion without

written consent. Graphic accuracy of the

drawing cannot be assured. Do not rely

on scaled dimensions.

PROJECT NORTH:

North Bay, ON.

Washroom &

Domestic Water

Piping Upgrades

West Ferris

Secondary School

NO.

1

Issued For Tender

ISSUE DATE

18.03.15

DRAWN BY:

LIBRARY NO:

SCALE:

PROJECT NO: 6134

.

as noted

BCIN # 29003

Mechanical

Plumbing

Floor Plans & Details

M101

AC

DRAWING NO:








PROJECT NORTH:

North Bay, ON.

Washroom &

Domestic Water

Piping Upgrades

West Ferris

Secondary School

NO.

1

Issued For Tender

ISSUE DATE

18.03.15

DRAWN BY:

LIBRARY NO:

SCALE:

PROJECT NO: 6134

.

as noted

BCIN # 29003

Mechanical

Plumbing

Partial Main Floor Plan

M102

AC

DRAWING NO:








PROJECT NORTH:

North Bay, ON.

Washroom &

Domestic Water

Piping Upgrades

West Ferris

Secondary School

NO.

1

Issued For Tender

ISSUE DATE

18.03.15

DRAWN BY:

LIBRARY NO:

SCALE:

PROJECT NO: 6134

.

as noted

BCIN # 29003

Mechanical

Plumbing

Partial Main Floor Plan

M103

AC

DRAWING NO:








PROJECT NORTH:

North Bay, ON.

Washroom &

Domestic Water

Piping Upgrades

West Ferris

Secondary School

NO.

1

Issued For Tender

ISSUE DATE

18.03.15

DRAWN BY:

LIBRARY NO:

SCALE:

PROJECT NO: 6134

.

as noted

BCIN # 29003

Mechanical

Plumbing

Washroom Details

M104

AC

DRAWING NO:








PROJECT NORTH:

North Bay, ON.

Washroom &

Domestic Water

Piping Upgrades

West Ferris

Secondary School

NO.

1

Issued For Tender

ISSUE DATE

18.03.15

DRAWN BY:

LIBRARY NO:

SCALE:

PROJECT NO: 6134

.

as noted

BCIN # 29003

Mechanical

Plumbing

Washroom Details

M105

AC

DRAWING NO:








PROJECT NORTH:

North Bay, ON.

Washroom &

Domestic Water

Piping Upgrades

West Ferris

Secondary School

NO.

1

Issued For Tender

ISSUE DATE

18.03.15

DRAWN BY:

LIBRARY NO:

SCALE:

PROJECT NO: 6134

.

as noted

BCIN # 29003

Electrical

Power & Lighting

Washroom Details

E101

AC

DRAWING NO:








PROJECT NORTH:

North Bay, ON.

Washroom &

Domestic Water

Piping Upgrades

West Ferris

Secondary School

NO.

1

Issued For Tender

ISSUE DATE

18.03.15

DRAWN BY:

LIBRARY NO:

SCALE:

PROJECT NO: 6134

.

as noted

BCIN # 29003

Electrical

Power & Lighting

Washroom Details

E102

AC

DRAWING NO:

Key Plans, Floor Plans,

General Notes & Legend








A1

PROJECT NORTH:

Mitchell Jensen Architects

124a Main Street East

North Bay, ON, P1B 1A8

705.474.3250

North Bay, ON.

Washroom &

Domestic Water

Piping Upgrades

West Ferris

Secondary School

NO.

1

Issued for Tender

ISSUE DATE

March 15, 2018

DRAWN BY:

LIBRARY NO:

SCALE:

PROJECT NO: 218001

218001-FP

BD

as noted

MITCHELL

JENSEN

ARCHITECTS

S

LICENCE

TAO

N

ASIOR IO

NO IAC

TOF

DRAWING NO:

Washroom Floor Plans








A2

PROJECT NORTH:




705.474.3250

North Bay, ON.

NO.

1

Issued for Tender

ISSUE DATE

March 15, 2018

DRAWN BY:

LIBRARY NO:

SCALE:

PROJECT NO: 218001

218001-FP

BD

as noted

MITCHELL

JENSEN

ARCHITECTS

Washroom &

Domestic Water

Piping Upgrades

West Ferris

Secondary School

S

LICENCE

TAO

N

ASIOR IO

NO IAC

TOF

DRAWING NO:

Washroom Floor Plans








A3

PROJECT NORTH:




705.474.3250

North Bay, ON.

NO.

1

Issued for Tender

ISSUE DATE

March 15, 2018

DRAWN BY:

LIBRARY NO:

SCALE:

PROJECT NO: 218001

218001-FP

BD

as noted

MITCHELL

JENSEN

ARCHITECTS

Washroom &

Domestic Water

Piping Upgrades

West Ferris

Secondary School

S

LICENCE

TAO

N

ASIOR IO

NO IAC

TOF

DRAWING NO:

Washroom Elevations








A4




705.474.3250

North Bay, ON.

NO.

1

Issued for Tender

ISSUE DATE

March 15, 2018

DRAWN BY:

LIBRARY NO:

SCALE:

PROJECT NO: 218001

218001-FP

BD

as noted

MITCHELL

JENSEN

ARCHITECTS

Washroom &

Domestic Water

Piping Upgrades

West Ferris

Secondary School

S

LICENCE

TAO

N

ASIOR IO

NO IAC

TOF

DRAWING NO:

Main Floor Ceiling

Replacement Plan








A5

PROJECT NORTH:




705.474.3250

North Bay, ON.

NO.

1

Issued for Tender

ISSUE DATE

March 15, 2018

DRAWN BY:

LIBRARY NO:

SCALE:

PROJECT NO: 218001

218001-FP

BD

as noted

MITCHELL

JENSEN

ARCHITECTS

Washroom &

Domestic Water

Piping Upgrades

West Ferris

Secondary School

S

LICENCE

TAO

N

ASIOR IO

NO IAC

TOF